Trailer Refrigeration

EVAPORATOR

CONDENSER EVXV

RECEIVER

OPERATION & SERVICE

MANUAL
for
VECTOR 1550
Trailer Refrigeration Units

62--61753 Rev --
OPERATION & SERVICE
MANUAL
for
VECTOR 1550
Trailer Refrigeration Units
 TABLE OF CONTENTS

PARAGRAPH NUMBER Page

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION STATEMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--1
1.3 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1--5
UNIT DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.1 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.2 Engine Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.3 Engine Switches, Transducers and Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.4 Generator (GEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.5 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.6 Compressor Switches, Transducers and Sensors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.7 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.8 Liquid Injection Solenoid Valve (LIV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.9 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.10 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--6
2.3.11 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.12 Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.3.13 Economizer Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.4.1 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.4.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.4.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.4.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--7
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.5.1 Multiple Languages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.5.2 Automatic Start--Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.5.3 Special Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.5.4 Temperature Controller Component Description And Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--8
2.6 ELECTRONIC MODULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.6.1 Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.6.2 Phase Reversal Module (PRM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7.1 Light Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7.2 Door/Remote Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7.3 Out of Range Alarm/Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7.4 Remote Temperature Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
2.7.5 IntelliSet/ProductShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13
2.7.6 Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13
2.8 ENGINE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13

i 62--61753
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

2.9 COMPRESSOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--13

2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--14
2.11 ELECTRICAL DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--14
2.12 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--15
2.13 SAFETY DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.14 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT DURING COOLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--16
2.15 HEAT AND DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--17
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
3.1 STARTING UNIT -- ENGINE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--1
3.2 STARTING UNIT -- STANDBY OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--2
3.3 SELF TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--3
3.4 PRETRIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--4
3.5 CHANGING SET POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--7
3.6 START--STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--8
3.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--10
3.8 SLEEP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--11
3.9 MANUAL DEFROST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--13
3.10 TRIP START . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--14
3.11 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--15
3.12 VIEW INACTIVE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--16
3.13 UNIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--17
3.14 VIEW HOURMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--21
3.15 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--22
3.16 LANGUAGE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--26
3.17 STOPPING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--27
3.18 DATA RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.18.1 Microprocessor Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.18.2 Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.18.3 Data Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.18.4 Data Recorder Power--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--28
3.19 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.19.1 IntelliSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--29
3.19.2 Remote Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--32
TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2 SYSTEM START--UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2.1 Standby Start--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2.2 Engine Start--Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--1
4.2.3 Transition To High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
4.3 START--STOP OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3
4.3.1 Start--Stop Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3
4.3.2 Stop Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--3
4.3.3 Re--Start Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4

62--61753 ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

4.4 CONTINUOUS OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4

4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4
4.5.1 Temperature Determination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4
4.5.2 Heat/Cool/Null Mode Switching Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--4
4.5.3 Cool Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
4.5.4 Heat Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
4.5.5 Null Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
4.5.6 Defrost Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--5
4.6. USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--6
4.6.1 Supply Air Limit Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--6
4.6.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
4.6.3 ProductShield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--8
4.6.4 ProductShield Temperature Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--9
4.7. PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE OVERRIDES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
4.7.1 High Discharge Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
4.7.2 RAT & SAT Alarms Both Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
4.7.3 Engine Speed Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--10
4.7.4 Operating Mode Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--11
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.1 TECHNICIAN CONFIGURATION/ TEST MODES (REMOVE JUMPER MODE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.1.1 Configuration Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.1.2 Component Test Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
5.1.3 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--3
5.2 DOWNLOADING DATA WITH THE PC CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--4
5.3 INSTALLING NEW SOFTWARE USING A PC Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
5.3.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
5.3.2 Troubleshooting Loading Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--5
5.4 LogiCOLD MICROPROCESSOR REPLACEMENT & CONFIGURATION SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
5.4.1 Microprocessor Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
5.4.2 Microprocessor Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--6
5.4.3 Configurations Via Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
5.4.4 Functional Parameters Via Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--7
5.4.5 Microprocessor Final Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
MESSAGECENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
6.1 MessageCenter MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6--1
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
7.2 NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--1
7.3 DRIVER / OPERATOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3
1 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--3

iii 62--61753
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.4 SHUTDOWN ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4

11 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--4
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--5
13 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--7
14 HIGH A/C AMPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--8
15 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--9
16 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--10
17 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--11
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--12
19 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--14
20 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
21 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--15
22 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--16
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--17
24 COMPRESSION RATIO EXCEEDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--19
27 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--20
28 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--21
7.5 START--UP / ENGINE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--22
30 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--22
31 FAILED TO START -- AUTO MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--23
34 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--24
35 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--25
36 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--26
37 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--27
38 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--28
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--29
40 CHECK GLOW PLUGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--31
41 ENGINE STALLED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--32
7.6 WARNING / STATUS ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--33
51 ALTERNATOR (BATTERY CHARGER) NOT CHARGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--33
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--34
54 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--36
55 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--37
57 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--38
58 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--38
59 DATALOGGER (DATACORDER) NOT RECORDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--39
60 DATALOGGER (DATA RECORDER) TIME WRONG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--40
61 DOOR OPEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--41

62--61753 iv
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.7 ELECTRICAL ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--42

71 BAD F2 OR F3 FUSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--42
73 NO POWER--CHECK POWER CORD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--43
75 COMP MOTOR OVERLOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--44
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--45
77 EVAP (EVAPORATOR) MOTOR OVERHEATED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--47
89 CHECK REMOTE AUTO LIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--49
91 CHECK HTCON1 RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--49
92 CHECK HTCON2 RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--50
93 CHECK START UP BUZZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--51
94 CHECK COMP CONTACTOR 1 (COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR RELAY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--51
95 CHECK CDCON RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--52
96 CHECK GENCONR RELAY COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--52
98 CHECK HIGH TEMP THERMOSTAT (EVHTS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--53
99 CHECK STANDBY (POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR RELAY) COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--53
100 OVERLOAD/GROUND FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--54
109 CHECK EVCON COIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--55
112 CHECK BYPASS (Unloader) CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--56
113 CHECK ECONOMIZER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--57
114 CHECK LIV CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--58
7.8 SENSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--59
121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR (AAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--59
122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--60
123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR (SAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--61
124 CHECK DEFROST TERMINATION 1 SENSOR (DTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--62
125 CHECK COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (CDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--63
126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR (FLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--64
127 CHECK SUCTION TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--65
128 AMPS MEASURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--65
129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR (ENCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--66
130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR (ENRPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--67
131 CHECK EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (EVOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--68
133 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 (REMSN1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--69
134 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 (REMSN2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--69
135 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 (REMSN3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--69

v 62--61753
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.9 Pretrip ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70

P141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70
P145 CHECK SPEED SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70
P151 CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70
P152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70
P153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--70
P154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--71
P155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--71
P156 CHECK BYPASS (UNLOADER SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--71
P157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--71
P158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P159 CHECK DEFROST TERMINATION 1 SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P161 CHECK SUCTION TEMPERATURE SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P169 CHECK ECONOMIZER CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P170 CHECK LIV (liquid Injection Valve) CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--72
P174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--73
P175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--73
P177 CHECK EVAPORATOR SUPERHEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--73
P180 CHECK SUCTION MODULATING VALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--73
P186 CHECK EVAPORATOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--73
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--74
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--75
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--76
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--77
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--78
P190 CHECK CONDENSER FAN MOTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--80
P206 CHECK CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--81
P207 CHK COMPRESSOR CONTACT CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--81
P208 CHK GENERATOR CONT CIRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--82
P209 CHECK STANDBY CONT CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--83
7.10 MAINTENANCE ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--84
223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--84
224 STANDBY MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--84
225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--85
226 SERVICE SOON--PM #1 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--85
227 SERVICE SOON--PM #2 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--86
228 SERVICE SOON--PM #3 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--86
229 SERVICE SOON--PM #4 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--87
230 SERVICE SOON--PM #5 DUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--87

62--61753 vi
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

7.11 MICROPROCESSOR ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--88

232 SETPOINT ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--88
233 MODEL # ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--88
237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--89
238 CONFIGURATIONS 1 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--90
242 DISCHARGE PRESS CALIBRATE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--91
243 SUCTION/EVAP CALIBRATE ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--91
245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--92
246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--92
248 CONFIGURATION MODE / HP2 ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--93
249 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7--94
SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
8.3 PRETRIP INSPECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--3
8.4 ENGINE SERVICE AND COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
8.4.1 Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
8.4.2 Priming the Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
8.4.3 Mechanical Fuel Pump Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
8.4.4 Electric Pump Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
8.4.5 Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
8.4.6 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
8.4.7 Lube Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
8.4.8 Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
8.4.9 Engine Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
8.4.10 Radiator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7
8.4.11 Water Pump V--Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7
8.4.12 Engine Speed Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7
8.4.13 Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--7
8.4.14 Servicing Glow Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
8.5 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
8.5.1 Removing The Refrigerant Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
8.5.2 Refrigerant Leak Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
8.5.3 Evacuation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--9
8.5.4 Adding Refrigerant To System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--9
8.6 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--10
8.6.1 Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--10
8.6.2 Evaporator Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11
8.6.3 Condenser Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--12
8.6.4 Economizer Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--12
8.6.5 Filter Drier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
8.6.6 Sight Glass Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
8.6.7 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13

vii 62--61753
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

8.6.8 Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15

8.6.9 Economizer, Unloader, & Liquid Injection Solenoid Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--17
8.6.10 Economizer Thermostatic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--18
8.6.11 High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--18
8.6.12 Pressure Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--19
8.6.13 Defrost Air Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--19
8.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENT SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
8.7.1 Heaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
8.7.2 Evaporator Fan & Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
8.7.3 Condenser Fan & Motor Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--21
8.7.4 Battery Charger(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--21
8.7.5 Generator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--21
8.7.6 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--26
8.7.7 Sensor Checkout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--26
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
9.1 DIESEL ENGINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--1
9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
9.1.5 Malfunction In The Engine Starting Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--2
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--3
9.2 BATTERY CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--4
9.3 GENERATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--5
9.4 REFRIGERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4.1 Unit Will Not Cool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4.3 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4.4 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--6
9.4.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--7
9.4.6 Defrost Cycle Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--7
9.4.7 Abnormal Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.4.8 Abnormal Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.4.9 Control System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--8
9.4.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
9.4.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
9.4.12 Solenoid Valve Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--9
9.4.13 Economizer System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9--10
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1
10.1 HARNESS PLUG WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10--1

62--61753 viii
 LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE NUMBER Page
Figure 2--1. Front View -- Refrigeration System Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--2
Figure 2--2. Front View -- Engine/Control Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--3
Figure 2--3. Evaporator Section -- Grille Removed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--4
Figure 2--4. Control Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--5
Figure 2--5. Control Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--9
Figure 2--6. Display And Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--10
Figure 2--7. OGF Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
Figure 2--8. PRM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--12
Figure 2--9. Refrigerant Circuit Bypass Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--18
Figure 2--10. Refrigerant Circuit Standard Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--19
Figure 2--11. Refrigerant Circuit Economized Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--20
Figure 4--1. Auto Start Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Figure 4--2. Range Lock Settings -- Non Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--7
Figure 4--3. Range Lock Settings -- Overlapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--8
Figure 5--1. Technicians Interface Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--1
Figure 8--1. Fuel System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
Figure 8--2. Fuel Bleed Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--4
Figure 8--3. Mechanical Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
Figure 8--4. Electric Fuel Pump (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
Figure 8--5. Fuel Level Sensor Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--5
Figure 8--6. Lube Oil Flow Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
Figure 8--7. Engine Speed Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--6
Figure 8--8. Engine Crankcase Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
Figure 8--9. Refrigerant System Service Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--8
Figure 8--10. Compressor Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--10
Figure 8--11. Compressor Plug Retaining Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--11
Figure 8--12. Economizer Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--13
Figure 8--13. Suction modulation valve (CSMV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
Figure 8--14. CSMV Coil (Bi--Polar Design) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
Figure 8--15. Electronic expansion valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15
Figure 8--16. Electronic Expansion Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--16
Figure 8--17. Solenoid Valves (ESV, LIV & USV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--17
Figure 8--18. Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb and Thermocouple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--18
Figure 8--19. Typical Setup for Testing High Pressure Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--19
Figure 8--20. Defrost Air Switch Test Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
Figure 8--21. Evaporator Fan Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--21
Figure 8--22. Generator Assy (P/N 54--00589--50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--25
Figure 8--23. Bolt Hole Pattern For Bell Housing and Crankshaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--25
Figure 8--24. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--26

ix 62--61753
 LIST OF TABLES
TABLE NUMBER Page
Table 2-1. Model Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Table 2-2. Additional Support Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2--1
Table 3--1. Unit Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--18
Table 3--2 Functional Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3--23
Table 4-1. Glow Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4--2
Table 5--1. Component Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--2
Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5--8
Table 8--1. Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--1
Table 8--2. CSMV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--14
Table 8--3. EVXV Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--15
Table 8--4. Blower Wheel Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--20
Table 8--5. Sensor Resistance (AAT, RAT, SAT, ENCT, EVOT, CST, DTT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--27
Table 8--6. Sensor Resistance (CDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--28
Table 8--7. Temperature Pressure Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8--29

62--61753 x
 SECTION 1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Your Carrier Transicold refrigeration unit has been
designed with the safety of the operator in mind. During
normal operation, all moving parts are fully enclosed to
help prevent injury. During all pre-trip inspections, daily
inspections, and problem troubleshooting, you may be
exposed to moving parts. Please stay clear of all moving
parts when the unit is in operation and when the unit
Start/Run--Off switch is in the START/RUN position.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone at-
tempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards.
Should a problem develop with these com-
ponents, contact your nearest Carrier Tran-
sicold dealer for replacement.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should a techni-
cian electrically probe the processor at any
point, other than the connector terminals
where the harness attaches. Microproces-
sor components operate at different volt-
age levels and at extremely low current lev-
els. Improper use of voltmeters, jumper
wires, continuity testers, etc. could perma-
nently damage the processor.
CAUTION
Most electronic components are suscepti-
ble to damage caused by electrical static
discharge (ESD). In certain cases, the hu-
man body can have enough static electric-
ity to cause resultant damage to the compo-
nents by touch. This is especially true of the
integrated circuits found on the truck/trailer
microprocessor.
Auto-Start
Your refrigeration unit is equipped with Auto-Start in
both Start--Stop and Continuous Run Operation. The
unit may start at any time when the Start/Run--Off
Switch (SROS) is in the Start/Run position. A buzzer will
sound for 5 seconds before the unit is started. When
performing any check of the refrigeration unit (e.g.,
checking the belts, checking the oil), make certain that
the SROS is in the OFF position.
1--1
Engine Coolant
The engine is equipped with a pressurized cooling
system, including a pressurized coolant bottle. Under
normal operating conditions, the coolant in the engine
and radiator is under high pressure and is very hot.
Contact with hot coolant can cause severe burns. Do
not remove the cap from a hot radiator or bottle. If the
cap must be removed, cover it with a rag and remove it
very slowly in order to release the pressure without
spray.
Refrigerant
The refrigerant contained in the refrigeration system of
your unit can cause frostbite, severe burns, or blindness
when in direct contact with the skin or eyes. For this
reason, and because of legislation regarding the
handling of refrigerants during system service, we
recommend that whenever your unit requires service of
the refrigeration system you contact your nearest
Carrier Transicold authorized repair facility for service.
Battery
This unit is equipped with a lead-acid type battery. The
battery normally vents small amounts of flammable
hydrogen gas. Do not smoke when checking the battery.
A battery explosion can cause serious physical harm
and/or blindness.
1.2 SPECIFIC WARNING AND CAUTION
STATEMENTS
To help identify the label hazards on the unit and explain
the level of awareness each one carries, an explanation
is given with the appropriate consequences:
DANGER -- warns against an immediate hazard which
WILL result in severe personal injury or death.
WARNING -- warns against hazards or unsafe condi-
tions which COULD result in severe personal injury or
death.
CAUTION -- warns against potential hazard or unsafe
practice which could result in minor personal injury, or
product or property damage.
The following statements are specifically applicable to
this refrigeration unit and appear elsewhere in this
manual. These recommended precautions must be un-
derstood and applied during operation and maintenance
of the equipment covered herein.
62-61753
 WARNING
LogiCOLD microprocessor equipped units
may start automatically at any time the
START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) is not in
the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fit-
ted with two way communication equip-
ment that will allow stating of the unit from a
remote location even though the SROS is in
the off position.
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied at the
power plug or from the generator. When
performing service or maintenance proced-
ures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufac-
turers instruction, ensure the START/RUN--
OFF switch is in the OFF position and,
whenever practical, disconnect the high
voltage source and disconnect the negative
battery connection. NEVER dis--assemble
the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD
INSIDE! This field can interfere with cardiac
implants such as pacemakers and defibril-
lators.
WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or
any other starting aids be used to start en-
gine.
WARNING
Ensure the power plug is clean and dry
before connecting to any electrical outlet/
receptacle. Do not connect to any electri-
cal outlet without checking that it meets
the 380/3/50 and 16 Amp electrical
requirements of the unit.
WARNING
Always place SROS in the OFF position
and turn off the high voltage power sup-
ply before disconnecting the high voltage
power plug from the unit.
62-61753
WARNING
If the unit is in Standby Operation and
powered, voltage will be applied to high
voltage components (i.e. the fan motor con-
tactor) and those components will operate
(i.e. the fan blades will turn) when those
components are energized using compon-
ent test mode.
WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot radiator; if
the cap must be removed, do so very slowly
in order to release the pressure without
spray.
WARNING
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, ab-
rasion or damage at every Pretrip inspec-
tion and replace if necessary. Also check
battery cable routing to ensure that clamps
are secure and that cables are not pinched
or chafing against any components.
WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and
clothing when working with solvents.
WARNING
Beware of moving poly V-belt and belt driv-
en components.
WARNING
When working with belts, beware of pinch
points.
WARNING
The +5.0 VDC (terminal B) is common be-
tween the Compressor Discharge Pressure
Transducer, the Compressor Suction Pres-
sure Transducer, and the RPM sensor. If
this circuit is shorted to ground (due to one
of the mentioned components being defec-
tive, or a worn wire) the MessageCenter will
show
Suction Pressure: --1 bar (--14.7 psig)
Discharge Pressure: 0 bar/psig
Engine RPM: 0.
1--2
 WARNING
Before removal of the compressor, relieve
the internal pressure by very carefully loos-
ening the couplings to break the seal.
WARNING
Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a
pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is
approximately 159.9 bar (2350 psig). Do not
use oxygen in or near a refrigerant system
as an explosion may occur. (See
Figure 8--19)
WARNING
High voltage (dielectric) testing must not be
performed on the machine without first ob-
serving NEMA rules. The insulation of this
generator winding may be safely checked
by using a megohm meter. A high reading
indicates good insulation.
WARNING
Generators of this type should not be
“flashed”. Operation with external voltage
source or momentary shorting of leads will
damage the generator and may cause inju-
ry.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone at-
tempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards.
Should a problem develop with these com-
ponents, contact your nearest Carrier Tran-
sicold dealer for replacement.
CAUTION
Service Mode MUST be used whenever re-
moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
checking or evacuating.
CAUTION
The display and MessageCenter may be-
have differently during the software loading
process, depending on the version of soft-
ware currently in the controller. DO NOT IN-
TERRUPT THE SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
PROCESS ONCE IT HAS STARTED.
1--3
CAUTION
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of in-
ert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for
all Carrier Transicold refrigeration units;
otherwise compressor failure will occur.
For more information Refer to Technical
Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing
CAUTION
When changing oil filter, the new filter
should be primed (partially filled) with clean
oil if possible. If the filter is not primed, the
engine may operate for a period with no oil
supplied to the bearings.
CAUTION
Use only monopropylene glycol anti-freeze
as glycol by itself will damage the cooling
system. Always add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-
freeze and water to radiator/engine. Never
exceed more than a 60% concentration of
anti-freeze. Use a low silicate anti-freeze.
CAUTION
The mica shim must be used during disas-
sembly of the generator from the engine.
Never attempt to remove the rotor from the
stator. Leave the shim in place until the gen-
erator is re--installed on the engine.
CAUTION
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT
ENGINE, however hot water can always be
added to a cold engine.
CAUTION
Only a refrigerant drum containing R404A
should be connected to this refrigeration
unit in order to pressurize the system.
However, dry nitrogen may be used to in-
crease pressure. Any other gas or vapor will
contaminate the system and require addi-
tional purging and evacuation.
CAUTION
Do not vapor charge R--404A. Only liquid
charging is acceptable.
62-61753
 CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
the suction or discharge service valves
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone at-
tempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards.
Should a problem develop with these com-
ponents, contact your nearest Carrier Tran-
sicold dealer for replacement.

CAUTION
Do not direct water or steam into the gener-
ator openings. Do not allow any soap and
water solutions to enter the generator.

62-61753 1--4
1.3 SAFETY DECALS

62--02143--00 Rev --

62--61343--00 Rev -- or 62--02139--01 Rev C

1--5 62-61753
1.3 SAFETY DECALS -- Continued

62--03958--00 or --01 62--61478 Rev A 62--03957--01

Heat Warning Burn Warning High Voltage Warning

62--60280--00 Rev A Standby Safety Waring

62-61753 1--6
1.3 SAFETY DECALS -- Continued

62--60192--00 Rev D

1--7 62-61753
 9

SECTION 2
UNIT DESCRIPTION

2.1 INTRODUCTION
This manual contains operating data, electrical data and
WARNING service instructions for the Vector 1550 refrigeration
system.

LogiCOLD microprocessor equipped units
may start automatically at any time the
START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) is not in
the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fit-
ted with two way communication equip-
ment that will allow stating of the unit from a
remote location even though the SROS is in
the off position.
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied at the
power plug or from the generator. When
performing service or maintenance proced-
ures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufac-
turers instruction, ensure the START/RUN--
OFF switch is in the OFF position and,
whenever practical, disconnect the high
voltage source and disconnect the negative
battery connection. NEVER dis--assemble
the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD
INSIDE! This field can interfere with cardiac
implants such as pacemakers and defibril-
lators.
Table 2-1. Model Chart
Additional support manuals are listed in Table 2-2.
The model/serial number plate is located inside the unit
on the frame as shown in Figure 2--1.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The Vector 1550 unit is a hybrid diesel/electric, fully
charged, pre-wired, refrigeration/heating “nosemount”
unit. The unit is used on insulated trailers to maintain
cargo temperatures within very close limits.
Electrical power is supplied to the unit from a power plug
or by the integral generator which is driven by the
engine. The generator provides nominal 460V/3Ø/60Hz
power when the engine is in high speed and nominal
300V/3Ø/45Hz power in low speed.
The control system is microprocessor based. Once the
microprocessor is set at the desired temperature, the
system automatically selects cooling and heating cycles
as necessary to maintain the desired temperature within
very close limits.
The unit can be described as having three major
sections, the condensing section (Figure 2--1) which
includes the engine--generator drive package
(Figure 2--2), evaporator section (Figure 2--3) and
controls (Figure 2--2, Figure 2--4, Figure 2--5 &
Figure 2--6).

Nominal Engine
R-404A Speed
Model Compressor Engine
LB KG High Low
NDK33BN6KB 14 6.35 Scroll V1505 1830 1450
NDK330N6KB Road only unit -- DO NOT select this unit in configurations at this time.

Table 2-2. Additional Support Manuals

Manual Number Equipment Covered Type of Manual

62--61751 Vector 1550 Operator’s Manual
62--61752 Vector 1550 Parts Manual

2--1 62-61753
 1 24

5 23

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
(LOCATION)
15

16
17
18
19

20
21 22

1. Condenser/Radiator 14. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)

2. Defrost Air Switch (DAS) 15. Discharge Service Valve
3. Receiver And Sight Glasses 16. Compressor Discharge Temperature
4. Liquid Line Service Valve Sensor (CDT)
5. Compressor Suction Modulation Valve (CSMV) 17. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer
6. Filter Drier (CSP)
7. Liquid Injection Valve (LIV) 18. Suction Service Valve
8. Economizer Heat Exchanger 19. Compressor (C)
9. Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) 20. Model/Serial Number Nameplate
10. Compressor Discharge Pressure 21. Economizer Connection
Transducer (CDP) 22. Power Supply Receptacle (PSR)
11. Thermal Expansion Valve (Economizer) 23. Condenser Fans And Motors (CDM1 & CDM2)
12. Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV) 24. Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT)
13. High Pressure Switch (HP1)
Figure 2--1. Front View -- Refrigeration System Components

62-61753 2--2
 9

22

21

20

19

18
(Behind Filter)
1
17
2
16

3 15

5 6 9 11 12 13 14
7
8 10

1. Fuel Filter 12. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)

2. Lube Oil Filter 13. Download Port
3. Battery Charger (BTYC) 14. Display And Keypad
4. Battery (BTY) 15. Lube Oil Fill
5. Generator (GEN) 16. Fuel Solenoid (FS)
6. Engine Speed Sensor (ENRPM) 17. Control Box (See Figure 2--3)
7. Oil Drain 18. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
8. Starter Motor/Solenoid/Contact (SM/SS/SSC) 19. Air Cleaner Service Indicator
9. Speed Control Solenoid (SCS) 20. Air Cleaner
10. Lube Oil Dipstick 21. Muffler
11. Manual Fuel Pump Plunger 22 Coolant Bottle
Figure 2--2. Front View -- Engine/Control Components

2--3 62-61753
 2
1

19

17
18

16

3
5
15 4
14

13
12

11

10

9
8

1. Supply air temperature sensor (SAT) 10. Drain pan heater (HTR2)
2. Evaporator fan and motor service access 11. Heater Connection Service Access
3. Evaporator fans and motors (EVM1 & EVM2) 12. Evaporator expansion valve (EVXV)
4. Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS) 13. Electric heaters (HTR1)
5. Defrost termination temperature sensor (DTT) 14. Electric heaters (HTR3)
6. Compressor Suction Modulating Valve 15. Evaporator Coil
7. Return air temperature sensor (RAT) 16. Nozzle cover
-- Located on grill 17. Defrost Air Switch (DAS)
8. Evaporator outlet temperature sensor (EVOT) 18. High Connection (Red)
9. Evaporator outlet pressure transducer (EVOP) 19. Low Connection (Clear)
Figure 2--3. Evaporator Section -- Grille Removed

62-61753 2--4
 9

25 24 23 22

2
3 21
4

5
6 20
7 19

18
8

9
17
10
11
16
12
13
14
(LOCATION)

15

1. AC current transformer (CT2/3/4) 14. Run control relay (RCR). Used with remote
2. Overload ground fault (OGF) control panel only
3. Phase reversal module (PRM) 15. Buzzer (B)
4. Heater contactor 1 (HTCON1) 16. Microprocessor (M)
5. Heater contactor 2 (HTCON2) 17. Control Module
6. Microprocessor power fuse (F6) 18. Contactor power fuse (F9)
7. Main fuse (F5) 19. Condenser motor contactor (CDCON)
8. Starter solenoid relay (SSR) 20. Evaporator contactor (EVCON)
9. Glow plug relay (GPR) 21. Fuses (F7,F8,F10,F11,F12)
10. Compressor contactor relay (CCONR) 22. Compressor contactor (CCON)
11. Heat contactor 1 relay (HTCON1R) 23. Generator contactor (GENCON)
12. Generator contactor relay (GENCONR) 24. Power source contactor 2 (PSCON2)
13. Power supply contactor relay (PSCONR) 25. Power source contactor (PSCON)
Figure 2--4. Control Box

2--5 62-61753
2.3 CONDENSING SECTION
The condensing section (see Figure 2--1) consists of an
engine--generator drive package, compressor,
economizer heat exchanger, condenser fans,
condenser/radiator coil, refrigerant controls, defrost air
switch, piping, wiring, and associated components.
The engine--generator drive package (see Figure 2--2)
includes the engine, generator, air cleaner, muffler,
coolant system, fuel system, oil filter system and engine
sensors.
2.3.1 Engine
The engine is a four cylinder diesel which gives excellent
fuel economy and has easy starting characteristics. It is
equipped with spin-on lube oil and fuel oil filters for
easier filter changes. The engine cooling system consists
of the radiator (which is integral with the condenser coil)
and coolant overflow bottle. The system is also fitted with
an electronic battery charger which converts generator or
standby alternating current to direct current for battery
charging. Refer to Section 2.8 for engine data.
2.3.2 Engine Air System
The air cleaner prolongs the life and performance of the
engine by preventing dirt and grit from getting into the
engine and causing excessive wear on all operating parts.
It is the responsibility of the operator to give the air cleaner
equipment regular and constant attention in accordance
with the instructions. (Refer to section 8.4.8)
2.3.3 Engine Switches, Transducers and Sensors.
a. Engine Speed Sensor (ENRPM)
The ENRPM provides the microprocessor with engine
speed information to be displayed, recorded in the Data
Recorder and used to control the refrigeration system. It
is located on the front of the engine near the generator.
b. Engine Oil Pressure Switch (ENOPS)
The ENOPS is normally open and closes on pressure
rise to signal to the microprocessor the engine has
sufficient oil pressure for operation. There is a 15
second delay after the engine starts to allow the oil
pressure to build up before the microprocessor looks at
the input from this switch. The switch is located on the
gear case cover.
c. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor (ENCT)
The ENCT provides microprocessor with engine
coolant temperature information to be displayed,
recorded in the Data Recorder and used to control the
refrigeration system . The sensor is located on the
starter side of the engine near the #4 Injector.
2.3.4 Generator (GEN)
The generator is directly bolted to the engine and sup-
plies nominal 460V/3Ø/60Hz power when the engine is
in high speed and nominal 300V/3Ø/45Hz power in low
speed.
2.3.5 Compressor
The unit is fitted with a scroll compressor equipped with
suction and discharge service valves and an econom-
izer connection. The compressor draws refrigerant gas
62-61753
from the evaporator and delivers it to the condenser at
an increased temperature and pressure. The pressure
is such that refrigerant heat can be absorbed by the
surrounding air at ambient temperatures.
2.3.6 Compressor Switches, Transducers and
Sensors.
a. Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
(CDP)
The CDP provides a signal to the microprocessor
equivalent to pressure leaving the compressor. It is
located on the discharge line above the compressor.
b. Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer
(CSP)
The CSP provides a signal to the microprocessor
equivalent to pressure entering the compressor suction
service valve. It is located on the suction service valve.
c. Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
(CDT)
The CDT provides a signal to the microprocessor
equivalent to the temperature of the gas leaving the
compressor. It is located on the upper dome of the
compressor.
d. Compressor Suction Temperature Sensor (CST)
The CST provides a signal to the microprocessor
equivalent to to the temperature of the gas entering the
compressor suction service valve. It is located on the
line entering the valve.
e. High Pressure Switch (HP1)
The HP1 is normally closed and opens on pressure rise
to signal to the microprocessor to shut down the engine
or shut down the system if operating on standby power.
It is located on the discharge service valve.
2.3.7 Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
The USV is opened, during periods of low load, to by-
pass a portion of the compressed gas from the econom-
izer connection to the suction service valve. This action
balances compressor capacity with the load and results
in lower power consumption.
2.3.8 Liquid Injection Solenoid Valve (LIV)
The LIV is opened, during periods high compressor dis-
charge temperature to inject refrigerant into the eco-
nomizer connection to cool the compressor.
2.3.9 Condenser Coil
The condenser coil is of the tube in fin type and acts as a
heat exchanger in which the compressed refrigerant
gas is condensed into a liquid and lowered in tempera-
ture. Air movement over the condenser is provided by
two electric motor driven fans mounted in the condens-
ing section.
2.3.10 Ambient Air Temperature Sensor (AAT)
The AAT provides microprocessor with condenser
entering air temperature information to be displayed,
recorded in the Data Recorder and used to control the
refrigeration system. The sensor is located behind the
front grill.
2--6
 9
2.3.11 Filter Drier
The drier is a cylinder shell containing a drying agent
and screen. It is installed in the liquid line and functions
to keep the system clean and remove moisture from the
refrigerant.
2.3.12 Receiver
Liquid refrigerant from the condenser drains into the
receiver. The receiver serves as a liquid reservoir when
there are surges due to load changes in the system; as a
storage space when pumping down the system and as a
liquid seal against the entrance of refrigerant gas into
the liquid line.
The receiver is provided with two bull’s--eye sight
glasses, for the observation of liquid level & moisture
content, and a pressure relief valve.
2.3.13 Economizer Circuit
The economizer circuit consist of a compact braze plate
heat exchanger, a solenoid valve (ESV) and a thermal
expansion valve (TXV). It is located above the com-
pressor.
In the economized mode, the frozen and pull down ca-
pacity of the unit is increased by subcooling the liquid
refrigerant entering the evaporator expansion valve.
Overall efficiency is increased because the gas leaving
the economizer enters the compressor at a higher pres-
sure, therefore requiring less energy to compress it to
the required condensing conditions.
To place the unit in the economized mode, the micropro-
cessor energizes (opens) the economizer solenoid
valve (ESV). Refrigerant flows from the main liquid line,
through the ESV to the economizer thermal expansion
valve (TXV). The TXV controls the flow of liquid to the
economizer heat exchanger according to changes in
superheat of the refrigerant leaving the economizer
heat exchanger.
2.4 EVAPORATOR SECTION
The evaporator (see Figure 2--3) fits into a rectangular
opening in the upper portion of the trailer front wall.
When installed, the evaporator section is located inside
this refrigerated compartment, and the condensing
section is outside.
The evaporator assembly consists of an evaporator coil,
evaporator fan motors, evaporator expansion valve,
evaporator coil & drain pan heaters, defrost termination
temperature sensor, supply & return air sensors and a
high temperature switch. Evaporator equipment also
includes the suction modulating valve, located in the
condensing section
Heating is accomplished by electric heaters mounted on
the evaporator coil.
Automatic evaporator coil defrosting is initiated by either
a differential air switch (which senses the pressure drop
across the coil) or by the defrost timer in the
microprocessor.
2.4.1 Evaporator Coil
The unit evaporator is a tube in fin type. The operation of
the compressor maintains a reduced pressure within
2--7
the coil. At this reduced pressure, the liquid refrigerant
evaporates at a temperature sufficiently low enough to
absorb heat from the air.
2.4.2 Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
The EVXV is an electronic device which controls the
flow of liquid to the evaporator according to changes in
superheat of the refrigerant leaving the evaporator. The
expansion valve maintains a relatively constant degree
of superheat in the gas leaving the evaporator regard-
less of suction pressure. The valve has a dual function --
automatic expansion control and prevention of liquid
return to the compressor.
2.4.3 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve
(CSMV)
The CSMV opens and closes as required for capacity
control of the refrigeration system cooling cycle. It is
located in the suction line at the exit of the evaporator
assembly.
2.4.4 Evaporator Switches, Transducers and Sen-
sors
a. Evaporator Outlet Pressure Transducer (EVOP)
The EVOP provides the microprocessor with
evaporator outlet pressure information to be displayed,
recorded in the Data Recorder and used to control the
refrigeration system. It is located in the evaporator
section near the evaporator expansion valve in the
suction line.
b. Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
EVHTS is a safety switch which opens on a temperature
rise to de--energize the electric heaters if the tempera-
ture in the evaporator compartment reaches the cut--out
point. It is located on the center tube sheet of the evapo-
rator coil
c. Evaporator Outlet Temperature Sensor (EVOT)
The EVOT provides the microprocessor with
evaporator outlet temperature information to be
displayed, recorded in the Data Recorder and used to
control the refrigeration system. It is located on the
suction line near the evaporator expansion valve.
d. Defrost Termination Temperature Sensor (DTT)
The DTT is located on the center tube sheet of the
evaporator coil. It provides the microprocessor with
evaporator temperature information to be displayed, re-
corded in the Data Recorder and used to determine
termination of defrost.
e. Return Air Temperature Sensor (RAT)
The RAT is a temperature control probe which provides
the microprocessor with information on the temperature
of the air entering the evaporator section. The reading is
displayed, recorded in the Data Recorder and used to
control the refrigeration system. It is located on roadside
of the return air grille.
f. Supply Air Temperature Sensor (SAT)
The SAT is a temperature control probe which provides
the microprocessor with information on the temperature
of the air leaving the evaporator section. The reading is
displayed, recorded in the Data Recorder and used to
62-61753
control the refrigeration system. It is located in the en-
gine side supply air outlet housing.
2.5 SYSTEM OPERATING CONTROLS AND
COMPONENTS
The temperature controller is a Carrier Transicold
LogiCOLD microprocessor based controller. Once the
controller is set at the desired temperature, the unit will
operate automatically to maintain the desired
temperature within very close limits.
2.5.1 Multiple Languages
The displayed language may be changed by toggling
the LANGUAGE switch. Language order is: Spanish,
French, German, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Russian,
Portuguese and English.
2.5.2 Automatic Start--Stop
Standard equipment includes an auto start--stop
feature. This feature provides automatic cycling of the
diesel engine, which in turn offers an energy efficient
alternative to continuous operation of the engine with
control of temperature by alternate cooling and heating
of the supply air (evaporator outlet air).
2.5.3 Special Features
The following additional special features are
incorporated into the Carrier Transicold LogiCOLD
Microprocessor:
An LCD display MessageCenter which clearly displays
all information in dot matrix form.
Unit Operation & Alarms are displayed in text (not in
codes)
Unit Data and Functional Parameters
Programmable Maintenance Hour Meters (resettable
from the Keypad)
Bright LED Alarm & Indicator Lights
Fully Automated Pretrip
Automated Micro Self--test
Data Recorder (date & time can be set from the Keypad)
Trip Start to record date/time of trip in Data Recorder
memory
PC card functionality for downloading data, upgrading
programming, and Configuration set up
FETs (Field Effect Transistors) that are illuminated
when a circuit is energized
Automatic Engine Starting
Functional Parameter locks
Alarms are stored in microprocessor memory for future
reference
2.5.4 Temperature Controller Component De-
scription And Location
The temperature controller consists of two modules; the
control module and the display, MessageCenter &
keypad module, and a switch board. The control module
62-61753
is housed in the control box on the lower roadside
(engine side) corner of the unit. The display & keypad
module and switch board are located, for driver access,
at the lower roadside corner of the unit.
CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone at-
tempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards.
Should a problem develop with these com-
ponents, contact your nearest Carrier Tran-
sicold dealer for replacement.
a. Control Module
The control module (see Figure 2--5) consists of the
microprocessor (with status LED), 3 fuses (F1, F2, &
F3), a DC current sensor (CT1), 2 relays (RR & SR), 2
status LED’s (LED30 & LED31), 6 input/output
connectors (QC), 6 digital input/output connectors
(MP), a programming card slot (with status LED’s) and
twelve FET indicators.
The microprocessor is totally self contained and does
not contain any serviceable components.
Microprocessor activity can be determined by observing
the LED’s and FET’s (see Figure 2--5 and Table 5--1). If
the microprocessor is calling for a circuit to be
energized, the indicator is illuminated.
The PC card slot allows programming of the
microprocessor using Carrier Transicold PC Cards. The
controller automatically detects the presence and type
of PC Card inserted and responds accordingly. The
different types of PC Cards are:
S Download Card for copying unit data from Data
Recorder.
S Options PC Card for installing optional software
programs
S Configuration PC Card for setting the Microprocessor
Functions, Configurations and Data Recorder
Configurations.
S Program PC Card for upgrading the microprocessor
software.
There are three LEDs associated with the function of the
PC card slot. These are:
• A green Micro Status LED which will blink steadily
once per second indicating that the microprocessor is
operating and will blink every 0.5 seconds if there is no
software or if it is loading software.
• A green (PC) Card Status LED which comes on when
there is a PC card inserted in the slot. This LED will:
1. Blink every 0.5 seconds when data is being trans-
ferred to, or from, the PC Card. Will be on steady
when the operation is complete indicating the PC
Card may be removed.
2. During Download, the light will blink once per second
and will blink every 1.5 seconds when the Download
is complete.
2--8
 9
• A red (PC) Card Fault LED blinks if there is a problem continue to blink until the PC card is removed. The
transferring data from the PC card that has been LED will also blink if there is an error reading the card.
plugged into the PC card slot. The red LED will Check the MessageCenter for description of error.

RUN RELAY (RR -- Board QC4 (+12V

OUTPUT TO RR) SPEED RELAY (SR -- Board
Relay K2) & LED28 Relay K1) & LED 27
PC CARD FAULT LED F3 QC3 (+12V OUTPUT TO SR)
(RED) (7.5A) F2 (10A)

1MP (WHITE) RELAY POWER

IN/OUTPUT QC8 (12+ VDC)
CONNECTOR
DC CURRENT
PC SENSOR (CT1)
CARD SLOT
LED30 (GPR)
2MP (BLACK)
IN/OUTPUT LED31 (SSR)
CONNECTOR
6MP, IN/OUTPUT
PC CARD STATUS CONNECTOR
LED (GREEN)
5MP, IN/OUTPUT
MICROPROCESSOR CONNECTOR
STATUS LED (GREEN)
4MP, IN/OUTPUT
MICROPROCESSOR CONNECTOR
QC9 (FET ARC
SUPPRESSION)
QC2 (GROUND
3MP (GREY) FROM BATTERY)
IN/OUTPUT QC1 (12+VDC FROM
CONNECTOR BATTERY)
FET LEDs F1 (7.5A)
Refer to Table 5--1

Figure 2--5. Control Module

2--9 62-61753
 2

14
3

13

12

6
7 8 9 10 11

1. Switch Board 8. Manual Defrost Key

2. Indicator lights 9. Alarm List Key
3. Display 10. Start/Stop--Continuous Key
4. MessageCenter 11. Select Key
5. Keypad 12. Start/Run--Off Switch (SROS)
6. Up and Down Arrow Keys 13. Standby/Engine Switch
7. Enter Key 14. Language Switch
Figure 2--6. Display And Keypad
b. Display MessageCenter & Keypad (see figure NOTE
Figure 2--6) When the unit is in Null mode (fan only), the
mode indicators (cool, heat and defrost) are all
Indicator Lights off.
The display has six LEDs across the top to indicate
operational status. These indicators are: NOTE
There is an opening between the Alarm and
S Heat Indicator (Amber) -- Illuminated when the unit is in Start--Stop LEDs that is not used at this time.
Heat Mode. Display
S Cool Indicator (Green) -- Illuminated when the unit is in The display has 9 characters (7 seven--segment
characters and 2 nine--segment characters), 2 commas
Cool Mode.
(decimal points for English units), and a degree symbol.
The display is used to provide the user setpoint and
S Defrost Indicator (Amber) -- Illuminated when the unit refrigerated compartment temperatures, either in
is in Defrost Mode. degrees Centigrade or Fahrenheit.
S Alarm Indicator (Red) -- Off or Flashes at a rate of 0.5 Temperature display is right justified, with unused digits
seconds. blank. A negative sign will be displayed for all setpoint
and compartment temperatures below zero.
S Start--Stop Indicator (Green) -- Illuminated when Message Center
Start--Stop Operation has been selected. Messages generated by the microprocessor are
displayed in the MessageCenter. Details of the
S Continuous Indicator (Green) -- Illuminated when messages are described in Section 6.1
Continuous Operation has been selected. MessageCenter.

62-61753 2--10
 9
c.Switch Board
1 LANGUAGE Switch (LS)
The displayed language may be
changed by toggling the LANGUAGE
LANGUAGE switch.
2 STANDBY/ENGINE Switch (DES)
This switch is used to select either
Engine Operation or Standby Operation.
When this switch is placed in standby
position, the microprocessor will not
energize the power source contactors
until the engine oil pressure switch
(ENOPS) opens.
3 START/RUN--OFF Switch (SROS)
When placed in the RUN position, this
switch provides power to the
microprocessor. The microprocessor
performs a self-test (all segments of
display are illuminated). Then setpoint and
refrigerated compartment temperature
are displayed.
To stop the unit or remove power from
the microprocessor, place the SROS in
the OFF position.
Keypad
UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW Keys
These keys allow changing of the setpoints
or other displayed data of the system. They
also allow scrolling through the Unit Data
List, Function Parameters List, Alarm List,
etc.
EQUAL Key (ENTER)
The EQUAL key is used for many things
including entering a setpoint, changing a
Functional Parameter, clearing alarms, and
locking the data menu.
MANUAL MANUAL DEFROST Key
DEFROST
The MANUAL DEFROST key may be used
to initiate a defrost cycle when the required
conditions are met.
ALARM LIST Key
ALARM LIST
The ALARM LIST key allows viewing of the
alarms stored in the microprocessor. The
2--11
alarm list is displayed in the
MessageCenter. Pressing the ALARM LIST
key once displays the active alarm list. Each
successive press cycles through the list to
the end. To view the inactive alarm list, Refer
to Section 3.12.
START--STOP/CONTINUOUS Key
START-- STOP/
CONTINUOUS Pressing this key toggles between
Start--Stop and Continuous Run operation.
SELECT SELECT Key
Press the SELECT key to scroll through the
menu selections. One of the five standard or
1 optional menu selections will appear in the
MessageCenter when the SELECT key is
pressed. Repeated pressing of the SELECT
key will sequence the menu through these
selections. The menu wraps around. Press
the SELECT key until the desired menu
selection appears in the MessageCenter.
The five standard selections are:
•TO VIEW HOUR METERS-- Displays the
hours for individual hour meters. Refer to
Section 3.14.
•TO START PRETRIP -- Used to initiate a
pretrip. Refer to Section 3.4.
•TO VIEW DATA -- Displays Unit Data.
Refer to Section 3.13.
•TO VIEW (AND CHANGE) SETTINGS --
Displays unit Functional Parameter
settings. Refer to Section 3.15.
•TO MARK TRIP START -- This menu
selection is only used with the Data
Recorder. It is used to record a Trip Start
event which is logged in the Data Recorder.
This records the time and date of the
beginning of the trip. Data can then be
downloaded and reviewed by trip, making
data review much easier. Refer to Section
3.10.
•TO VIEW PRINT MENU -- Configures the
microprocessor for use with the hand--held
Strip Print II printer kit P/N 12--50150--10.
Refer to manual 62--90476 (Strip Print) or
62--11338 (Strip Print II).
The optional selection is:
•TO VIEW (AND CHANGE) INTELLISET --
Refer to Section 3.19.1.
62-61753
2.6 ELECTRONIC MODULES
2.6.1 Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF)
Figure 2--7. OGF Module
The OGF is located in the control box (see Figure 2--4).
The module has two electrical safety features in Engine
and standby Operation:
1. Overload protection
2. Ground Fault (Leakage)
In each case, an “A100 -- “OVERLOAD GROUND
FAULT” alarm is activated and the unit shuts down.
When of ground leakage is detected, the red LED on the
OGF module will be on continuously.
2.6.2 Phase Reversal Module (PRM)
Figure 2--8. PRM Module
The PRM is located in the control box (see Figure 2--4).
In Standby Operation, the phase reversal module
checks the electrical phase and reverses if necessary.
2.7 OPTIONS
2.7.1 Light Bar
The Light Bar is an external set of indicator lights which
can be seen in the mirror from the cab of the tractor. The
green LED indicates “STATUS OK”. The amber LED
indicates “CHECK UNIT”. The amber light is illuminated
when the microprocessor illuminates the fault light.
Alarms can be read on the microprocessor display.
62-61753
AMBER
GREEN
2.7.2 Door/Remote Switch(es)
The unit is provisioned to connect a Door Switch (DS)
and two additional Remote Switches directly to the
microprocessor.
The microprocessor may be configured to recognize a
switch with contacts that are either open when the
switch is activated, or that are closed when the switch is
activated. Additionally, the Configuration may be set to
determine whether the switch will: enable the alarm
only, enable the alarm and also shut the unit down,
enable the alarm and put the unit into low speed while
the switch is activated, or to have no alarm and only
record the switch activation in the Data Recorder.
If a switch is configured to shut the unit down when
activated, the unit will shut down for a minimum of 3
minutes. Additionally, there are “Override Switch”
settings in the Functional Parameters (Refer to
Table 5--2 for Functional Parameter information.) If a
switch has been configured to shut the unit down, this
parameter may be set to YES, to override the shutdown.
With this parameter set to “YES”, the alarm will be
activated but the unit will not shutdown.
A user specified name may be configured for these
switches, this name will be displayed (recorded) rather
than the default Remote Switch #1 or Remote Switch #2
name.
2.7.3 Out of Range Alarm/Shutdown
The microprocessor may be programmed with an Out of
Range Alarm/Shutdown feature. This option is intended
to notify the driver when the refrigerated compartment
temperature is drifting away from Set Point.
The feature may be configured as an alarm only, or as a
unit shutdown alarm. Refer to Section 5.1.1 for
information on setting microprocessor Configurations.
The amount of drift allowed before the configured action
is triggered is set in the Functional Parameters. (Refer
to Table 5--2 for Functional Parameter information.) The
Functional Parameter may be set at OFF, 2_C, 3_C or
4_C (OFF, 4_F, 5_F or 7_F). If the Functional Parameter
is set to OFF, the configured action is deactivated.
2.7.4 Remote Temperature Sensors
The unit is provisioned to connect a up to three remote
temperature sensors directly to the microprocessor.
2--12
 9
The microprocessor may be configured to display the
sensor reading in the Unit Data display and to record the
sensor reading in the Data Recorder. A user specified
name may be configured for both sensors, this name will
be displayed (recorded) rather than the default Remote
Sensor #1, Remote Sensor #2 or Remote Sensor #3
name.
2.7.5 IntelliSet/ProductShield
The LogiCOLD Microprocessor offers over 48
parameters that may be set depending on the product
being carried. IntelliSet allows the owner to
pre--program product specific settings into the
microprocessor and give the settings a name. The
operator may then call up these settings by simply
selecting the IntelliSet name.
In addition to the ability to pre--set the microprocessor
parameters, the IntelliSet option includes
ProductShield. ProductShield is a group of nine
Configurations which may be set to provide enhanced
product or unit protection under extreme ambient
conditions.
2.7.6 Remote Control Panel
The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control
panel. The panel displays refrigerated compartment set
point, compartment temperature and operating mode
(heat, cool or defrost). The set point may be set and the
unit may be started and stopped using the remote panel.
This compact panels can be mounted to suit the
individual operator’s preferences -- in the cab, on the
front bulkhead, or in the refrigerated compartment
(including in the wall itself). See Section 3.19.2 for more
information on the remote control panels.

2.8 ENGINE DATA

Engine Model V1505--B--CTE--2 (CT4--91TV)

Displacement 1.498 liters (91.41 in3)
No. Cylinders 4
Rated Power 16.7 KW (22.4 hp) @1900 rpm
NOTE: Refer to Table 2-1 for engine speed settings
Weight 118 kg (260.2 lbs)
7.8 liters (8.24 U.S. quarts) -- 50/50 mix mono propylene glycol --
Coolant Capacity never to exceed 60/40
Thermostat Starts to open 81 to 83_C (177 to 182_F) Fully open at 95_C (203_F)
Oil Capacity with Filter 13 liters (13.7 quarts)
Injection Setting 140 to 150 Bars (1991 to 2133 psig)
Fuel Winter: Diesel No. 1 Summer: Diesel No. 2
Firing Order 1--3--4--2
Glow Plug Amperage 4 amps per plug at 12 VDC
Valve Clearance Intake and Exhaust --Cold = 0.18 to 0.22 mm (0.0071 to 0.0087 inch)
Compression Engine compression must be above 27.2 Bars (400 psig)
Lubrication System
Oil Pressure 2.8 To 4.2 Bars (40 to 62 psig) -- Engine in high speed
Oil Pressure Safety Closes, on pressure rise, at 1.22 Bar (18 psig)
Switch (ENOPS) Opens, on pressure fall, at 0.82 Bar (12 psig)
Outdoor Temperature Grade (SAE)
Below 0°C (32_F) 10W or 15W40
Lube Oil Viscosity:
0_ to 25_C (32_ to 77_F) 20W or 15W40
Over 25_C (Over 77__F) 30W or 15W40
Oil Change Intervals Refer to Section 8.1 for information on service intervals.
2.9 COMPRESSOR DATA
Compressor Model ZF19VE--164
Compressor Part Number 18--01043
Type Hermetic Scroll
Displacement 7.5 Cubic Inches Per Revolution
Weight 40.8 kg (90 lbs) Dry
Oil Charge 1.77 L (60 ounces)
Approved OIl Uniqema Emkarate RL--32--3MAF Carrier Part Number 46--00025--04

2--13 62-61753
2.10 REFRIGERATION SYSTEM DATA

Defrost Air Switch (DAS)
Defrost Timer (micro controlled)
Evaporator High Temperature Switch
(EVHTS)
Liquid injection Valve (LIV)
Relief Valve Setting
High Pressure Switch (HP1)
Economizer Thermal Expansion Valve
Unit Dry Weight
Initiates Defrost: 35 ¦ 1.8 mm WG (1.40 ¦ .07 inch)
1.5h, 3h, 6h, or 12 hours
Opens, on temperature rise at: 55°¦ 2.8°C (130°¦ 5°F)
Closes on temperature fall at: 37.8° ¦ 3.9°C (100°¦ 7°F)
Energized (opened) at Compressor Discharge Temperature (CDT)
Sensor readings above 135°C (275°F)
May be pulsing (opened & closed) between Compressor Discharge
Temperature (CDT) Sensor readings of 124°C & 135°C (255°F &
275°F)
De--energized (closed) at Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
reading (CDT) below 124°C (255°F)
Opens on temperature rise at 37  3 Bar (537  44 psig)
Opens, on pressure rise, at : 32 ¦ 1 bar (471 ¦ 15 psig)
Closes, on pressure fall at: 25 ¦ 1 bar (367 ¦ 15 psig)
Nominal setting 8.3 to 13.9°C @ --20/30°C
(15 to 25°F @ --24/86°F) condition.
731 KG. (1612 pounds)

2.11 ELECTRICAL DATA

Rating: 10.4 amps

Full Load Amps (FLA)
Compressor Motor
Locked Rotor
Winding Resistance
Full Load Amps (FLA)
Horsepower
RPM
Condenser Fan Motor Voltage and frequency
Bearing lubrication
Rotation
Resistance
Number of heaters
Resistance (cold) per rod
Number of heaters
Heaters
Resistance (cold) per rod
Resistance (cold) per rod
Number of heaters
Resistance (cold) per rod
Full Load Amps (FLA)
Horsepower
Rotations Per Minute
Evaporator Fan Motor Voltage and Frequency
Bearing Lubrication
Rotation
Resistance
System current limit -- high speed: 16 amps
System current limit -- low speed: 14.5 amps
Locked rotor amps: 75
2.26 Ohms per leg
1.5 amps @ 65 Hz
0.83hp (610 watts) @ 65 Hz
3832 rpm @ 65 Hz
310 to 660 VAC; 45 to 65 Hz
Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Clockwise when viewed from shaft end
20 to 21 ohms
Heater 1 -- Lower Coil
Three U--type heaters
U--type heater 97.6 ohms ±5
Heater 2 -- Drain Pan
One U--type heater & four straight heaters
U--type heater 187 ohms ±5
Straight heaters 93.5 ohms ±5
Heater 3 -- Upper Coil
Three U--type heaters
U--type heater 97.6 ohms ±5
1.1 amps
0.66 hp (485 watts) @ 65hz
1850 rpm @ 65 hz
310 to 660 VAC 45 to 65 Hz
Factory lubricated, additional grease not required
Clockwise when viewed from inlet
34.2 to 41.8 ohms

62-61753 2--14
 9
2.11 ELECTRICAL DATA -- Continued

Frequency at High Speed 62 hz

Frequency at Low Speed 47 hz
Generator
Resistance 0.58 ohms (phase to neutral)
Output 16 KVA @ 0.82 p.f @ 1850 rpm
Output amps 20A
Output voltage 14.8 VDC @ 77°F (25°C)
Battery Charger
Input voltage 340 to 590 VAC
Frequency 43 Hz to 68 Hz
Trips -- On High Current 40 Amps
OGF Relay
Trips -- on Ground Fault 150mA
Voltage 12 volt nominal -- 90 amp hour capacity
Battery Cold cranking amps = 425 DIN, 500 IEC, 725 BCI
Standby Power Voltage -- Current 380/3/50 -- 16A
Requirements

2.12 COMPONENT RESISTANCE & CURRENT DRAW DATA

Component Ohms Amps
Unloader/Economizer/Liquid Injection Solenoid 6.8 Ohms 1.65 Amps
Valves
Speed solenoid (SCS) 1.5 to 2.5 Ohms 3.0 -- 8.0 Amps
12VDC Relay 10--00328--00 (CDCON, EVCON, 52 Ohms ±10% 0.22 -- 0.25 Amps
GPR, HTCON2, SSR,
12VDC Relay 10--00433--01 & --06 (CCON, 51 Ohms ±10% 0.29 Amps
GENCON, HTCON1, PSCON, PSCON2)
12VDC Relay 10--00385--00 (CCONR, 80 Ohms ±15% 0.12 -- 0.17 Amps
GENCONR, HTCON1R, PSCONR)
Fuel Solenoid
Red--Black Wires 11.1 to 13.4 Ohms 0.25 -- 2.0 Amps
White--Black wires: Can not be accurately measured with Coil Commander in circuit. 30.0 to 40.0 Amps
Unit non-running amps (Refer to Note 2 in Section 7.2) 6--9 Amps
Glow Plug Amps Each Plug 4 Amps
Glow Plug Total Circuit 16 Amps
Starter Motor Less than 1 ohm but more than 0 270 -- 380 amps

2--15 62-61753
2.13 SAFETY DEVICES
System components are protected from damage caused by unsafe operating conditions by automatic shut--down of
the unit when such conditions occur. This is accomplished by the safety devices listed in the following table.
Unsafe Conditions Safety Device Device Setting
Excessive current draw by microprocessor Fuse (F1) Opens at 7.5 amps
Excessive current draw by speed relay Fuse (F2) Opens at 10 amps
Excessive current draw by run relay Fuse (F3) Opens at 7.5 amps
Excessive current draw by battery output Fuse (F5) Opens at 80 amps
Excessive current draw by control circuit Fuse (F6) Opens at 15 amps
Excessive current draw by battery charger input Fuse (F7/8) Opens at 3 amps (6amps with
second battery charger)
Excessive current draw by generator/power supply Fuse (F9) Opens at 10 amps
contactors
Excessive current draw by heaters Fuse (F10/F11/12) Opens at 12 amps
Excessive condenser fan motor winding temperature Internal protector Auto reset
Excessive compressor motor winding temperature Internal protector Auto reset
Excessive evaporator motor winding temperature Internal protector Auto reset

2.14 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT DURING COOLING

When cooling, the unit operates as a vapor compression
refrigeration system. The main components of the
system are: the (1) scroll compressor, (2) air-cooled
condenser, (3) evaporator expansion valve, (4) direct
expansion evaporator and (5) economizer circuit.
The refrigeration system will operate in one of four
modes; Standard, Bypass, Economized or Null.
At start, and during periods of high refrigeration system
load, the system will operate in the bypass mode. This
allows the microprocessor to place the system in
operation at reduced capacity and measure the actual
load. If additional capacity is required and power is
available, the system will transition to the Standard
Mode. If the microprocessor calculates addition
capacity is required and power is available (such as
periods of high load or during pull--down), the system will
transition to Economized Mode.
The liquid then flows to an evaporator expansion valve
(EVXV) which reduces the pressure of the liquid and
meters the flow of liquid refrigerant to the evaporator to
obtain maximum use of the evaporator heat transfer
surface.
The refrigerant pressure drop caused by the expansion
valve is accompanied by a drop in temperature so the
low pressure, low temperature liquid that flows into the
evaporator tubes is colder than the air that is circulated
over the evaporator tubes by the evaporator fan. The
evaporator tubes have aluminum fins to increase heat
transfer; therefore heat is removed from the air
circulated over the evaporator. This cold air is circulated
throughout the refrigerated compartment to maintain
the cargo at the desired temperature.
The transfer of heat from the air to the low temperature
liquid refrigerant causes the liquid to vaporize.

a. Bypass Mode
In bypass mode, (see Figure 2--9), the compressor
raises the pressure and the temperature of the
refrigerant and forces it into the condenser tubes. The
condenser fan circulates surrounding air over the
outside of the condenser tubes. The tubes have fins
designed to improve the transfer of heat from the
refrigerant gas to the air. This removal of heat causes
the refrigerant to liquify. Liquid refrigerant leaves the
condenser and flows to the receiver.
The receiver stores the additional charge necessary for
low ambient operation. The receiver is equipped with a
relief valve.
The refrigerant leaves the receiver and flows through
the liquid line service valve to the subcooler. The
subcooler occupies a portion of the main condensing
coil surface and gives off further heat to the passing air.
The refrigerant then flows through a filter-drier where an
absorbent keeps the refrigerant clean and dry.
This low temperature, low pressure vapor passes the
evaporator outlet temperature and pressure sensors
(EVOT and EVOP) which aid in calculation of
superheat. The vapor then returns to the compressor
through the compressor suction modulation valve
(CSMV). The CSMV controls the flow of refrigerant
entering the suction line, thereby matching the load to
the compressor capacity.
In the bypass mode, the unloader solenoid valve is
energized (opened) by the microprocessor. This action
reduces compressor capacity by allowing flow from the
mid--point of the scroll, through the economizer
connection into the suction line.
b. Standard Mode
The system will operate in Standard Mode when
additional cooling is required but generator current is
limited to the point that economized mode cannot be
supported.
In the standard mode (see Figure 2--10), the system
operates the same as in Bypass Mode except the

62-61753 2--16
 9
unloader solenoid valve (USV) is de--energized (closed)
by the microprocessor. This action closes off the flow
from the mid--point of the scroll into the suction line,
bringing the compressor to full capacity.
c. Economized Mode
In the economized mode the “main” refrigeration system
operates the same as in the Standard Mode except the
microprocessor energizes (opens) the economizer
solenoid valve (ESV). With the economizer solenoid
valve open (see Figure 2--11), the capacity of the unit is
increased by subcooling the liquid refrigerant entering
the evaporator expansion valve. Overall efficiency is
increased because the gas leaving the economizer heat
exchanger enters the compressor at a higher pressure,
therefore requiring less energy to compress it to the
required condensing conditions.
Liquid refrigerant for use in the economizer circuit is tak-
en from the main liquid line as it leaves the filter drier.
The liquid refrigerant flows through the economizer
thermal expansion valve (TXV) and the economizer
heat exchanger internal passages absorbing heat from
the liquid refrigerant flowing to the evaporator expan-
sion valve. The resultant “medium” temperature/pres-
sure gas enters the compressor at the economizer con-
nection.
2--17
d. Null Mode
The system will enter null mode during periods where no
cooling or heating is required and the system is in con-
tinuous run. In null mode the compressor and heaters
are shut down while the evaporator fans continue to op-
erate. The condenser fan will operate if engine cooling is
required.
The system may also enter the null mode while in start
stop if required time, coolant temperature or battery
condition parameters have not been met.
2.15 HEAT AND DEFROST
In the Heat and Defrost Modes, the compressor is
de--energized. In Heat Mode, the coil mounted heaters
and evaporator fans are energized. Air flowing over the
warm coil is circulated throughout the refrigerated
compartment to maintain the cargo at the desired
temperature.
If the microprocessor is Configured to allow Natural
Defrost and the compartment temperature is above
freezing defrost may be accomplished using a
combination of coil heaters and return air.
If compartment temperature is below freezing or not
sufficiently warm enough to defrost the coil, the
evaporator fans are de--energized and the coil mounted
heaters energized.
62-61753
 EVOP
EVOT

EVAPORATOR

CSMV

EVXV

RELIEF VALVE
CONDENSER
RECEIVER

LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE

SUBCOOLER
FILTER DRIER

LIV

ESV
COMPRESSOR
TXV
DISCHARGE
SERVICE VALVE

ECONOMIZER HEAT
EXCHANGER
USV ECONOMIZER
CONNECTION

HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR COMPRESSOR

HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID SUCTION
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID SERVICE VALVE
MEDIUM PRESSURE VAPOR COMPRESSOR
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR

Figure 2--9. Refrigerant Circuit Bypass Mode

62-61753 2--18
 9

EVOP
EVOT

EVAPORATOR

CSMV

EVXV
RELIEF VALVE
CONDENSER
RECEIVER

LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE

SUBCOOLER
FILTER DRIER

LIV

ESV
COMPRESSOR
TXV
DISCHARGE
SERVICE VALVE

ECONOMIZER HEAT
EXCHANGER
USV ECONOMIZER
CONNECTION

HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR COMPRESSOR

HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID SUCTION
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID SERVICE VALVE
MEDIUM PRESSURE VAPOR
COMPRESSOR
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR

Figure 2--10. Refrigerant Circuit Standard Mode

2--19 62-61753
 EVOP
EVOT
EVAPORATOR

CSMV

EVXV

RELIEF VALVE
CONDENSER
RECEIVER

LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE

SUBCOOLER
FILTER DRIER

LIV

ESV
COMPRESSOR
TXV
DISCHARGE
SERVICE VALVE

ECONOMIZER HEAT
EXCHANGER
USV ECONOMIZER
CONNECTION

HIGH PRESSURE VAPOR COMPRESSOR

HIGH PRESSURE LIQUID SUCTION
HIGH PRESSURE ECONOMIZED LIQUID SERVICE VALVE
LOW PRESSURE LIQUID COMPRESSOR
MEDIUM PRESSURE VAPOR
LOW PRESSURE VAPOR

Figure 2--11. Refrigerant Circuit Economized Mode

62-61753 2--20
 SECTION 3

OPERATION

WARNING
LogiCOLD microprocessor equipped units
may start automatically at any time the
START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) is not in
the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fit-
ted with two way communication equip-
ment that will allow stating of the unit from a
remote location even though the SROS is in
the off position.
3.1 STARTING UNIT -- ENGINE OPERATION
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied at the
power plug or from the generator. When
performing service or maintenance proced-
ures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufac-
turers instruction, ensure the START/RUN--
OFF switch is in the OFF position and,
whenever practical, disconnect the high
voltage source and disconnect the negative
battery connection. NEVER dis--assemble
the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD
INSIDE! This field can interfere with cardiac
implants such as pacemakers and defibril-
lators.

WARNING
Under no circumstances should ether or any other starting aids be used to start engine.

MODE LIGHTS

LANGUAGE
MAIN DISPLAY
--20.0 +34.5° F STANDBY

MessageCenter
ENGINE

I START/RUN

DOOR
0 OFF

1. Place the STANDBY/ENGINE switch in 2. Place the START / RUN - OFF switch
the ENGINE position (SROS) in the START / RUN position.

3. The microprocessor will then enter pretest,

perform preset (refer to section 3.3) and start
automatically.

3--1 62-61753
3.2 STARTING UNIT -- STANDBY OPERATION

WARNING
Make sure the power plug is clean and dry before connecting to any electrical outlet / receptacle.

WARNING
Do not connect to any electrical outlet without checking that it meets the 380/3/50 and 16 Amp
electrical requirements of the unit.

1. Ensure the Engine/Standby switch is in the 2. Ensure the external power circuit breaker is off, con-
STANDBY position and the Start/Run--Off nect standby cable to unit and then turn the external
switch is in the OFF position power circuit breaker on.

LANGUAGE

--20.0 +34.5° F STANDBY

ENGINE

I START/RUN

0 OFF

3. Place the START / RUN - OFF switch I START/RUN 4. The unit will then enter pretest, perform preset
(SROS) in the START / RUN position. (refer to section 3.3) and start automatically.
0 OFF

NOTE • The power supply cable must be equipped with a

The unit is equipped with automatic phase re- ground connection.
versal which insures that the electric motors will
run in the correct direction.
• Repairs or maintenance to the supply voltage circuit
should only be performed by licensed / authorized
For safe, reliable operation in Standby Operation, it personnel.
is important to consider the following guidelines:
• NEVER connect the unit to a high voltage power
source with the SROS in the START / RUN position.
• The power supply cable and circuit breaker must
comply with local electrical code and unit specifica-
tions. Refer to Section 2.11.

62-61753 3--2
3.3 SELF TEST

MODE LIGHTS
LANGUAGE

MAIN DISPLAY
STANDBY

MESSAGE
CENTER ENGINE

I START/RUN

DOOR 0 OFF

SELF TEST

When first powered up, the microprocessor will run a
self test consisting of the following steps:
• All of the mode lights will illuminate.
• All of the segments on the display will turn on.
• All of the liquid crystal diodes (LCDs) in the Messa-
geCenter will turn on to verify their operation.
• The set point temperature and the refrigerated com-
partment temperature will then be displayed. The
last character indicates the temperature units as “C”
Centigrade or “F” Fahrenheit.
• The MessageCenter will continue to the next applic-
able step or:
1. If there are one or more Active alarms, the alarms
must be cleared before the unit can start. Refer to
Section 3.11 for information on viewing active
alarms.
2. If one or more Inactive alarms are stored, “INAC-
TIVE ALARMS IN MEMORY” will be displayed and
the Alarm LED will flash for 5 seconds, then turn off.
“CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE INTERVAL” will then
be displayed before the microprocessor continues
on to the next step. Refer to Section 3.12 for informa-
tion on viewing inactive alarms.
3. If the IntelliSet option has been installed the active or
modified IntelliSet or “INTELLISET INSTALLED
BUT NOT ACTIVE” will be displayed before the mi-
croprocessor continues on to the next step. Refer to
Section 3.19.1 for IntelliSet information.
• If the microprocessor has been configured to display
the hour meters, the Total Engine Hours, Standby
Run Hours and/or Total Switch On Hours will be
displayed.
• The microprocessor will then display “SMV CLOS-
ING” while the CSMV and the EVXV are brought to
unit starting positions.
• In engine operation, after preset, the glow plugs
will energize (as required), the buzzer will sound, and
the engine will start.
• In standby operation, after preset, buzzer will
sound then the fans and compressor will start.
NOTE
If required the microprocessor will initiate a
“Bump Start” procedure to clear any liquid refri-
gerant or oil. During this procedure, the com-
pressor will be started for one second and then
shut down for 7 seconds, three times.

3--3 62-61753
3.4 PRETRIP

1. Place SROS in the “START / RUN” position.

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
TEST #1 XX% COMPLETE

KEYPAD
MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT
DEFROST CONTINUOUS

2. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter

displays “PRESS THE = KEY TO START PRETRIP”.
3. Press the ”=” key to start PRETRIP.

4. Verify that during TEST#1 (5 seconds) the complete display is turned on and that all lights on the
Light Bar come on.
5. Verify that during the first 5 seconds of TEST#2 the buzzer comes on.
6. The remainder of Pretrip will take 7 to 15 minutes, and will run itself automatically.

The PRETRIP mode is for checking unit operation and TIP

evaluating operation of all modes. It will indicate a failure The Pretrip test “PASS” results message will
when one is detected. stay displayed until a key is pressed, or until the
SROS switch is placed in the Off position.
TIP
A Pretrip can be started at any refrigerated The Pretrip test “FAIL” results message will
stay displayed until the alarms are cleared
compartment temperature.
Once Pretrip is started, the keypad keys are disabled
The MessageCenter displays the current test and the % until Pretrip is completed.
complete of the test. When the Pretrip tests are com-
plete the MessageCenter will display one of three differ-
TIP
ent messages:
If “CAN NOT START PRETRIP” is displayed in
the MessageCenter, check to see if the unit is in
S “PRETRIP PASS” or Defrost Mode, or check the alarm list (Section
3.11) for active shutdown alarms.
S “PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST X” or
NOTE
S “PRETRIP FAILED & COMPLETE” and alarm light
is ON Pretrip will run until completed, unless an alarm occurs
that causes Pretrip to be aborted. Only alarms that will
Press the ALARM LIST key to review the alarms trig- result in other erroneous alarms or will affect future Pre-
gered by the Pretrip tests. trip tests will allow Pretrip to be aborted.

62-61753 3--4
PRETRIP (Continued)
TIP
Pretrip may be stopped by the user by either
turning the unit off then back on again, or by
pressing and holding the ”=” Key for 5 seconds.
“PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER” will display in
the MessageCenter.
Once Pretrip is started: If the unit is running (engine or
standby), the microprocessor will shut the unit down.
If the unit is not running Pretrip will begin.
NOTE
Before completing Pretrip, the microprocessor
looks at the status of alarms and if certain
alarms are active (for example: Low Fuel Warn-
ing, Check Engine Oil Level, Check Coolant
Level, Check Coolant Temperature), Pretrip will
display “FAILED”, indicating that the unit is not
ready to be sent out for a load, but that the alarm
list should be checked and all present alarm si-
tuations corrected.
TIP
It is always a good idea to clear all alarms from
both Alarm Lists before starting Pretrip. The
technician will then know that any alarms pres-
ent following Pretrip occurred during Pretrip,
and are not old alarms that had not been
cleared.
NOTE
The operator MUST be present and validate
this test by watching the microprocessor dis-
play during Test 1. The microprocessor will turn
on all segments of the LCD and LED display.
Test 1 -- Display Test
The microprocessor activates the display, and both
lights on the Light Bar. This test will last 5 seconds. All
segments of the display, all LEDs on the microprocessor
and both lights of the Light Bar will be on during this test.
This portion of the Pretrip check requires that the oper-
ator determines PASS or FAIL. A defective display is in-
dicated if: any LCD / LED segments are not visible or
any LEDs or lights do not illuminate. Anything that fails
during this test should be repaired at the conclusion of
the Pretrip cycle. Pretrip will continue regardless of the
outcome of this test. A faulty display or light bar will not
affect the operation of the unit, but will affect what is dis-
played during unit operation.
Test 2 -- Sound and 12VDC Electrical Component
Amperage Check
At the beginning of this test the microprocessor activ-
ates the buzzer for 5 seconds, the operator is to determ-
ine if the sound test is PASS or FAIL. If the sound test
fails it should be repaired at the conclusion of the Pretrip
cycle. Pretrip will continue regardless of the outcome of
the sound test. A faulty buzzer will not affect the opera-
tion of the unit, but will lead to operation without proper
audible warning on startup.
3--5
Test 2 will continue with a check of the amperage (cur-
rent) draw of the following components:
• Battery DC Current
(All Components Turned Off)
• Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
• Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
• Liquid Injection Valve (LIV)
• Speed Control Solenoid (SCS)
• Glow Plugs (GP)
• Fuel Solenoid (FS)
• Condenser Motor Contactor (CDCON)
• Evaporator Motor Contactor (EVCON)
• Compressor Contactor (CCON)
• Generator Contactor (GENCON)
• Power Source Contactor
(PSCON or PSCON2)
• Heater 1 Contactor (HTCON1)
• Heater 2 Contactor (HTCON!2
Each component will be individually checked for proper
current draw. An alarm will be displayed for any compo-
nent testing outside the current range (amps).
Test 3 -- Temperature Sensor Check
Check the condition of all of the system temperature
sensors.
Test 3 will last approximately 5 seconds. If a problem is
detected with any of the sensors, the corresponding
alarm will be displayed.
Test 4 -- Engine Low Speed
The engine starts up in Low Speed with condenser fans
on. The microprocessor verifies that engine rpm is in low
speed range. If the engine is not operating within the low
speed range, the “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM” alarm
will be displayed.
Test 5 -- Engine High Speed
The engine switches to High Speed and energizes
HTCON1 and HTCON2. The microprocessor verifies
that engine rpm is in high speed range. If the engine is
not operating within the high speed range, the “CHECK
HIGH SPEED RPM” alarm will be displayed.
Test 6 -- Engine Low Speed 2
The engine switches back to Low Speed and heaters
turn off. The microprocessor verifies that engine rpm is
in low speed range. If the engine is not operating within
the low speed range, the “CHECK LOW SPEED RPM”
alarm will be displayed.
Test 7 -- Electric Heater Amperage Check
Each heater contactor is energized individually and
check for proper current draw. An alarm will be dis-
played for any heater testing outside the current range
(amps).
62-61753
PRETRIP (Continued)
Test 8 -- Evaporator Fan Motor Amperage Check
The evaporator motor contactor is energized and check
for proper current draw. An alarm will be displayed if the
fan motors test outside the current range (amps).
Test 9 -- Condenser Fan Motors Amperage Check
The condenser motor contactor is energized and check
for proper current draw. An alarm will be displayed if fan
motors test outside the current range (amps).
Test 10 -- Check Compressor Suction Modulation
Valve (CSMV)
This test ensures that the CSMV is opening and closing
properly. If suction pressure doesn’t change as
expected with CSMV closed then “CHECK SUCTION
MOD VALVE” alarm will be displayed and Pretrip is
aborted. This test may take several minutes.
Test 11 -- Electronic Expansion Valve (EVXV)
This test checks the operation of the EVXV. If valve
doesn’t test properly “CHECK EVAP SUPERHEAT”
alarm will be displayed.
NOTE
Tests 12, 13 & 14 may be display only on Field
Trial Units, depending on software revision.
62-61753
Test 12 -- Unloader Solenoid Valve (USV)
This test checks the operation of the unloader solenoid
valve. If suction pressure does not change when USV is
de--energized, the “CHECK BYPASS” alarm will be dis-
played.
Test 13 -- Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV)
This test checks the operation of the economizer solen-
oid valve. If discharge pressure does not change when
ESV is energized, the “CHECK ECONOMIZER” alarm
will be displayed.
Test 14 -- Liquid Injection Solenoid Valve (LIV)
This test checks the operation of the liquid injection
solenoid valve. If compressor suction temperature does
not change when LIV is energized, the “CHECK LIV”
alarm will be displayed.
Test 15 -- Check For Other Alarms
Checks the current alarm list for other active alarms.
Pretrip Termination
When the Pretrip cycle is completed, the unit will return
to normal temperature control operation. “PRETRIP
PASS” will be displayed in the MessageCenter until the
operator presses any key. In the event that the Pretrip
test triggered an alarm(s), the MessageCenter will dis-
play either “PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETE” (if the entire
Pretrip cycle was completed), or “PRETRIP FAIL IN
TEST XX”, (if the Pretrip cycle was aborted by an alarm
before it was completed).
3--6
3.5 CHANGING SET POINT

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
SETPOINT CHANGED

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. With the set point displayed, press the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
key to change the set point to the desired value. The MessageCenter will
display “↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE”.

2. Press the ”=” key to save the new set point.

By default, set points of --30°C to +32°C (--22°F to
+89.6°F) may be entered via the keypad. The micropro-
cessor always retains the last entered set point in
memory. The microprocessor may be configured to
change the set point in either 0.1° (one--tenth of a de-
gree) or 1° (one full degree) increments by pressing and
releasing either the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW
key.
NOTE
The microprocessor may be configured with a
minimum and/or maximum set point other than
the default values listed above. “MAX SET-
POINT HAS BEEN REACHED” or “MIN SET-
POINT HAS BEEN REACHED” will display in
the MessageCenter when either of these condi-
tions are reached.
Set point may be changed any time the START / RUN -
OFF switch is in the START/RUN position, or when the
unit in PC Mode EXCEPT when:
• Viewing the Alarm List, Data List or Functional Para-
meters OR
• When the unit is in Pretrip OR
• When the unit is in Sleep Mode
Pressing the = key will cause the new displayed set
point value to become active and “SETPOINT
CHANGED” will be displayed. If the new value is not en-
tered, after 5 seconds of no keypad activity, the entire
display and Light Bar will flash for 15 seconds with “SET-
POINT NOT CHANGED” displayed and then revert
back to the last entered set point. All other keys are ac-
tive at this time and if pressed while the display is flash-
ing, will stop the flashing, and perform the requested
function.
TIP
The set point may be changed quickly by press-
ing and holding the UP ARROW or DOWN AR-
ROW key. The longer the key is held, the faster
the setting will change.

3--7 62-61753
3.6 START--STOP OPERATION

START--STOP
LIGHT
HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
START/STOP MODE SELECTED

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the START--STOP / CONTINUOUS key until the

START--STOP Light on the microprocessor illuminates.

2. Verify that “START/STOP MODE SELECTED” is displayed on the MessageCenter and that the START-
STOP light is illuminated. The unit is now in Start-Stop operation.

Start--Stop is provided to reduce fuel or power con-
sumption. This feature allows full automatic control of
the unit starting and stopping by monitoring refrigerated
compartment temperature, battery charging amps and
engine coolant temperature (Engine Operation only).
The main function of Start--Stop Operation is to turn off
the refrigeration system near setpoint to provide an effi-
cient temperature control system and to initiate a restart
sequence after certain conditions are met. The Start--
Stop/Continuous key is pressed to select between Con-
tinuous Run and Start--Stop Operation. The corres-
ponding LED will be iluminated. Refer to Section 4.3 for
more detailed information on Start--Stop Operation.
The microprocessor may be configured with Start-Stop
operation tied to the set point ranges for frozen and per-
ishable loads. The Start/Stop--Continuous key is locked
out if “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in the Messa-
geCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in
Start--Stop Operation or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED”
displays in the MessageCenter when the key is pressed
and the unit is in Continuous Run Operation. Refer to
Section 5.1.1 for Configuration information.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts,
“FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE” alarm will be activ-
ated. While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal
counter keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit
shut down three consecutive times without running a
minimum of 15 minutes between shutdowns, the
“FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME” Alarm will be acti-
vated. The shutdown counter is cleared when the unit
has run for 15 minutes.
NOTE
In Standby Operation, the unit will stop for a
minimum of 5 minutes instead of 15 minutes.
3.6.1 Start--Stop Parameters
The selectable parameters used by the microprocessor to
determine when the unit will start or stop include:
• MINIMUM RUN TIME
• MINIMUM OFF TIME
• OVERRIDE TEMP
• MAXIMUM OFF TIME
• FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET

62-61753 3--8
3.6 START--STOP OPERATION -- Continued
The microprocessor may be configured so that:
• the same settings apply to any set point, or
• the settings are different, depending on whether the
set point is in the perishable range or in the frozen
range.
3.6.2 Restart Voltage
The microprocessor will restart the unit when a preset
minimum voltage is reached. The minimum voltage may
be configured from 12.0 to 12.8 Volts in 0.1V incre-
ments. The factory setting for this Configuration is
12.2V.
A lower voltage selection may result in a longer off cycle
(based on battery voltage) and possibly overall shorter
battery life. A higher voltage selection may result in a
shorter off cycle (based on battery voltage) and possibly
overall longer battery life.
3--9
3.6.3 Charging Amps
The microprocessor may be configured to monitor bat-
tery charging amperage in addition to battery voltage.
The battery charging rate must be below the selected
amp setting to allow the unit to cycle off.
The Configuration may be set from 1.0 to 10.0 Amps in
0.5 amp increments. A weak or defective battery may in-
dicate a suitable voltage charge while the alternator is
actually putting a high charging rate into it, then not be
sufficiently charged to restart the engine at the end of a
Start-Stop Off Cycle.
The factory setting for this Configuration is 5.0 amps.
This is a general setting that may need to be adjusted for
the operating environment of the unit. Units operated in
colder ambient temperatures may require a lower set-
ting to force a higher charge in the battery prior to Start-
Stop Off Cycle. Units operated in warmer ambient tem-
peratures may use a higher setting.
As a battery ages, it is normal for it to require longer re-
charging periods. If the running time is gradually in-
creasing in Start-Stop operation due to the battery re-
quiring a longer charging period, this run time may be
shortened by raising the amp setting. (This may be
checked by reviewing downloaded data and looking at
the amp reading during prolonged engine Start-Stop On
Cycles.)
62-61753
3.7 CONTINUOUS OPERATION

CONTINUOUS
RUN LIGHT
HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the START-STOP/CONTINUOUS 2. Verify that “CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED” is

key until the CONTINUOUS RUN displayed on the MessageCenter and that the CONTINU-
light on the microprocessor illuminates. OUS RUN light is illuminated. The unit is now in Continu-
ous Run operation.

In the Continuous Run Mode, the unit will not be shut
down except in response to a shut down alarm. Refer to
Section 4.4 for more detailed information on Continuous
Run Operation.
The microprocessor may be configured with Start-Stop
operation tied to the set point ranges for frozen and per-
ishable loads. The Start/Stop--Continuous key is locked
out if “START-STOP LOCKED” displays in the Messa-
geCenter when the key is pressed and the unit is in
Start--Stop Operation or “CONTINUOUS LOCKED”
displays in the MessageCenter when the key is pressed
and the unit is in Continuous Run Operation. Refer to
Section 5.1.1 for Configuration information.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts, alarm 31
-- “FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE” will be activated.
While running, if the unit shuts down, an internal counter
keeps track of the shutdowns. Should the unit shut down
three consecutive times without running a minimum of
15 minutes between shutdowns, alarm 30 “FAILED TO
RUN MINIMUM TIME” will be activated. The shutdown
counter is cleared when the unit has run for 15 minutes.

62-61753 3--10
3.8 SLEEP MODE

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE

SLEEP MODE SETTINGS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

TO ENTER SLEEP MODE

If the unit is equipped with IntelliSet, it can be placed in sleep mode by choosing IntelliSleep.
(refer to Section 3.19.1).

If the unit is not equipped with IntelliSet:

1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter displays “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS”.
2. Press the UP ARROW key until the Functional Parameter “SLEEP MODE SETTINGS” is displayed.
Press the ”=” key. The MessageCenter will then display “ ↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE”.

3. Press either the UP or DOWN ARROW key until “SLEEP MODE: YES” is displayed. The MessageCenter
will flash, indicating that this change has not been entered into memory. Press the “=” key to save the setting
to memory -- the MessageCenter will stop flashing, the unit is now in sleep mode.
4. Additional Functional Parameter sub menu selections for “wake up time” and “run pretrip at wake” will now be
available and may be saved to memory following the key stroke sequence in the preceding step. Refer to the
following paragraphs for information on these settings.

TO EXIT SLEEP MODE

Place the START / RUN - OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to START / RUN.

Sleep Mode is generally used in cold ambients when the
trailer may be parked or not used and the unit is OFF for
an extended period of time with no product inside the re-
frigerated compartment. Many times units are difficult to
start due to a discharged battery, thickened engine oil,
etc. after time in cold ambients.
There is NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL in Sleep
Mode and it should never be used if the refrigerated
compartment contains perishable or frozen products.
In Sleep and Engine Mode the unit will “Wake Up” peri-
odically and run to keep the battery charged and the en-
gine warm.
In Sleep and Standby Mode the unit will “Wake Up” and
the battery charger will be energized to keep the battery
charged.
ADDITIONAL SUB MENUS
1. “WAKE UP TIME”
a. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to NO the unit will
remain in Sleep Mode until it is taken out manually
(refer to EXIT SLEEPMODE instructions above.)
b. When “WAKE UP TIME” is set to YES the “SET
WAKEUP TIME” menu will become available.

3--11 62-61753
3.8 SLEEP MODE -- Continued
Pressing the “=” key will allow the user to select the date
and time the unit is to automatically wake up. The wake
up time must be at least 1 hour and no more than 8 days
from the time the clock is set. The following information
can be entered:
S Month (1 to 12)
S Day (1 to 31)
S Year (1998 to 2037)
S Hour (0 to 23)
S Minute (0 to 59)
NOTE
The clock is a 24 hour clock. Hours 1 thru 12 are
AM and hours 13 thru 24 are PM.
2.“RUN PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE”
a. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to NO
the unit will wake up at the designated time and con-
trol to set point.
b. When “PRETRIP TEST AT WAKE” is set to YES.
the unit will wake up at the designated time, automat-
ically run Pretrip and then control to set point. “PRE-
TRIP PASS/FAIL” will remain in the MessageCenter
until it is manually cleared.
If Sleep Mode is selected, when the unit is not running
during a Start-Stop Off Cycle, any remaining Minimum
Off Time will be ignored, and the engine will start. It will
run for 4 minutes (minimum), until the engine coolant
temperature is above 50°C (122°F), and the battery is
fully charged (O.K. displays in the Data List voltage line,
and charging amps are less than the Configured set-
ting). While the unit is running in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP
WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL” will flash in the Mes-
sageCenter, and the Display (set point and refrigerated
box temperature) will be off.
62-61753
If the unit is already running when Sleep Mode is se-
lected, it will continue to run until the conditions de-
scribed above are met.
While the unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode, “SLEEP
MODE, OFF/ON TO WAKE” will be displayed in the
MessageCenter. The display backlight will turn off after
5 minutes.
While in Sleep Mode, Unit Data and Alarm Lists may be
viewed, and Functional Parameters may be viewed and
changed as necessary. However, Start--Stop/Continu-
ous Run selections and set point can not be changed.
Manual Defrost and Pretrip can be initiated.
The unit will restart when engine coolant temperature
drops below 1°C (34°F) or if the battery voltage drops
below the Configured battery restart value. (refer to
Section 5.1.1)
NOTE (FOR ENGINE OPERATION ONLY)
In the event that the Engine Coolant Tempera-
ture sensor fails, Sleep Mode will operate as fol-
lows:
In ambients above 0°C (32°F), the unit will run
as above, and will monitor battery voltage and
charging amps only (according to the Configur-
ation setting).
In ambients below 0°C (32°F),, the unit will run
for 20 minutes minimum run time, then restart
every 60 minutes (maximum off time). Battery
voltage and amperage will be monitored nor-
mally.
3--12
3.9 MANUAL DEFROST

DEFROST LIGHT

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 dF
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the MANUAL DEFROST key. The DEFROST light will come on and the
MessageCenter will display “DEFROST CYCLE STARTED” for 5 seconds, or
flash “CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE” for 5 seconds.

When DEFROST mode CANNOT be manually initiated TIP

“CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE” is displayed in The Manual Defrost Key can be used at any
the MessageCenter. This will occur when: time to start a Defrost Cycle as long as the pre-
•DTT is above 4°C (40°F) OR ceding conditions are met.

•The engine has not run 15 seconds after starting OR

• The unit is in Pretrip OR NOTE
Refer to Section 4.5.6 for more detailed infor-
• There is an active shutdown Alarm. mation on DEFROST.

3--13 62-61753
3.10 TRIP START

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
TRIP START ENTERED

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. To mark the start of a trip in the Data Recorder, press the SELECT key until the Mes-
sageCenter displays “PRESS = TO MARK TRIP START”.

2. Press the “=” key.

3. If trip start is acknowledged by the Data Recorder, “TRIP START ENTERED” will be displayed
for 5 seconds and then the display will revert back to the normal display. Otherwise CANNOT
ENTER TRIP START will flash and then the display will revert back to the normal display.

Trip Start places the present time and date as a stamp in the data recorder memory to allow easy review of the data
from the last trip, and to allow downloading data from a specific trip. A trip begins at a Trip Start and ends at the next Trip
Start.

62-61753 3--14
3.11 VIEW ACTIVE ALARMS

ALARM LIGHT

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
NO ACTIVE ALARMS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the ALARM LIST key. If there are no active alarms, “NO ACTIVE
ALARMS” will display for 5 seconds.

2. If there are active alarms, the alarm number will be displayed with the letter “A” in front and the
alarm message following. The last Alarm that occurred will be the first Alarm displayed and so
on.

3. Press the ALARM LIST or UP ARROW key to scroll through the list of alarms.

4. When the end of the alarm list is reached, “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” is displayed
for 5 seconds.
5. To clear the alarm list, press the “=” key while “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” is being
displayed. “ACTIVE ALARMS LIST CLEAR” will be displayed. This will move all Alarms to
the Inactive Alarm list.

Alarms that occur are stored in the Alarm List. Stored
alarms may be viewed in the MessageCenter.
For a complete list of alarms, their meanings, and trou-
bleshooting refer to Section 7.
TIP
Another way to clear active alarms is to turn the
microprocessor OFF and then back ON using
the START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS).
TIP
“CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO KEYPAD” in-
dicates there is a wiring problem between the
microprocessor and the display module.

3--15 62-61753
3.12 VIEW INACTIVE ALARMS

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
NO INACTIVE ALARMS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press ALARM LIST key and the UP ARROW key and hold both for 6 seconds. If there
are no inactive alarms, “NO INACTIVE ALARMS” will be displayed for 5 seconds.

2. If there are inactive alarms, the alarm number will be displayed with the letter “I” in front and the
alarm message following.
3. Press the ALARM LIST or UP or DOWN key to scroll through the list of alarms.
4. When the end of the alarm list is reached, “LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS” is displayed for 5
seconds.
5. To clear the active and inactive alarm list, press the “=” key while “LIST END, = TO CLEAR
ALARMS” is being displayed. “ALL ALARMS CLEARED” will be displayed.

The microprocessor can hold up to 16 alarms in the Ac- For a complete list of Alarms and troubleshooting infor-
tive and Inactive Alarm Lists combined. The list can be mation refer to Section 7.
read via the MessageCenter or using the ReeferManag-
er PC Program. There are 2 sections in the Alarm List,
an Active Alarm Section and Inactive Alarm Section. TIP
Alarms in these sections are in the order in which the When alarms are cleared from the Inactive
alarms activate and inactivate, respectively. On startup, Alarm List, both active and inactive alarm lists
all alarms are marked as inactive. If an alarm then be- are cleared.
comes active, the alarm is moved from the Inactive
Alarm List to the Active Alarm List.
If there is a safety shutdown, “UNIT SHUTDOWN --
As additional alarms occur, they will be placed first in the
SEE ALARM LIST“ will be displayed. Refer to Section 7
Active Alarm List. An alarm can not be active and inac-
for complete list of Alarms and their descriptions.
tive at the same time. Each alarm can only be present in
either the Active or Inactive Alarm List at any given time.
As conditions changed, alarms may be moved from the
NOTE
Active Alarm List to the Inactive alarm list and back.
The Inactive Alarm List is also called the Techni-
Alarms are also recorded in the Data Recorder. They cian’s List. Only qualified refrigeration techni-
are recorded at the time they occur (become active), cians should access the inactive list. It is not in-
and the time they become inactive. tended for the use of drivers or operators.

62-61753 3--16
3.13 UNIT DATA

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW DATA

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter

displays “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW DATA.”

2. Press the UP ARROW key to move down the Data List beginning at the top,
or press the DOWN ARROW key to move up the Data List beginning at the
bottom. (Refer to Table 3--1)

3. The selected Data Item will remain in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds, then the de-
fault message (STATUS OK or other customer specified message) will display.

4. To lock an item in the MessageCenter for continuous viewing, press the “=“ key.
The Data item will flash continuously to indicate it is locked.

5. Pressing UP or DOWN key will unlock that item and move to the next data item.
Pressing the “=” key will unlock the item, and after 10 seconds the default message
will be displayed.

3--17 62-61753
 Table 3--1. Unit Data
* Displays information or setting entered in the microprocessor Configurations
+ May or may not be displayed depending on Parameter/Configuration settings
DATA DEFINITION
SUCTION PRESSURE Compressor suction pressure
DISCHARGE PRESSURE Compressor discharge pressure
EVAPORATOR PRESSURE Leaving evaporator pressure
ENGINE COOLANT TEMP Engine coolant temperature
RETURN AIR TEMP Return (air entering evaporator) air temperature
SUPPLY AIR TEMP Supply (air leaving evaporator) air temperature
DELTA--T Return air temperature minus supply air temperature
AMBIENT AIR TEMP Ambient (air entering condenser) air temperature
DEFROST TERM TEMP Defrost termination temperature
SUCTION LINE TEMP Suction line temperature at the compressor
EVAP OUTLET TEMP Suction line temperature at the evaporator outlet
COMPRESSOR Compressor discharge temperature
DISCHARGE TEMP
BATTERY Battery voltage
CURRENT DRAW (DC) Battery charging or discharging amps.
ENGINE RPM Engine revolutions per minute
UNIT AC CURRENT #1 High voltage current draw on circuit #1.
UNIT AC CURRENT #2 High voltage current draw on circuit #2.
SUCTION MOD VALVE CSMV % open or “Closing”
EXPANSION VALVE EVXV % open or “Closing”
START MODE AUTO if the engine will start automatically
MANUAL if the engine must be started manually
SOFTWARE REVISION Revision of the software that is operating the microprocessor
DISPLAY SOFTWARE REV Revision of the software that is operating the display
CONTROL SERIAL # Serial Number of the microprocessor

* TRAILER ID # ID (as Configured by the user)

* UNIT SERIAL # Unit serial number

* UNIT MODEL # Unit model number (as Configured by the user)

* DATALOGGER Displays the current Date and Time that the Data Recorder is using. This
may be different than local time, depending on the Time Zone and Day-
light Savings Time selections made when the Data Recorder was con-
figured.
+ FUEL LEVEL This is only displayed when the sensor is configured ON.
% of fuel in tank.
+ INSTALLED OPTIONS This is only displayed when one or more options is configured ON.
Lists installed options.
+ HOURS TO ENGINE This is only displayed when the meter is configured ON.
MAINTENANCE Number of engine hours until the next programmed engine maintenance.

62-61753 3--18
 Table 3--1. UNIT DATA -- Continued
* Displays information or setting entered in the microprocessor Configurations
+ May or may not be displayed depending on Parameter/Configuration settings
DATA DEFINITION

+ HOURS TO S/B MOTOR This is only displayed when the meter is configured ON.
MAINTENANCE Number of hours until the next programmed electric standby motor main-
tenance.
+ HOURS TO UNIT This is only displayed when the meter is configured ON. Number of
MAINTENANCE switch--on hours until the next programmed general unit maintenance.
+ TIME LEFT TO PM (1--5) This is only displayed when one or more of the meters is configured ON.
Number of hours until the next programmed maintenance. (May display
user programmed identification.)
* PRODUCTSHIELD SETUP: This will only display when IntelliSet is installed, ProductShield setting is
ON and ECONO, HIGH AIR and/or WINTER is/are NOT OFF.
+
S PRODUCTSHIELD Displays ProductShield Econo setting (OFF, Go To Start--Stop OR Go
ECONO: To Continuous Run
SS ECONO MIN TEMP Displays minimum temperature setting for activation of ProductShield
Econo. (Will only be displayed if Econo is NOT OFF)
SS ECONO MAX TEMP Displays maximum temperature setting for activation of ProductShield
Econo. (Will only be displayed if Econo is NOT OFF)
SS ECONO DELTA--T Displays Delta--T setting for activation of ProductShield Econo. (Will only
be displayed if Econo is NOT OFF)
S PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH Indicates if Product Shield High Air is ON or OFF
AIR:
SS HIGH AIR MIN TEMP Displays minimum ambient temperature setting for activation of Pro-
ductShield High Air (Will only be displayed if High Air is ON)
SS HIGH AIR MAX TEMP Displays maximum temperature setting for activation of ProductShield
High Air (Will only be displayed if High Air is ON)
SS HIGH AIR DELTA--T Displays Delta--T setting for activation of ProductShield High Air (Will
only be displayed if High Air is ON)
S PRODUCTSHIELD: Indicates the ambient temperature below which ProductShield Winter will
WINTER -- xx° be active (Will only be displayed if WINTER is NOT OFF)
* RANGE 1 LOCK This is only displayed when Range Lock 1 is configured ON.
Displays Range Lock 1 setting:
+ OFF = Temperature Range 1 Lock is turned off.
CONTINUOUS = When the set point is set between Range 1 Minimum
& Maximum Temperatures, the unit is set to operate only in Continuous.
START--STOP -- When the set point is set between Range 1 Minimum &
Maximum Temperatures, the unit is set to operate only in Start--Stop.
* SRANGE 1 MINIMUM TEMP Displays minimum temperature setting for Range 1. (Will only be dis-
played if Range Lock 1 is ON)
+
* SRANGE 1 MAXIMUM
TEMP
Displays maximum temperature setting for Range 1. (Will only be dis-
played if Range Lock 1 is ON)
+

3--19 62-61753
 Table 3--1. UNIT DATA -- Continued
* Displays information or setting entered in the microprocessor Configurations
+ May or may not be displayed depending on Parameter/Configuration settings
DATA DEFINITION

* RANGE 2 LOCK This is only displayed when Range Lock 1 is configured ON.
Displays Range Lock 1 setting:
+ OFF = Temperature Range 2 Lock is turned off.
CONTINUOUS = When the set point is set between Range 2 Minimum
& Maximum Temperatures, the unit is set to operate only in Continuous
Run.
START--STOP = When the set point is set between Range 2 Minimum &
Maximum Temperatures, the unit is set to operate only in Start--Stop.
* SRANGE 2 MIN. TEMP Displays minimum temperature setting for Range 2. (Will only be dis-
played if Range Lock 2 is ON)
+
* SRANGE 2 MAX. TEMP Displays maximum temperature setting for Range 2. (Will only be dis-
played if Range Lock 2 is ON)
+
* TEMPERATURE (REMOTE) Will only display when one or more of the optional sensors are con-
SENSOR 1 (or 2 or 3) figured ON.
+ Displays temperate reading of remote Temperature Sensor 1 (or 2 or 3).

62-61753 3--20
3.14 VIEW HOURMETERS

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
TOTAL ENGINE HOURS: 0 HRS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter dis-

plays “PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW HOUR METERS”.

2. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move through

the Hour Meter List.
3. Displayed hour meters will depend on unit Configurations (refer to Section 5.1.1).
Typical displayed meters are: “TOTAL ENGINE HOURS”, “STANDBY RUN
HOURS” and “TOTAL SWITCH ON HOURS”.

4. Pressing the “=” key will access all other meters and display “OTHER METERS AND COUNT-
ERS”.
5. Selected hour meter will remain in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds, then the default message
(“STATUS OK” or other customer specified message) will display.
6. To lock an hour meter in the MessageCenter, press the “=” key. The Data item will flash
continuously to indicate it is locked.
7. Pressing any key on the keypad will unlock the item. Pressing the UP or DOWN AR-
ROW key will move to the next hour meter.

Hour meters available when “OTHER METERS AND COUNTERS” is chosen are:

SMeters listed in Step 3 above. SSwitch On Sleep Hours

SEngine Protect Hours SHigh Speed Hours

SStart cycles
SSwitch On Protect Hours
SCompressor Run Hours
SSwitch On Standby Hours SMaintenance Days
SEngine Sleep Hours SAnd, up to 5 User Configurable meters

3--21 62-61753
3.15 FUNCTIONAL PARAMETERS

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the SELECT key until the MessageCenter displays “PRESS ↑↓

TO VIEW SETTINGS”.
2. When the UP ARROW key is pressed, the Function List will scroll down. When the
DOWN ARROW key is pressed, the Function List will scroll up. Refer to Table 3--2 for a
list of parameters and available settings.

3. To change one of the Functions, bring the Function you wish to change into the MessageCenter, and press
= key. “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE” will display in the MessageCenter. Pressing either UP or
DOWN ARROW key will display the parameter selections available for that Function. The MessageCent-
er will flash, indicating that a change to the displayed parameter selection has not been entered into
memory.
4. Continue pressing UP or DOWN ARROW key until the desired parameter selection is displayed, then
press the = key. The MessageCenter will stop flashing. The new parameter selection is now in memory. If
the = key is not pressed within 10 seconds, the MessageCenter will display “FUNCTION NOT
CHANGED”. This will display for 5 seconds, then return to the last Functional Parameter displayed. If no
further keys are pressed, the default display will return in another 10 seconds.

NOTE
The microprocessor may be configured with all of
the functions locked or individual functions may
have been locked. Any Function that is displayed
with a padlock symbol cannot be changed from the
keypad.

62-61753 3--22
 Table 3--2 Functional Parameters
PARAMETER
FUNCTION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
NOTES: Selections in BOLD are the default settings. Also, Functional Parameter marked with an asterisk (*) may
not display in the list for this unit, depending on how the microprocessor has been configured.
SILENT MODE ON OFF -- Normal engine speed operation.
OFF
ON -- Low engine speed operation. Used to disable high speed.
DEFROST TIMER 1.5 HRS The defrost timer will automatically put the unit into the defrost cycle
SET FOR .... 3 HRS at the interval selected if DTT is below 40°F (4.4°C).
6 HRS Shorter times are generally used for warm, humid products like pro-
12 HRS duce. Longer times can be used for dry and frozen products.
Set Start/Stop Parameters
Time and Temperature values that control Start--Stop Operation are set in this section.
The microprocessor may be configured so that: 1. the same settings apply to any set point = “Together”, or 2. the set-
tings are different, depending on whether the set point is in the perishable range or in the frozen range = “Separate”.
SIf “together” is configured, there will be five settings with only the fifth applicable to just frozen range.
SIf “Separate” is configured there will be nine settings four labeled perishable and five labeled frozen.
S MAX OFF TIME: OFF OFF -- There is no maximum off time.
10MINS
TO
When a minute value is selected, this is the longest amount of time
255MINS
the unit will remain off during a (Perishable or Frozen or both) Auto
Start--Stop Off Cycle. When this time expires, the unit will restart and
(in 1 minute incre- run for the Minimum Run Time, regardless of any temperature
ments) change inside the refrigerated compartment.
S OVERRIDE 2°C (3.6°F) This selects the override temperature for the Auto Start--Stop Off
TEMP: TO Cycle. During the Minimum Off Time, should the refrigerated com-
10°C (18°F) partment temperature drift this far above or below set point in the
Perishable Range, or above set point in the Frozen Range, the micro-
6°C(11°F) processor will override the Minimum Off Time, and restart.
(in 0.5°F or C incre-
ments)
S MIN OFFTIME: 10MINS This determines the minimum length of time the unit will remain off
TO whenever the unit cycles off in Auto Start--Stop Operation.
90MINS
20MINS
(in 1 minute incre-
ments)
S MIN RUN TIME: 4MINS This determines the minimum length of time the unit will run every
TO time the unit starts in Start--Stop Operation.
60MINS
(in 1 minute incre-
ments)
S FROZEN 0°C (0°F) This only applies to Frozen set points in Start--Stop operation.
SHUTDOWN TO This offset is the number of degrees below set point that the unit will
OFFSET 2°C (3.6°F) run before cycling off. This will allow for a lower average refrigerated
(in 0.5°F or C incre- compartment temperature when considering temperature rises during
ments) off cycles.
PERISHABLE YES -- the microprocessor will control supply air temperature as Con-
SENSITIVE figured when supply air temperature is warmer than 0°C (32°F).
PRODUCT
YES NO -- the microprocessor will control supply air temperature as Con-
NO figured only when supply air temperature falls below 0°C (32°F).
Refer to Section 4.6.1 for complete information on Perishable Sensit-
ive Product and Supply Air Configuration interaction.

3--23 62-61753
 Table 3--2 Functional Parameters -- Continued
PARAMETER
FUNCTION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
TEMPERATURE RETURN AIR The unit has both a Return Air Sensor and a Supply Air Sensor. This
CONTROL SUPPLY AIR selection determines if: only the return air sensor reading will be used
for calculating control actions OR only the supply air sensor reading
will be used for calculating control actions.
“Return Air” is generally selected for most products. If this parameter
is set to the “Supply Air” setting the microprocessor will control within
a narrower temperature band.
DISPLAY ENGLISH UNITS Temperatures will display in either English (°F) using decimal points to display
TEMPERATURE METRIC UNITS tenths of a degree OR or Metric (°C ) using commas to display tenths of a degree.
IN ...
DISPLAY ENGLISH UNITS Pressures will display in either English (psig) using decimal points to display
PRESSURE IN ... METRIC UNITS tenths of a pound OR or Metric (bar) using commas to display tenths of a bar.
ECO MODE NO NO -- Control for maximum protection.
YES YES -- Control for maximum fuel economy.
OUT OF RANGE Metric English This Functional Parameter will display if the optional Out Of Range Alarm/
ALARM: OFF OFF Shutdown feature is installed, refer to section 2.7.3 for additional information.
2°C 4°F It may be configured (refer to Table 5--2 for Configuration information)
3°C 5°F to trigger an Alarm only or trigger an Alarm and Shutdown.
4°C 7°F
The value entered here is the number of degrees away from set point
the compartment temperature may drift before the alarm or alarm and
shutdown action will be triggered. If set to OFF, the configured action
is deactivated.
Low Speed Startup Minutes
Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low speed every time the engine starts.
SSTART/STOP OFF Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low
1 TO 255MINS speed every time the engine starts in Start/Stop operation.
SCONTINUOUS OFF Allows user to set the number of minutes the unit will run in low
1 TO 255MINS speed every time the engine starts in Continuous operation.
For complete instructions on entering and setting parameters for Sleep Mode refer to Sec-
SLEEP MODE tion 3.8.
* NO POWER NO *If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to “Alarm & Shutdown”
SWITCH TO YES this parameter will not display
DIESEL
YES -- If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to the “Switch To
Engine” (on power loss), setting this parameter to YES will confirm
the Configuration and the switch will be allowed.
NO -- If the NO AC POWER Configuration is set to the “Switch To
Engine”, setting this parameter to NO will override the Configuration
setting and shut the unit down when power is lost. The purpose of
this setting is to temporarily override the Configuration setting in situ-
ations where switching to engine power is not desired.

62-61753 3--24
 Table 3--2 Functional Parameters -- Continued
PARAMETER
FUNCTION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
* RESET PM NO METERS TO *If the PM Hourmeter is configured OFF, this parameter will not dis-
HOURMETERS RESET play
OR
Expired Hour Meters This Functional Parameter allows resetting of the PM Maintenance
Hour Meters when the hour meter has timed out, and preventative
maintenance has been performed.
S STANDBY
RESET Selecting RESET and pressing the ”=” key will de-activate the alarm,
and reset the hour meter for the next service interval. The amount of
S ENGINE time added back into the meter before the next alarm trigger is de-
RESET termined by the PM Hour Meter Reset value entered in the meter
Configuration.
S SWITCH ON RESET If the hour meter has been configured as active, this menu item will
not display.
S PM 1 Thru 5 RESET If there are active maintenance hour meters and none have expired
and turned the alarm on, the MessageCenter will display “NO
METERS TO RESET.”
* OVERRIDE NO *If the Door Switch is configured “Switch Not Installed”, this paramet-
DOOR YES er will not display
SHUTDOWN
NO -- the microprocessor will respond to the door switch as con-
figured
YES -- the configured action on opening of the door will be overridden
and the action will be alarm only. The purpose of this setting is to
temporarily override the Configuration setting in situations where
shutdown or speed change is not desired.
OVERRIDE NO *If the Remote Switch is configured “Switch Not Installed”, this para-
REMS1 or REMS2 YES meter will not display
NO -- the microprocessor will respond to the remote switch as con-
figured
YES -- the configured action for the switch will be overridden and the
action will be alarm only. The purpose of this setting is to temporarily
override the action in situations where shutdown is not desired.

3--25 62-61753
3.16 LANGUAGE SELECTION

To change the displayed language, do the following

LANGUAGE
Toggle the LANGUAGE switch. Language order
is: Spanish, French, German, Italian, Dutch, Dan-
STANDBY
ish, Russian, Portuguese and English.

ENGINE

I START/RUN

0 OFF

62-61753 3--26
3.17 STOPPING UNIT

WARNING
Always place SROS in the OFF position and turn off the high voltage power supply before dis-
connecting the high voltage power plug from the unit.

off
STANDBY

ENGINE

1. To stop the unit, place the START / RUN - OFF

switch in the OFF position.

The diesel engine or compressor will stop and the micro- NOTE
processor will turn off. The Microprocessor Main Dis- The microprocessor will close the Electronic
play, MessageCenter, and all indicator LEDs will also Expansion Valve (EVXV) and the CSMV to
turn off. 0% open before turning off.
NOTE
Due to internal processing within the micro-
processor, turning the SROS OFF then back
to START / RUN will result in a 4 to 50 sec-
ond delay between the display going off and
coming back on again.

3--27 62-61753
3.18 DATA RECORDING b. Sensor Data
This information is recorded at pre--determined inter-
The Advance microprocessor contains a built-in Data- vals as a snapshot of the sensor at the time of the re-
Recorder with 512K of memory. The recorded data can cording, or an averaged reading of the sensor readings
be downloaded from the DataRecorder using either Re- since the last recording. The user can determine which
eferManager, a PC software program, or a Download sensor(s) will be recorded, at what intervals, and wheth-
PC card. er snapshot or averaged readings are preferred. (Snap-
shot readings of sensors are also taken at the time of a
The DataRecorder reads the same input information as shutdown alarm.)
the microprocessor (Functional Parameters, Configura- All of the sensors and transducers that may be read un-
tions, and Unit Data) at all times. The DataRecorder re- der Unit Data (refer to Table 3--1) may be included or ex-
cords events as they occur, such as set point changes cluded form the recordings.
and Defrost Initiation and Termination, and also records
all data values including temperature sensors and pres- c. Event Occurrences
sure transducers in either averaged or snapshot format. This information is any additional data that is recorded
on a “when it occurs” basis. Events are recorded by the
The following intervals are available for sensor record- recorder as they occur. An Event is defined as some-
ing: thing that happens and may include:
2 Minutes 30 Minutes
S Set point change
5 Minutes 1 Hour
10 Minutes 2 Hours S Defrost cycle start
15 Minutes 4 Hours S Main power on
S Pretrip start
3.18.1 Microprocessor Information
S Pretrip end
The microprocessor information that may be recorded is S Unit mode
as follows:
S Control mode
S Data Recorder Setup (Logging Intervals, Events and S Door and Remote switch activations.
Sensors)
S Hour Meter readings (Hour meters are recorded at
S Data Recorder Time Clock Date / Time midnight or the first time of day the switch is turned to
the ON position.
S Set points d. User Area Data
The User or service technician may enter a Comment
S ID Number into the Data Recorder using the ReeferManager pro-
gram.
S Unit Serial Number
3.18.3 Data Downloading
S Unit Model Number The data within the Data Recorder can be downloaded
using either the ReeferManager program with a down-
S Trailer ID load cable connected to the download port or with a
Download PC card (refer to Section 5.2). If a PC card is
S Current System Mode used, the ReeferManager program is then used to ex-
tract the data from the PC card, and place it on the com-
puter hard disk.
S Functional Parameters
3.18.4 Data Recorder Power--Up
S Microprocessor Configurations The Data Recorder records data the entire time the
START / RUN--OFF switch is in the START / RUN posi-
3.18.2 Data Recording tion. A Configuration exists which allows the user to se-
lect either an additional 8 hours of sensor data be re-
The Data Recorder data comes from four general cate- corded after the START / RUN--OFF Switch is placed in
gories of information: the OFF position, or to stop recording at the same time
the SROS is placed in the OFF position. The factory set-
a. Microprocessor Information as described in Section ting is to stop recording at the same time the SROS is
3.18.1 above. placed in the OFF position. (Refer to Section 5.1.1.)

62-61753 3--28
3.19 OPTIONS
3.19.1 IntelliSet

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

+34.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
APPLES ACTIVE

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

DURING START UP
Observe the MessageCenter during the Power--Up process. If the unit is equipped with IntelliSet, the name
of the active or modified IntelliSet will be displayed for approximately 10 seconds before the engine starts.

DURING OPERATION
Press the SELECT key to view current IntelliSet. You will be prompted to press either the “=” key or the UP
or DOWN ARROW Key to scroll through list of IntelliSets. The current IntelliSet will have either the word
ACTIVE or MODIFIED after it. MODIFIED indicates that one or more of the IntelliSet settings (other than
set point) have been changed. To change MODIFIED to ACTIVE, press ”=” key while the IntelliSet is dis-
played in the MessageCenter.

The LogiCOLD Microprocessor offers over 48 pa-
rameters that may be set depending on the product be-
ing carried. IntelliSet allows the owner to pre--program
specific product settings into the microprocessor and
give the settings a name. The operator may then call up
these settings by simply selecting the IntelliSet name.
For example: Apples may require continuous op-
eration at 1.7°C (35°F) with a defrost every 3 hours while
a load of cheese may require the same operation with
set points ranging from 1.7°C to 5.6°C (35°F to 42°F)
and a load of ice cream requires Start--Stop operation at
--30°C (--22°F) with defrost at 12 hour intervals. The set-
tings required for each product may be entered into the
microprocessor and then locked so they cannot be
changed. In the case of the cheese, the range of set
points may be locked, leaving the operator the ability to
change the set point within the locked range.
When a load of apples is going to be picked up, the
operator simply selects “APPLES” from the IntelliSet
menu; for cheese, “CHEESE” is selected; for ice cream,
“ICE CREAM” is selected. With each selection, the mi-
croprocessor automatically re--programs the settings to
provide the best temperature control, fuel economy, and
performance for that particular product.
NOTE
IntelliSet #31 is pre--programmed as
“IntelliSleep” which allows Sleep Mode (refer to
Section 3.8) to be entered by simply changing
to that IntelliSet.
The ONLY way to exit from IntelliSleep is to se-
lect a different IntelliSet.
NOTE
The above settings are examples of possible
settings. Factory IntelliSets are available from
the Information Website through your author-
ized Truck / Trailer dealer.

3--29 62-61753
a. Changing IntelliSets -- With “=” Key Enabled

NOTE: If pressing the “=” key does not

bring up the IntelliSet message the mi-
croprocessor is not configured with this
feature. To view IntelliSets, refer to the
following section.

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

+34.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
APPLES ACTIVE

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. PRESS the ”=” Key to display current IntelliSet.

2. Pressing the UP or DOWN ARROW key, to move through the IntelliSet List. The current
IntelliSet will have either ACTIVE or MODIFIED to the right of the name.

3. To use a different IntelliSet, bring the desired IntelliSet into the MessageCenter and
press the ”=” Key.

62-61753 3--30
b. Changing IntelliSets -- Without “=” Key Enabled

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

--20.0 +34.5° F
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW INTELLISETS

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

1. Press the SELECT key until MessageCenter displays

PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW INTELLISETS.

2. When the UP ARROW key is pressed, the IntelliSet List will scroll
up, beginning at the bottom. When the DOWN ARROW key is
pressed, the InteliSet List will scroll down, beginning at the top. The
current IntelliSet will have either ACTIVE or MODIFIED to the right
of the name.
3. After selecting the new IntelliSet press the “=” key.

3--31 62-61753
3.19.2 Remote Control Panel

8 1 Control panel power on LED

9 2 System ON/OFF key
3 Manual defrost key
4 Control panel lock LED
5 HEAT mode LED
6 COOL mode LED
7 7 Up and down arrow keys
8 Set point display
9 Temperature display in C° or °F
6

1 2 3 4

TEMP. SET POINT

DISPLAY DISPLAY

WAITING FOR COMMUNICATION WITH MICROPROCESSOR

UNIT WAS TURNED OFF VIA REMOTE CONTROL

UNIT IN DEFROST MODE

TEMPERATURE SENSOR MALFUNCTION

P1 DISPLAYED WHEN SETTING PRE--SET SETPOINTS

NOTE:
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY (°C OR °F) IS DEPENDENT ON MICROPROCESSOR CONFIGURATION

The unit may be fitted with an optional remote control The remote control panel can be used to :
panel. The panel displays refrigerated compartment set Turn the unit on or off:
point, compartment temperature and operating mode
(heat, cool or defrost). The set point may be set and the S Check refrigerated compartment temperature
unit may be started and stopped using the remote panel.
S Check and change set point
This compact panels can be mounted to suit the
individual operator’s preferences -- in the cab, on the S Initiate manual defrost
front bulkhead, or in the refrigerated compartment
(including in the wall itself). S Check mode of operation

62-61753 3--32
a.Starting Unit with Remote Control Panel
NOTE
The unit can be shut down using either the remote panel or the main START / RUN--OFF switch. The SROS
must be in the “START /RUN” position in order for the remote panel to operate.

CAUTION
If the unit is to remain off for an extended period of time the SROS must be placed in the OFF
position to prevent a constant drain on the battery.

1. Place SROS in “START/RUN”

position.

2. Press The System ON/OFF Key. Pow-

er Light Will illuminate.

b. Changing Set Point With Remote Control Panel

1. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW

key to increase or decrease set
point.

3--33 62-61753
c.Lock / Unlock the Remote Control Panel

LOCKING THE PANEL:

Press and hold the Carrier Logo for
approximately one second and then
release.
The lock indicator light will illuminate.

UNLOCKING THE PANEL:

Press the Carrier Logo for 10 seconds
The lock indicator light will de--energize.

CARRIER
LOGO

LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT

d.Preset Set Point With Remote Control Panel

The control panel allows the user to pre--set 5 different temperatures.

NOTE
Once preset set points have been chosen, only those 5 designated set points can be used.

1. Place SROS in the “START /RUN” position.

3. Press UP ARROW for 10 seconds.

P1 will be displayed.

4. Set lowest set point required.

5. Press Carrier logo and P2 will be

displayed. Set next highest tem-
perature required.

6. Follow same procedure for the next

three temperatures.

2. Press Carrier logo and the lock light will illuminate.

62-61753 3--34
e. Removing Preset

1. Place SROS in the “START /RUN” position.

3. Press UP ARROW for 10 seconds.

P1 will be displayed.

4. Set temperature to lowest pre--set set

point and OFF will be displayed

2. Press Carrier logo and the lock light will illuminate.

3--35 62-61753
 SECTION 4
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
NOTES
1. If the unit is in an alarm condition, the microprocessor alarm response may override the operation
described herein. If an alarm is displayed in the MessageCenter, refer to the specific alarm description in
Section 7 for “Unit Control” descriptions.
2. With the complex control systems in use with the LogiCOLD microprocessor there are many user
selected and preprogrammed software overrides which may change the operation of the unit. Refer to
Sections 4.6 & 4.7 for complete descriptions of these features.
4.1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes engine and refrigeration system
operation in relation to temperature control in both
Engine and Standby Operation. For descriptions of
refrigerant system component operation when cooling,
or heating, with flow diagrams, refer to sections 2.14
and 2.15.
4.2 SYSTEM START--UP
Engine or Standby Operation is chosen by positioning of
the STANDBY/ENGINE switch (DES).
With the switch in the STANDBY position the power
supply contactor relay (PSCONR) is energized.
Energizing PSCONR reverses its contacts to allow
power from the power plug while the engine is shut down
and power from the generator is locked out.
With the switch in the ENGINE position the generator
contactor relay (GENCONR) is energized. Energizing
GENCONR reverses its contacts to allow the engine
and generator to operate while power from the power
plug is locked out.
The start/run--off switch (SROS) is then placed in the
START/RUN position to start the unit.
The microprocessor energizes the unloader solenoid
valve (USV). The economizer solenoid valve (ESV) and
liquid injection solenoid valve (LIV) remain
de--energized, allowing the unit to start in the Bypass
Mode.
The compressor suction modulating valve (CSMV) and
evaporator expansion valve (EVXV) will both close (0%
open).
NOTE
The unit will not restart for at least 30 seconds
following a shutdown.
4.2.1 Standby Start--Up
On command to perform a Start--Up the microprocessor
will determine if there is a need to perform a Bump Start.
Bump Start is performed to clear refrigerant from the
compressor and/or return oil and will be activated if:
4--1
• the compressor has been off for more than four
hours or
• suction and discharge pressure are within 0.7 bar
(10 psi) or
• suction pressure is above discharge pressure
During Bump Start the microprocessor will de--energize
the unloader solenoid valve (USV), economizer
solenoid valve (ESV) & liquid line solenoid valve (LIV)
and energize the buzzer for five seconds. Then the
compressor will operate for one second on followed by
seven seconds off. The on/off sequence will repeat two
additional times.
Following Bump Start the compressor will transition to
steady state operation, and the evaporator fans will
start.
If Bump Start is not required, the buzzer will be
energized for five seconds the compressor will start and
the evaporator fans will start.
The condenser fan may operate or cycle during the
start--up process depending on temperature and
pressure conditions.
The compressor will continue to operate for a minimum
of three minutes after start--up with the refrigeration
system operating in the mode(s) required for
temperature control.
4.2.2 Engine Start--Up
In Engine Operation the refrigeration system
components will follow the start--up sequence described
in the preceding Standby Start--Up section after the
engine is started and the generator is producing
sufficient power.
During start--up the speed solenoid remains
de--energized, placing the engine in low speed.
The engine start sequence consists of periods of time
with the glow plug relay (GPR) and starter solenoid relay
(SSR) energized and de--energized for up to three start
attempts.
The glow time for the first start attempt will vary in duration
based on engine coolant temperature and the selected
GLOW TIME in the microprocessor Configurations. The
Configuration may be set to Short or Long. Factory default
setting is Short. (Refer to Section 5.1.1).
62-61753
 Table 4-1. Glow Time When the required glow time has elapsed the starter
Glow Time in solenoid relay will be energized for a maximum of ten
Seconds seconds while the engine condition is checked each two
Engine Coolant Temp
seconds during the cranking period. The engine is
SHORT LONG considered to be running, and the start sequence will be
Less than 0_C (32_F) 15 55 stopped, when engine RPM is greater than 1000.
1_C to 10_C (33_F to 50_F) 10 40
During the second and third attempts, the
11_C to 25_C (51_F to 77_F) 5 25 microprocessor will monitor additional inputs.
Greater than 26_C (78_F) 0 10
S When engine RPM reading is less that 1000, ambient
The second start attempt has 5 seconds of glow time temperature is above 0°C (32°F) and the ENOPS is
added to the time shown in the table. The third start closed -- the CHECK ENGINE SPEED SENSOR alarm
attempt will have 10 seconds added. See Figure 4--1. will be activated and the engine will be considered
running.
If the CHECK ENGINE COOLANT SENSOR alarm is S When engine RPM reading is less that 1000, ambient
active, the microprocessor assumes a temperature of less temperature is below 0°C (32°F), the ENOPS is closed
than 0_C (32_F) for the glow timing. and DC current is more than 2 amps -- the CHECK
ENGINE SPEED SENSOR alarm will be activated and
the engine will be considered running.
If the unit fails to start after three start attempts, the
FAILED TO START--AUTO MODE alarm will be
REPEAT “A” activated.
+ 10 Seconds
GLOW 4.2.3 Transition To High Speed
THIRD
ATTEMPT After a successful start, the microprocessor may call for
the engine to transition to high speed. Two factors
15 Seconds control this transition.
STOP
• First, transition may be delayed if a time value is
entered in either the START--STOP HIGH SPEED
DELAY or CONTINUOUS RUN HIGH SPEED
REPEAT “A” DELAY Configuration. The delay may be set to OFF
+ 5 Seconds or from 0 to 255 minutes. The factory default setting
GLOW for Start--Stop Operation is 10 minutes while the fact-
SECOND ory default setting for Continuous Operation is OFF.
ATTEMPT If the entered value for the present mode of opera-
tion is OFF, high speed operation is not allowed for
15 Seconds two minutes following start.
STOP
• Second, the engine cannot transition if the SILENT
MODE functional parameter is set to YES. The value
MAXIMUM may be set to YES or NO. The factory default setting
10 Seconds is NO. (Refer to Section 3.15).
Checked at 2 CRANK
Second Intervals
NOTE
The “Selected Probe” is the sensor chosen by
FIRST the user as the preferred probe for Temperature
ATTEMPT “A” Control. The “Active Probe” is the sensor actu-
VARIABLE ally used by the microprocessor to perform the
0 to 55 SECONDS temperature control. The “Active Probe” will be
GLOW GLOW sensor chosen by the user as the preferred
probe, unless that sensor is not installed or is
defective.

When high speed is allowed, transition will be based on

the difference between the active probe temperature
(APT) and set point (SP) as follows.
When in Start/Stop Operation or in Continuous
Figure 4--1. Auto Start Sequence Operation with ECO Mode OFF:

62-61753 4--2
 HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED the Perishable range (above --12°C [+10.4°F]) or in
the Frozen range (--12°C [+10.4°F] or below).
COOLING
If TOGETHER is selected, then the following Functional
APT--SP is greater than APT--SP is less than
2_C (3.6_F) 1.8_C (3.24_F) Parameter values will be available for use:
NULL • MINIMUM RUN TIME
Low Speed Only • MINIMUM OFF TIME
HEAT • OVERRIDE TEMP
APT--SP is less than APT--SP is greater than • MAXIMUM OFF TIME
2_C (3.6_F) 1.8_C (3.24_F)
• FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
If SEPARATE is selected, then the following Functional
When in Continuous Operation with ECO Mode ON:
Parameter values will be available for use:
HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED • PERISHABLE MINIMUM RUN TIME
COOLING • PERISHABLE MINIMUM OFF TIME
APT--SP is greater than APT--SP is less than the • PERISHABLE OVERRIDE TEMP
the ECO Mode Offset ECO Mode Offset Value
Value + 2_C (3.6_F) + 1_C (1.8_F) • PERISHABLE MAXIMUM OFF TIME
NULL • FROZEN MINIMUM RUN TIME
Low Speed Only • FROZEN MINIMUM OFF TIME
HEAT • FROZEN OVERRIDE TEMP
APT--SP is less than APT--SP is greater than • FROZEN MAXIMUM OFF TIME
2_C (3.6_F) 1.8_C (3.24_F)
• FROZEN SHUTDOWN OFFSET
NOTE
4.3 START--STOP OPERATION In the event that this Configuration was set to
SEPARATE and the eight Functional Paramet-
Start--Stop is provided to reduce fuel or power
ers for Perishable and Frozen have been set
consumption. This feature allows full automatic control
of the unit starting and stopping by monitoring and then the Configuration is changed from
refrigerated compartment temperature, battery SEPARATE to TOGETHER. The values from
charging amps and (when in Engine Operation) engine the Perishable times will be the ones that will be
coolant temperature. The main function of Start--Stop used.
Operation is to shut down the refrigeration system near
setpoint to provide an efficient temperature control 4.3.2 Stop Parameters
system and to initiate a restart sequence after certain Whenever the unit starts in Start--Stop Operation, it will
conditions are met. The Start--Stop/Continuous key is continue to run until all five of the following criteria have
pressed to select between Continuous and Start--Stop been satisfied:
Operation. The corresponding LED will be illuminated.
1 It has run for the selected Minimum Run Time.
NOTE The MINIMUM RUN TIME is selected in the
The microprocessor may be locked so that the microprocessor Functional Parameters. The purpose of
unit will always operate in Start--Stop whenever this is to force the unit to run long enough to completely
the setpoint is within a specific range. Refer to circulate the air inside the refrigerated compartment,
Range Lock (Section 4.6.2) and ProductShield and to ensure that the product temperature is at
(Section 4.6.3) for additional information. setpoint. This value may be set from 4 to 60 minutes in 1
minute intervals. The factory default setting is 4
minutes.
4.3.1 Start--Stop Configuration
2 The engine coolant temperature is above 50°C
Microprocessor control of Start--Stop Operation is (122°F).
dependent on both Configuration and Functional
Each time the unit is started in Engine Operation it must
Parameter settings. The first setting to be considered is
continue to run until the coolant temperature rises to
the START/STOP PARAMETERS Configuration. This
50_C (122_F) to ensure it has fully warmed up before
setting determines control actions when in the Perishable
shutdown is allowed.
Range or Frozen Range. The available settings are
TOGETHER and SEPARATE. 3 The battery is fully charged -- Voltage.
• When TOGETHER is chosen, the same settings ap- A good battery is defined as having 13.4 VDC at 25_C
ply to any setpoint. (77_F). The microprocessor will calculate the equivalent
voltage based on the ambient temperature and
• When SEPARATE is chosen the control action will shutdown will be allowed when battery voltage is at or
be different, depending on whether the setpoint is in above the calculated value.

4--3 62-61753
4 The battery is fully charged -- Amperage.
The microprocessor will calculate the average current
draw over a 20 second period. Once this average drops
below the selected value, shutdown will be allowed. The
CURRENT FOR START/STOP SHUTOFF is selected
in the microprocessor Configurations The value may be
set from 1 to 10 amps in 0.5 amp intervals. The factory
default setting is 5 amps.
5 The refrigerated compartment temperature is at
setpoint.
Shutdown will be allowed when the active probe
temperature is within ±0.3_C (±0.5_F) of set point, in the
Perishable Range. In the Frozen Range, shutdown will be
allowed when the active probe temperature is within
±0.3_C -- the FROZEN SHUT DOWN OFFSET
(±0.5_F-- the FROZEN SHUT DOWN OFFSET) of set
point.
The FROZEN SHUT DOWN OFFSET Functional
Parameter may be set from 0_C (0_F) to 2_C (3.6_F) in
0.5_(C or F) increments. The factory default setting is
0_C (32_F).
4.3.3 Re--Start Parameters
While the unit is in Start--Stop Off, restart will be initiated
when one of the following conditions occurs:
1 Engine coolant temperature drops below selec-
ted microprocessor Configuration value.
If in Engine Operation, the microprocessor will monitor
coolant temperature. If coolant temperature drops
below the ENGINE TEMPERATURE FOR RESTART
Configuration value the engine will be started. The
Configuration value may be set from --12.2_C (10_F) to
0_C (32_F) in 0.5_(C or F) increments. The factory
default setting is 0_C (32_F).
2 Battery voltage falls below selected micropro-
cessor Configuration value.
The microprocessor will monitor battery voltage. If
battery voltage is at or below the VOLTAGE FOR
START/STOP RESTART Configuration value the
engine will be started. The value may be set from 12.0 to
12.8 volts. The factory default setting is 12.2 volts.
TIP
While the unit is running, the status of the unit
battery can be readily checked by reading the
Battery Voltage in the Data List. If “OK.” ap-
pears after the voltage reading, battery voltage
is sufficient to allow the unit to cycle off.
3 Refrigerated compartment Temperature has ex-
ceeded the microprocessor Functional Para-
meter value.
The microprocessor continually monitors the
refrigerated compartment temperature. If the
temperature should drift outside the OVERRIDE
TEMPERATURE Functional Parameter value the unit
will be restarted. The value may be set from 2_C (3.6_F)
62-61753
to 10_C (18_F) in 0.5° increments. The factory default
setting is 6_C (11_F).
4 The Maximum Off Time has expired.
In some ambient conditions, there are times when the
unit may be off for very long periods of time. To ensure
that the entire load stays within required temperature
ranges, the MAXIMUM OFF TIME Functional
Parameter may be used to force the unit to restart. The
parameter value may be set to OFF or from 10 to 225
minutes in 1 minute intervals. The factory default setting
is OFF.
5 The minimum off time has expired
The MINIMUM OFF TIME Functional Parameter setting
allows the unit to remain off for extended periods of time,
maximizing fuel/power economy. The unit may not be
restarted until the MINIMUM OFF TIME has expired and
one of the other Re--Start parameters is calling for
re--start. The parameter value may be set from 10 to 90
minutes in 1 minute intervals. The factory default setting
is 20 minutes.
4.4 CONTINUOUS OPERATION
In Continuous Operation, the unit will not shut down
except in response to a shut down alarm. Continuous
Operation is normally used for fresh produce and other
sensitive product loads. The Start-Stop/Continuous key is
pressed to switch between Continuous and Start-Stop
operating modes. The corresponding LED will be
illuminated.
NOTE
The microprocessor may be locked so that the
unit will always operate in Start--Stop or in Con-
tinuous whenever the setpoint is within a specif-
ic range. Refer to Range Lock (Section 4.6.2)
and ProductShield (Section 4.6.3) for additional
information.
4.5 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
4.5.1 Temperature Determination
The microprocessor monitors the temperature readings
from the supply and return temperature sensors to
determine the mode of operation required to maintain
refrigerated compartment temperature in accordance with
the Setpoint.
Based on the sensor readings and time, the
microprocessor will calculate a Controlling Temperature
value. This value is calculated to provide smoother
temperature control and transition between the modes of
operation. The modes of operation include Pulldown,
Cool, Heat and Null.
4.5.2 Heat/Cool/Null Mode Switching Logic
Operation in Cool, Heat and Null modes is determined in
accordance with the calculated Controlling Temperature
value (CT) and the difference between this value and
Setpoint (SP) in accordance with the following:
4--4
 COOL MODE
Switch On when CT-- Switch Off when CT--
SP is greater than or SP is less than --0.2_C
equal to 0.2_C (0.36_F) (0.36_F)
NULL MODE
Between Cool & Heat or Heat & Cool
HEAT MODE
Switch On when CT-- Switch Off when CT--
SP is equal to or less SP is greater than --0.2
than --0.3_C (--0.54_F) _C (0.36_F)
When Null Mode is required and the system is operating
in:
• Engine/Start--Stop Operation, the engine & refriger-
ation system (compressor, condenser fans and
evaporator fans) will shut down if the remaining Stop
Parameters have been satisfied.
• Standby/Start--Stop Operation, the refrigeration
system will shut down if the remaining Stop Para-
meters have been satisfied.
• Engine/Continuous Operation, the compressor will
shut down while the engine and evaporator fans will
continue to operate. The condenser fan will operate
if engine cooling is required.
• Standby Continuous Operation, the compressor and
condenser fans will shut down while the evaporator
fans will continue to operate.
4.5.3 Cool Mode
When Cool Mode is required the system will operate in
Pulldown or CSMV Control. Pulldown operation will
include periods of time in Economized Mode and
Standard Mode. CSMV control will occur in Standard
Mode. For descriptions of operation when cooling, with
flow diagrams, refer to section 2.14.
Pulldown
Pulldown will be entered:
• following a Start--Up.
• following a Setpoint change (requiring additional
cooling).
• following an operational change (Start--Stop vs
Continuous or Engine Operation vs Standby Opera-
tion).
• following a defrost termination.
• or when all other Stop Parameters have been met
except the refrigerated compartment Temperature
Stop Parameter.
Pulldown will end when one of the following occurs:
• when in Engine Operation and the microprocessor is
calling for low speed.
• when in Start--Stop and the refrigerated compart-
ment Temperature Stop Parameter has been satis-
fied while one or more of the other Stop Parameters
has not.
4--5
• when in Continuous Operation, with a setpoint less
than 18.4_C (65.1_F) and the microprocessor has
calculated Control Temperature is in the required
range.
This range is calculated when Supply Temperature
(ST) is equal to or less than the Return Temperature
(RT). The calculation is:
Off Value = ST -- RT
2
When the Control Temperature is within a range of
+/-- the Off Value of set point, Pulldown Mode ends.
CSMV Control
CSMV Control will be entered when additional cooling is
required and Pulldown is not allowed. In CSMV Control
the valve will be modulated so as to balance compressor
capacity with the refrigeration load.
4.5.4 Heat Mode
When Heat Mode is required the system will operate
with the evaporator fans energized. Operation of the
heaters is determined in accordance with the calculated
Controlling Temperature value (CT) and the difference
between this value and Setpoint (SP) in accordance
with the following:
HTCON1
Switch On when CT-- Switch Off when CT--
SP is less than --0.3_C SP is greater than
(--0.54_F) --0.2_C (--0.36_F)
HTCON2
Switch On when CT-- Switch Off when CT--
SP is less than --0.2_C SP is greater than
(--0.36_F) --1.8_C (--3.24_F)
HTCON1 may also be activated when the unit is in
Continuous Operation Cooling to assist in balancing unit
capacity with the load. In all other operating states and
modes HTCON1 and HTCON2 will not be activated.
4.5.5 Null Mode
For descriptions of operation in the Null Mode, refer to
4.5.2.
4.5.6 Defrost Mode
Defrost is an independent cycle overriding cooling and
heating functions in order to de-ice the evaporator. When
the unit is in defrost, the DEFROST LED will be on, the
MessageCenter will display DEFROST CYCLE
STARTED for 5 seconds. The center of the Main Display
will show “dF”. Defrost will not be allowed until the DDT is
below 4.4_C (40.0_F).
1. Defrost Initiation And Start
Defrost can be initiated by pressing the MANUAL
DEFROST key or automatically by the microprocessor.
Microprocessor initiation is based on coil condition or
expiration of the defrost timer.
Defrost based on coil condition will be initiated when:
• blockage is sufficient to cause an air pressure differ-
ential across the coil great enough to close the con-
tacts of the defrost air switch(DAS) .
OR
62-61753
• when the RAT -- DTT temperature is greater than
20°C (36°F) for 15 continuous minutes. This method
of defrost initiation will only be used for 3 consecutive
defrosts. After three consecutive defrost initiations
by this method the counter will be reset to allow this
defrost initiation again after a defrost cycle is initiated
by another method (timer, air switch or manual).
TIP
Ice is not the only thing that will cause the air dif-
ferential to increase across the evaporator coil.
Shrink wrap, paper, plastic bags, and other
such items when caught in the return air stream
and pulled up against the evaporator coil or the
return air grille can also cause the DAS contacts
to close.
Time interval between defrosts is selected in the micro-
processor Functional Parameters. The parameter value
may be set to 1.5, 3, 6, or 12 hours. The factory default
setting is 6 hours.
NOTE
The defrost timer will not count when the unit is
in defrost, the engine is in an off cycle or DTT is
greater than 4.4_C (40.0_F).
2. Defrost Modes
There are two Defrost Modes available:
NOTE
When the unit is in either defrost mode and in
Engine operation:
S the condenser fan will operate to supply air
for the radiator.
S the engine will operate in high speed when
HTCON1 and/or HTCON2 are energized
(to supply power for the heaters).
S the engine will operate in low speed when
both HTCON1 and HTCON2 are
de--energized.
S Normal Defrost Mode will be entered if RAT is less
than 0.0_C (32.0_F) and SAT is less than 7.2_C
(45.0_F). Defrost will be accomplished by shutting
down the refrigeration system while the heaters
(HTCON1 & HTCON2) are energized.
S Natural Defrost Mode uses a combination of the heat
from the product and the electric heaters to melt any
ice.
Natural defrost is available when:
S the Natural Defrost microprocessor
Configuration is set to YES and
S defrost is initiation by closing of the DAS
contacts with RAT greater than or equal to
4.0_C (39.2_F) and
S at least one normal defrost has been
performed since power up and
S this initiation will not result in more than 3
natural defrosts between normal defrosts
when a natural defrost is initiated, the unit will operate
for the first five minutes with the evaporator fan and
HTCON2 de--energized and only HTCON1 ener-
62-61753
gized. After 5 minutes the evaporator fan is energized
while both HTCON1 & HTCON2 are de--energized.
3. Defrost Termination
When in either defrost mode, defrost will terminate
when the DTT rises to 12.8_C (55_F). When operating
in Return Air mode, defrost will continue for a minimum
of 5 minutes, a maximum of 10 minutes, or until the SAT
is equal to or higher than the RAT.
During Defrost Termination, the heaters will
de--energize, and the engine will go to low speed. “dF”
will continue to be displayed in place of refrigerated
compartment Temperature, and the Cool LED will come
on when the compressor starts.
The EVXV will open, and the evaporator coil will begin to
cool down. The evaporator fans will not come on right
away, so that warm air is not blown into the refrigerated
compartment, but will wait for the evaporator to cool
down, up to a maximum of 8 minutes. Once the
evaporator fan has started, “dF” will no longer be
displayed, and refrigerated compartment Temperature
will again be shown in the main display.
If there is a DTT sensor alarm present, defrost will
terminate after 10 minutes.
NOTE
Defrost Mode uses a Defrost Duration Timer
that allows for a maximum of 45 minutes in de-
frost. If defrost is not terminated during the 45
minutes, the microprocessor will end the de-
frost cycle, and show the alarm “DEFROST
NOT COMPLETE”. When this occurs, the De-
frost Interval Timer is set for 1.5 hours, at which
time the unit will go into defrost again.
4.6. USER SELECTED OVERRIDE OPERATION
Three optional software override programs are avail-
able to the user. These programs include Supply Air
Limit Control, Temperature Range Lock and Product
Shield. Information on how the unit operates under
these programs is provided in the following sub--para-
graphs.
4.6.1 Supply Air Limit Control
Under supply air temperature control the compressor
suction modulating valve (CSMV) is modulated to
maintain supply air to a minimum in accordance with:
S the START--STOP SUPPLY AIR LIMIT Differential
Configuration value
OR
S the CONTINUOUS RUN SUPPLY AIR LIMIT
Differential Configuration value
AND
S the Perishable Sensitive Product Functional
Parameter Setting.
The supply air limit temperature is determined by the
formula: Set Point (SP) + Configured Differential Value
(CDV) = Target Supply Air Limit (TSAL).
The CDV may be set from --12 to 0∆C (--21.6 to 0∆F) in
0.5_C or F intervals. The factory default setting for
4--6
Start--Stop is --6.0∆C (--10.8∆F) while the factory default
setting for Continuous Operation is --5.0∆C (--9∆F).
Example 1:
Metric -- if SP is 2_C and the CDV is --6∆C the
calculation would be:
2_C + (--6∆C) = --4_C
English -- if SP is 35.6_F and the CDV is --10.5∆F the
calculation would be:
35.5_F + (--10.5∆F) = 25.0_F
Example 2:
Metric -- If the set point is 10_C and the CDV is --6∆C the
calculation would be:
10_C + (--6∆C) = +4_C
English --If the set point is 50_F and the CDV is --10.5∆F
the calculation would be:
50_F + (--10.5∆F) = 39.5_F
With the Perishable Sensitive Product Functional
Parameter set at the default (NO) setting, supply air limit
control is not allowed until the supply air temperature:
falls to 0_C (32.0_F) and then it will control to 0_C
(32.0_F) OR to the calculated limit (TSAL) if the
calculated limit is below 0_C (32.0_F).
In example 1 above the CSMV would throttle to control
the supply air temperature at --4_C (25.0_F) while in
example 2, it will control to 0_C (32.0_F)
If the sensitivity of the product is such that temperatures
must be maintained above freezing, the Perishable
Sensitive Product Functional Parameter is changed to
YES. With this setting, the limit control will not allow
supply air temperature to fall below 0_C (32.0_F).
In example 1 above the CSMV would throttle to control
the supply air temperature at 0_C (32.0_F) while in
example 2, control would begin when supply air
temperature falls to 4_C (39.5_F).
NOTE
The pulldown and engine run time is heavily de-
pendent on the Supply Air Limit Configuration
Setting and resultant calculated Target Supply
Air Limit (TSAL). Expect longer pull down and
engine run times when the Supply Air Limit
Control Setting is configured to smaller numer-
ical values. Longer pull down times can also be
expected if the Perishable Sensitive Product
Functional Parameter is set to YES.
4.6.2 Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2
Range Lock is a group of Configurations which may be
set to lock the unit into Start--Stop or Continuous
Operation for various setpoint ranges. Two ranges are
available for selection. Each Range can be
independently set to lock it’s setpoint temperatures into
either Start--Stop or Continuous Operation.
Each Range has it’s own selectable minimum and
maximum temperature, which define the span of the
range. If some setpoint temperatures may contained in
both ranges due to range overlap, Range 1 will always
have priority over Range 2.
For example (see Figure 4--2), if Continuous Operation
is ALWAYS required whenever the setpoint is between
--2.2°C and +12.8°C (28°F and 55°F), Range 1 will be
set for Continuous Operation, with a Minimum
Temperature of --2.2°C (28°F) and a Maximum
Temperature of --12.8°C (55°F). Should Continuous
Operation ALWAYS also be required with setpoints
between --30°C (--22°F) and --17.8°C (0°F), then Range
2 will be set for Continuous Operation, with a Minimum
Temperature of --30°C (--22°F) and a Maximum
Temperature of --17.8°C (0°F). Any setpoint outside of
Range 1 or 2 will allow changes between Start--Stop and
Continuous Operation.

Range Lock 1 & 2

Range 2 is set for Range 1 is set for

--17.8° to --30°C --2.2° to +12.8°C
(0° to --22°F) (28° to 55°F)

Range 2 Range 1
°C --30 --23.3 --17.8 --12.2 --6.7 --1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7

°F --22 --10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Figure 4--2. Range Lock Settings -- Non Overlapping

4--7 62-61753
 Range 1 always has priority
when Range 1 & 2 overlap

Range 1 is set for 0° to 5.6°C Range 2 is set for --30° to 32°C

(32° to 42°F) (--22° to 89.6°F)
Set for Continuous Set for Start--Stop

Range 2

Range
1
°C --30 --23.3 --17.8 --12.2 --6.7 --1.1 4.4 10.0 15.6 21.1 26.7

°F --22 --10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80

Figure 4--3. Range Lock Settings -- Overlapping

The primary time that it is important to determine which the
range is to be Range 1 and which is to be Range 2 is
when the ranges overlap each other.
In example 2 (see Figure 4--3), the ranges have been
set to lock all setpoints into Start--Stop, except for a switching to Start/Stop if the Econo Delta--T
small range between 0° and 5.6°C (+32° and +42°F)
where the unit will always operate in Continuous
Operation. Range 1 Minimum Temperature has been
set for 0°C (+32°F), and Maximum Temperature of
5.6°C (+42°F). Range 2 has been set for a Minimum
Temperature of --30°C (--22°F) and a Maximum
Temperature of 32°C (+89.6°F).
4.6.3 ProductShield
ProductShield is a group of Configurations which may
be set to provide enhanced product or unit protection
under extreme ambient conditions. There are four
ProductShields: Econo -- Go to Start/Stop, Econo -- Go
to Continuous, High Air and Winter.
a. ProductShield: Econo: Go To Start/Stop
When the unit is in Continuous Operation,
ProductShield -- Go to Start/Stop allows the operator to Continuous Operation for a minimum of 15 minutes. The
select ambient temperature conditions under which the
unit may operate in Start/Stop.
In addition, the operator may also set a Delta T value,
that is the difference between the return air and supply
air sensors.
When the unit is set for Continuous Operation,
ProductShield Econo: Go To Start/Stop allows the unit
to change to Start/Stop when the unit has run in
Continuous Operation for a minimum of 15 minutes and
ambient temperature falls within a
pre--programmed temperature range. (Refer to Section
4.6.4). The operator can also pre--program a maximum
temperature differential (delta--t) between the return air
and supply air sensors as an additional criteria for
Configuration is not OFF. The unit must bring the delta--t
below this setting before going to Start/Stop if this option
is chosen. If unit is set for Continuous Operation and
ProductShield Econo is configured for GO TO
CONTINUOUS, the unit will remain in Continuous
Operation.
Once the micro detects that the above criteria have
been met, the unit will switch from Continuous
Operation to auto Start/Stop for a minimum of 30
minutes or until the unit cycles off. After 30 minutes the
unit will return to Continuous Operation once the
ambient temperature falls outside the
pre--programmed temperature range by ±2° C (±3.6° F).
If the unit shuts down in Auto Start/Stop, it will remain
shut down according to the pre--programmed start/stop
parameters. When the unit restarts it will return to
original activation conditions must again be met in order
for the unit to return to auto Start/Stop.
b. ProductShield: Econo: Go To Continuous Opera-
tion
When the unit is set for Start/Stop, ProductShield
Econo: Go To Continuous Operation allows the unit to
run in Continuous Run for periods providing
ProductShield Econo Configuration is set to GO TO
CONTINUOUS (Refer to Section 5.1.1), the unit has run

62-61753 4--8
in Start/Stop for a minimum of 15 minutes or the
Minimum Run Time minus 60 seconds (Refer to
Table 3--2) and the ambient temperature falls outside a
pre--programmed temperature range. If unit is set for
Start/Stop and ProductShield Econo is configured for
GO TO START/STOP, the unit will remain in Start/Stop.
Once the micro detects that the above criteria have
been met, the unit will switch from Start/Stop to
Continuous Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes.
After 30 minutes the unit will return to Continuous
Operation once the ambient temperature falls within
the pre--programmed temperature range by ±3.6° F
(±2° C). Delta--t logic is not used when unit is configured
for GO TO CONTINUOUS.
c. ProductShield: High Air
High air mode allows the unit to provide increased
airflow with a reduced delta--T under the
pre--programmed criteria. This can maximize product
protection under difficult conditions while allowing the
unit to operate more efficiently during less demanding
conditions.
When the refrigeration unit is set for normal airflow,
ProductShield High Air allows the unit to run at high air
operation for periods providing the ambient temperature
falls within a pre--programmed temperature range. The
operator can also pre--program a maximum
temperature differential (delta--t) between the return air
and supply air sensors as an additional criteria for
switching to high air if the Econo Delta--T Configuration
is not OFF. The unit must bring the delta--t above this
setting before going to high air if this option is chosen.
Once the micro detects that the pre--programmed
criteria have been met, the unit will switch from normal
operation to High Air. The unit will continue to operate in
High Air for a minimum of 30 minutes. After 30 minutes
the unit will return to normal operation once the ambient
temperature falls outside the pre--programmed
temperature range by ±3.6° F ( ±2° C).
If the unit shuts down in Auto Start/Stop during high
speed, it will not be in ProductShield High Air when it
restarts and will return to normal operation for a
minimum of 15 minutes. The original activation
conditions must then be met in order for the unit to return
to high air.
d. ProductShield: Winter
When the unit is set for Start/Stop operation,
ProductShield Winter allows it to switch to Continuous
Operation when the ambient temperature falls below a
pre--programmed temperature. This will protect the unit
from the complication of fuel gelling.
Once the micro detects that the ambient temperature
has dropped below the pre--programmed temperature,
the unit will switch from auto Start/Stop to Continuous
Operation. The unit will continue to operate in
Continuous Operation for a minimum of 30 minutes.
After 30 minutes, the unit will return to auto Start/Stop
once the ambient temperature has risen more than 3.6°
F (2° C) above the pre--programmed ProductShield
Winter temperature.
4--9
All of the ProductShield settings are in the Data List
(Refer to Table 3--1). The Data List will reflect the
ProductShield settings for the IntelliSet commodity that
is currently active.
NOTE
ProductShield does not operate within Sleep
Mode.
4.6.4 ProductShield Temperature Ranges
Each ProductShield setting allows the user to select a
ambient temperature range in which to operate.
The Minimum and Maximum range values can be set to
OFF, or any value from --19°F to +119°F (--28.3°C to
+48.3°C ).
The examples below all use the same settings and
illustrate the differences in unit operation for the various
ProductShield selections.
a. ProductShield: Econo: Go To Start/Stop
Examples
The following examples apply in situations where all
other Start/Stop conditions have been met.
If the Minimum is set to 30°F (--1.1°C) and the Maximum
is set to 42°F (5.6°C) and the ambient air temperature
falls between these temperatures, the unit operation
can change to Econo Start/Stop.
If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Maximum is set to
35°F (1.7°C) and the ambient air temperature falls
below 35°F (1.7°C), the unit operation can change to
Econo Start/Stop.
If the Minimum is set to 70°F (21.1°) and the Maximum is
set to OFF and the ambient air temperature is above
70°F (1.7°C), the unit operation can change to Econo
Start/Stop.
b. ProductShield: Econo: Go To Continuous Opera-
tion Examples
If the Minimum is set to 30°F (--1.1°C) and the Maximum
is set to 42°F (5.6°C) and the ambient air temperature
falls outside these temperatures, the unit operation will
change to Econo Continuous Operation.
If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Maximum is set to
35°F (1.7°C) and the ambient air temperature is above
35°F (1.7°C), the unit operation will change to Econo
Continuous Operation.
If the Minimum is set to 70°F (21.1°) and the Maximum is
set to OFF and the ambient air temperature is below
70°F (1.7°C), the unit operation will change to Econo
Continuous Operation.
c. ProductShield: High Air Examples
If the Minimum is set to 15°F (--9.4°C) and the Maximum
is set to 85°F (29.4°C) and the ambient air temperature
falls outside these temperatures, the unit operation will
change to Econo High Air.
If the Minimum is set to OFF and the Maximum is set to
35°F (1.7°C) and the ambient air temperature falls
above 35°F (1.7°C), the unit operation will change to
Econo High Air.
62-61753
If the Minimum is set to 70°F (21.1°) and the Maximum is
set to OFF and the ambient air temperature is below
70°F (1.7°C), the unit operation will change to Econo
High Air.
4.7. PREPROGRAMMED SOFTWARE
OVERRIDES
4.7.1 High Discharge Temperature
The microprocessor monitors the signal provided by the
compressor discharge temperature sensor. If com-
pressor temperature rises to the limit (refer to section
2.10), the system will enter Liquid Injection Mode. In this
mode the normally closed liquid injection valve (LIV) will
be pulsed or opened as required to allow flow of refriger-
ant into the economizer connection, to cool the com-
pressor.
4.7.2 RAT & SAT Alarms Both Active
When both the RAT and SAT alarms are activated,
temperature control will enter Default Mode.
S If Default Mode is entered when the setpoint is in the
Perishable Range (above --12°C [+10.4°F]), the unit will
shut down.
S If Default Mode is entered when the setpoint is in the
Frozen Range (--12°C [+10.4°F] or below), the unit will
transition to Economized Mode. If in Engine Operation,
the engine will operate in low speed.
4.7.3 Engine Speed Overrides
With the complex control systems in use with the
LogiCOLD Microprocessor, there are many different
reasons the engine may be operating in either high
speed or in low speed besides the number of degrees
the refrigerated compartment temperature is away from
setpoint . This section lists the different factors that
determine the speed of the engine, in the order of their
priority.
Speed Control Solenoid Overrides in priority order are:
1. RAT & SAT Alarms Both Active
When both the RAT and SAT alarms are activated,
microprocessor control will enter Default Mode. Refer to
Section 4.7.2
2. High Speed To Low Speed Delay
When the unit is operating in high speed, and the
microprocessor calls for low speed, the engine will
remain in high speed until the high voltage current draw
is less than the Diesel Offset Maximum Amps
Configuration value, or for 40 seconds if the amperage
is already lower than the Maximum Amps value. It will
then to go low speed.
3. Silent Mode
When the Silent Mode Functional Parameter is set
to ON, the unit will operate in low speed only
4. Engine Coolant Warm--Up
The engine will run in low speed until the coolant is
above 50°C (122°F).
62-61753
5. Door/Remote Switch Configuration
If the Door/Remote Switch Configuration is set for
low speed, the engine will run in low speed when the
door/remote switch is open/active.
6. Auto Silent Mode
If the engine is restarted from a Start/Stop off cycle
for any reason except a Start/Stop Parameter Override
Temperature the engine will operate in low speed until
the overriding condition is met
7. Low Speed To High Speed Delay
S The compressor must operate for 2 minutes before
transition to high speed is allowed.
S The time value entered in the High Speed Delay Con-
figuration must be expired before transition to high
speed is allowed.
S The time value entered in the Low Speed Startup
Minutes Functional Parameter (for Start/Stop or
Continuous) must be expired before transition to high
speed is allowed.
8. Operation With A Frozen Setpoint
S If in Start/Stop mode with a setpoint in the frozen
range (--12°C [+10.4°F] or below), and the minimum run
time has expired, and the refrigerated compartment
temperature is not at setpoint, the engine will transition
to high speed.
S If setpoint is in the frozen range, and the refrigerated
compartment temperature is below setpoint, the engine
will transition to low speed.
9. Low Suction Pressure
The microprocessor monitors the signal provided
by the Suction Pressure Transducer. If the suction
pressure falls below --0.14 bar (--2psig) for more than 20
seconds, the engine will operate in low speed for a
minimum of 5 minutes, then remain in low speed until
the suction pressure is greater than --0.14 bar (--2psig).
10. Operation With A Perishable Setpoint
S If in Start/Stop Operation with a setpoint in the
perishable range (above --12°C [+10.4°F]) and all
conditions for an OFF Cycle have been met except for
setpoint, the engine will operate in high speed to pull
down to setpoint and cycle off quicker.
NOTE
Generally, the unit will go into an off cycle from
high speed when this condition occurs. Howev-
er, if one of the required conditions for shut
down is no longer met during this time, (for ex-
ample, the battery voltage drops below the con-
figured value, or the charging amps increase
above the configured value, or the engine cool-
ant temperature drops below 122°F (50°C), the
engine may return to low speed operation until
the shut down condition is satisfied, then shut
down from low speed.
S If in Continuous Operation with a setpoint in the
perishable range (above --12°C [+10.4°F]) and the High
Speed Pulldown Configuration is set to YES, the engine
4--10
will operate in high speed until the refrigerated
compartment temperature is within 0.2°C (0.4°F) of
setpoint.
11. Product Shield
S If the ProductShield High Air Configuration is set to
ON, the engine will operate in high speed whenever the
ambient air temperature is outside the temperature
range selected.
S If the ProductShield Delta--T Configuration is set to
ON, the engine will operate in high speed whenever the
Delta--T is greater than the selected value. (Refer to
Section 4.6.3 for more information on ProductShield.)
4.7.4 Operating Mode Overrides
With the complex control systems in use with the
LogiCOLD Microprocessor, there are many different
reasons -- other than the number of degrees the
refrigerated compartment temperature is away from
setpoint -- that the refrigeration system may be
operating in Economized Mode, Standard Mode or
Bypass Mode.
Operating Mode Overrides are:
1. High Discharge Pressure
If the microprocessor is requesting Economized
Mode with discharge pressure above 30.2 bar (444.4
psig) or under a condition where the the compressor
suction modulating valve (CSMV) has throttled more
than 30% in an attempt to control rising discharge
pressure, the system will be transitioned to Bypass
Mode.
2. High Generator Current
If the system is operating with high generator
current the microprocessor will throttle the compressor
suction modulating valve (CSMV) in an attempt to
reduce the load. If additional current reduction is
required the microprocessor will transition from
Economized Mode to Standard Mode or Standard Mode
to Bypass Mode as required to prevent the engine from
stalling. As current is reduced, the microprocessor will
reverse these steps to provide maximum allowable
capacity. This action is called “staging”.
Downshift Staging: If the compressor suction
modulating valve (CSMV) has throttled more than 30%
of its available position due to high current and the
absolute value of the compressor suction modulating
4--11
valve (CSMV) position is less than 20%, operation will
transition from Economized to Standard Mode or from
Standard to Bypass Mode.
Upshift Staging: Bypass to Standard Mode: The
upshift will occur when the generator current is less than
the allowed maximum generator current -- (1 amp + an
upshift offset). The upshift offset is 0.5 amps X the
number of failed upshift attempts.
Upshift Staging: Standard to Economized Mode:
The upshift will occur when the generator current is less
than the allowed maximum generator current -- (1.5 amp
+ an upshift offset). The upshift offset is 0.5 amps X the
number of failed upshift attemps.
In both upshift calculations the upshift offset range is
limited to a maximum of 3 amps.
3. Fan Motor Delay
When ever any fan motor has been energized, there
will be a 3 second delay before Economized Operation
is allowed
4. Compressor Start
Before a compressor startup the system will be
transitioned to Bypass Mode. The system will remain in
Bypass Mode until a calculated time has expired and the
compressor suction modulating valve (CSMV) has
opened to a predetermined position.
5. Compression Ratio
The microprocessor monitors compressor
operating pressures and calculates a compression
ratio. If, while operating in Economized Mode, the
calculated value exceeds 21:1, operation will transition
to Bypass Mode. Economized Mode will not resume
until the compression ratio has fallen to 19:1.
6. Pulldown Operation
If in Start/Stop Operation and all conditions for an
OFF cycle have been met except for setpoint, operation
will be transitioned to the Economized Mode to pull
down to setpoint and cycle off quicker.
S If in Continuous Operation with a setpoint in the
perishable range (above --12°C [+10.4°F]) and the High
Speed Pulldown Configuration is set to YES, operation
will be transitioned to the Economized Mode until
termination conditions have been met.
62-61753
 SECTION 5
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE
TECHNICIAN INTERFACE
CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
P/N 22-60661-00
Figure 5--1. Technicians Interface Connections
5.1 TECHNICIAN CONFIGURATION/ TEST
MODES (REMOVE JUMPER MODE)
The Technicians Configuration/Test Mode allows the
technician to change Configurations, test the unit
components and/or service the refrigeration system. To
place the microprocessor in the Technicians
Configuration/Test Mode using the technician interface
connector assembly (see Figure 5--1):
1 Place the SROS in the OFF position.
2 Locate the technician interface connector, remove
the protective plug to gain access to the wire termin-
als.
3. Plug in connector assembly.
4 Place the SROS in the START/RUN position. The
ALARM LED will come on, the setpoint will appear,
but the refrigerated compartment Temperature will
not, and “REMOVE JUMPER” will appear in the Mes-
sageCenter for 10 seconds. Remove the technician
interface connector assembly at this time. ↑ ↓ TO
SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will appear in the
MessageCenter for 10 seconds, or until either the UP
or DOWN ARROW keys are pressed.
5 Press the UP ARROW Key to scroll through the Menu
beginning at the top.
Press the DOWN ARROW Key to scroll through the
Menu beginning at the bottom.
6 Select the Mode you wish to access,
SConfiguration Mode
SComponent Test Mode
SService Mode
and press the = key. Information on these test modes
is provided in the following sub--paragraphs:
5.1.1 Configuration Mode
a. Enter the Technicians Configuration/Test mode (refer
to Section 5.1) and select CONFIGURATIONS.
When “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” ap-
pears in the MessageCenter:
5--1
b. Press the UP ARROW Key to scroll through the Con-
figuration list beginning at the top.
Press the DOWN ARROW Key to scroll through the
Configuration list beginning at the bottom.
c. To read through the Configuration list, continue to
press either the UP or DOWN ARROW keys. The list
is circular meaning that once the end is reached, it is
repeated from the beginning. Refer to Table 5--2 for
information on the settings and resultant micropro-
cessor actions.
d. To change one of the Configurations, bring the Con-
figuration to change into the MessageCenter, and
press “=”. ↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE” will
show in the MessageCenter for 10 seconds Then the
selected Configuration will flash, showing the current
value. Press the UP or DOWN ARROW Key to scroll
through the list of available selections for this Config-
uration.
e. Once a new value is showing in the MessageCenter,
press the = Key to save the selection. The Mes-
sageCenter will stop flashing. The new value is now in
memory.
f. Press the UP ARROW Key to continue to scroll
through the Configuration list.
5.1.2 Component Test Mode
WARNING
If the unit is in Standby Operation and
powered, voltage will be applied to high
voltage components (i.e. the fan motor con-
tactor) and those components will operate
(i.e. the fan blades will turn) when those
components are energized using compon-
ent test mode.
Component Test Mode allows the Technician to
energize individual circuits for 5 minutes at a time. The
engine is not allowed to start when the Micro is in
Component Test Mode. To enter the Component Test
Mode:
a. Enter the Technicians Configuration/Test Mode (refer
to Section 5.1) and select COMPONENT TEST
MODE. When “↑ ↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SE-
LECT” appears in the MessageCenter:
b. Press the UP ARROW Key to scroll through the com-
ponent list beginning at the top.
Press the DOWN ARROW Key to scroll through the
component list beginning at the bottom.
c. Press = to select the component you wish to test. For
example, if Buzzer is selected, the buzzer will come
on, and “BUZZER OFF IN 5 MINUTES” will appear in
the MessageCenter. The minutes will count down to 0
at which time the buzzer circuit will be de-energized,
and the MessageCenter will display the last compo-
nent tested.
62--61753
 Should you need more than 5 minutes, the timer may
be reset to 5 minutes anytime during the test by
pressing the “=” key. The timer may only be reset
once during each test. After the 5 minute timer ex-
pires, the MessageCenter will return to the Compo-
nent Test Mode Menu, and display the last compo-
nent tested.
To retest the same component and circuit again,
press the “=” key. Press the UP or DOWN Arrow key
to select another component.
To stop component testing at any time, place the
Table 5--1. Component Test
Start/Run--Off Switch in the Off position, or press and
hold the “=” key for 6 seconds.
To go to Diagnostic Mode or Configuration Mode, select
Main Menu and press the “=” key.
The only keys that operate during Component Test
Mode are the Alarm and Select keys. The alarm list is
available for review of any active or inactive alarms. The
Select key will only allow access to the Current Draw
item in the Data List.
The following components may be tested during the
Component Test Mode:

Component / Menu List MessageCenter FET Board

LED
Defrost Light DEFROST LIGHT OFF IN X MINS 16
Auto Restart Light ARL LIGHT OFF IN X MINS 7
Fault Light FAULT LIGHT OFF IN X MINS. 14
Bypass (Unloader) Solenoid Valve (USV) BYPASS VALVE OFF IN X MINS 23
Economizer Solenoid Valve (ESV) ECONOMIZER VALVE OFF IN X MINS 22
Liquid Injection Valve (LIV) LIV OFF IN X MINS 17
Speed Relay (SR) SR OFF IN X MINS 27
Run Relay (RR) RR OFF IN X MINS 28
Buzzer (B) BUZZER OFF IN X MINS 18
Glow Plug Relay (GPR) GPR OFF IN X MINS 30
Heater Contactor 1 Relay (HTCON1R) HEATER CONT 1 OFF IN 5 MINS 10
Heater Contactor 2 (HTCON2) HEATER CONT 2 OFF IN 5 MINS 21
Evaporator Motor Contactor (EVCON) EVAPORATOR CONT 1 OFF IN 5 MIN 20
Power Supply Contactor Relay (PSCONR) POWER SUPPLY CONT OFF IN X MIN 19
Compressor Motor Contactor Relay (CCONR) COMPRESSOR CONT OFF IN X MINS 2
Condenser Motor Contactor (CDCON) CONDENSER CONT OFF IN X MINS 1
Generator Contactor Relay (GENCONR) GENERATOR CONT OFF IN 5 MINS 3
Main Menu ( Press = to go back to the the Tech-
nician Configuration/Test Mode selection menu.
Press the down or up arrow to continue scrolling
the component test list.)

62-61753 5--2
5.1.3 Service Mode
CAUTION
Service Mode MUST be used whenever re-
moving refrigerant charge, refrigerant leak
checking or evacuating.
NOTE
The Start/Run--Off switch (SROS) MUST be in
the START/RUN position to keep unit in Service
Mode. If the switch is placed in the OFF posi-
tion, the unit exits Service Mode and closes the
Compressor Suction Modulating Valve (CSMV)
and Evaporator Expansion Valve (EXV) to 0%
open and de-energizes the Economizer Solen-
oid Valve (ESV).
To enter Service Mode:
a. Enter the Technicians Configuration/Test Mode (refer
to Section 5.1) and select SERVICE MODE.
b. ENTERING SERVICE MODE will appear in the Mes-
sageCenter.
When entering Service Mode the microprocessor opens
the CSMV and EXV to 100% open and energizes ESV.
c. Once the valves are open, “RECOVER / LEAK CHK /
EVAC MODE” is displayed in the MessageCenter.
5--3
d. Refrigerant recovery, leak checking, or evacuation
may be performed on the unit at this time. Refer to
Service Procedures in Section 8.5.
e. The unit should remain in the RECOVER / LEAK CHK
/ EVAC MODE as these service procedures are per-
formed. If the unit shifts to Charge Mode and
“CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed in
the MessageCenter, DO NOT perform refrigerant re-
covery, leak checking, or evacuation. Exit Service
Mode and then re-enter, making sure that “RE-
COVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE” is displayed in
the MessageCenter before continuing any of these
service procedures.
f. The microprocessor will monitor the pressure trans-
ducer readings during evacuation. Once all pressure
transducers (CDP, CSP and EVOP) have dropped
below 0.68 Bar (–20 inhg) and then 2 of the 3 pressure
transducers rise above 0.34 Bar (5 PSIG ), the micro-
processor will close the CSMV and EXV to 0% open
and de-energize ESV. When the valves are closed,
“CHARGE MODE – HOLD = TO EXIT” is displayed in
the MessageCenter. This action is taken to prevent
refrigerant migration to the compressor during charg-
ing,
g. To exit Service Mode at any time, press and hold the =
key for 3 seconds. “EXITING SERVICE MODE” will
then appear in the MessageCenter.
When exiting Service Mode the microprocessor closes
the CSMV and EXV to 0% open and de-energizes ESV.
62--61753
5.2 DOWNLOADING DATA WITH THE PC CARD

1 Place the Stop/Run -- Off Switch (SROS) switch in the

Start/Run Position.

2. Insert a Download Card into the PC card slot on

the front of the microprocessor. Be certain that
the instruction label is facing the “Caution” la-
CAUTION bel. Do not force card into slot.
3. The MessageCenter will display “COPYING
DATA--PLEASE WAIT”. While the data is being
copied, the green PC CARD STATUS LED will
flash.
4. When the copy is complete, “COPY
COMPLETE, REMOVE CARD X” (“X” is the
number of empty spaces remaining on the card)
will show in the MessageCenter. The PC Card
Status LED will be solid. The PC card may then
be removed. Do not remove the card until
prompted to do so.
5. When the card is removed, the MessageCenter
will return to the default message.
6. If any other messages appear, refer to Section 6.1
MessageCenter for an explanation of the error
message. If there is an error, the PC CARD FAULT
LED will be on until the card is removed.
7. Data must be uploaded off of the Download Card
onto a computer drive, using ReeferManager, before
it can be viewed.

HEAT COOL DEFROST ALARM START-STOP CONTINUOUS

-20 +36F 2
SETPOINT BOX TEMPERATURE
COPYING DATA--PLEASE WAIT

MANUAL ALARM LIST START-- STOP/ SELECT

DEFROST CONTINUOUS

62-61753 5--4
5.3 INSTALLING NEW SOFTWARE USING A PC Card
5.3.1 Procedure
TIP
Whenever performing a major operation to a microprocessor, such as installing new operating software, it is
always a good idea to start the unit and give it a quick check over prior to performing the operation.
NOTE
Once the unit shuts down to begin the software install process, the Compressor Suction Modulation Valve
closing process begins. The software installation processes will not begin until the CSMV is completely
closed, which will delay the actual process for about 45 seconds.

CAUTION
The display and MessageCenter may behave differently during the software loading process, de-
pending on the version of software currently in the controller. DO NOT INTERRUPT THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLATION PROCESS ONCE IT HAS STARTED.
1. Place the Stop/Run -- Off Switch (SROS) switch in the
Start/Run Position.
2. Insert a Download Card into the PC card slot on the
CAUTION front of the microprocessor. Be certain that the
instruction label on Download Card is facing the
“Caution” label on the microprocessor. Do not force
card into slot.
3. The MessageCenter will show one of 3 different
messages:
Same SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
Old SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
New SW: “= to Load, ↑ To Cancel”
4. Choose New.
5. Press = to load the program. The MessageCenter will go blank. If the engine is running, it will
shut down. After a few seconds, the display will power up, and the MessageCenter will show
INSTALLING PROGRAM SOFTWARE during the software install process. The Card Status
LED adjacent to the PC Card slot will blink together with the Micro Status LED during this
installation process. Once the entire program has been loaded, the MessageCenter will show
INSTALL COMPLETE -- REMOVE CARD. At the same time, the Card Status LED will stop
blinking and be on solid, indicating that the software install is complete.
6. When the card is removed, the Micro will power up. Allow the Micro to completely power up
(Main Display and MessageCenter displaying appropriate messages) once after installing the
new software before turning the power off. DO NOT PLACE THE SROS IN THE OFF POSITION
DURING THIS INITIAL POWER UP FOLLOWING A SOFTWARE UPGRADE.

5.3.2 Troubleshooting Loading Problems
If after loading the software program, the
microprocessor does not power up, or the engine does
not start, use the following to isolate the problem.
a. Did the unit perform properly prior to loading the soft-
ware? If not, the problem most likely is not a result of
the software loading process.
b. Check the Micro Status LED near the PC Card slot on
the microprocessor. It should be blinking continuous-
ly at the rate of 1 second on and 1 second off. This is
the “normal” heartbeat rate of the microprocessor.
c. If the Micro Status LED is blinking at the rate of .5
second on and .5 second off, the microprocessor is
still in Program Mode, and the software is not fully
loaded into memory. Load the software again, being
careful to follow each step completely in sequence.
d. If the Micro Status LED is not on at all, check for
ground at microprocessor terminal MPQC2 and for
12 volts from the Start/Run--Off switch at 5MP1. If
voltage and ground check OK, the microprocessor
may require replacement.

5--5 62--61753
5.4 LogiCOLD MICROPROCESSOR REPLACE-
MENT & CONFIGURATION SETUP
When field diagnosis of a Carrier Transicold Trailer
refrigeration unit determines that a LogiCold
Microprocessor is not performing properly and must be
replaced, the following steps MUST be taken to ensure
correct operation of the unit following the repair.
Prior to beginning work on the unit, ensure that the
current Configuration file has been procured the
customer and written onto a Configuration PC Card,
using the ReeferManager Program. If the original
microprocessor was equipped with the IntelliSet option,
this file will also need to be on a Configuration Card in
order to install the IntelliSet parameters into the
replacement microprocessor. A computer is needed to
enter the engine and switch on hours into the new
microprocessor.
5.4.1 Microprocessor Replacement
a. If possible, power the microprocessor up, either us-
ing a PC Mode Jumper, or by placing the Start/Run --
OFF Switch (SROS) in the Run position. If the micro-
processor will not power up, skip ahead to stepd.
b. Insert a Download PC Card into the PC Card slot and
download all data from the Data Recorder. If a Down-
load Card is not available, data may also be down-
loaded using a download cable and the ReeferMa-
nager and Reports Program.
c. Then, scroll through the Data List and make note of
the following from the MessageCenter:
S ID Number
S Unit Serial Number
S Unit Model Number
S Engine Protect Hours
S Engine Sleep Hours
S Switch On Protect Hours
S Switch On Sleep Hours
S Switch On Standby Hours
S Compressor Run
S High Speed Hours
S Date and Time
d. Remove PC Jumper. download cable and turn
SROS to Off.
e. Remove negative battery cable from battery.
f. Remove Connectors 1MP, 2MP, & 3MP from the out-
side of the Control Box.
g. Open Keypad side door. Open control box door.
h. Remove Connectors 5MP & 6MP inside the Control
Box. Remove all wires from the Micro.
i. Locate wire to 80A fuse that runs through the Current
Sensor. Note the orientation of the wire through the
Current Sensor, to be certain that the wire is rein-
62-61753
stalled through the new Current Sensor in the same
direction. (Inserting the wire through the Current
Sensor in the opposite direction will result in erro-
neous current readings.) Remove wire from fuse
holder and gently pull through the Current Sensor.
j. Remove the screws holding the sides of the Micro
into the Control Box. Remove the single screw hold-
ing the top of the Micro in place.
k. Pull the Micro back, and twist out of the Control Box.
l. Install the new Micro by reversing steps a. thru k.
5.4.2 Microprocessor Setup
NOTE
Before starting the unit, the microprocessor
must be configured for the model unit it is
installed in. Refer to Microprocessor Setup in-
formation below.
a. Ensure that the new microprocessor is in place, all
wires connected and the negative battery cable is re-
connected.
b. Place the SROS in the START/RUN position. The
controller will immediately go into the Configuration
Mode so that the correct model number can be se-
lected. Using the Up or Down Arrow Keys, scroll
through the list until the correct Model Number ap-
pears (verify the Model / Serial Plate on the unit).
Press the = Key to enter the new model number.
c. Press the Up Arrow Key again, and the Unit Serial
Number field will appear. Press the = Key, then the
Up Arrow Key. You will see a blinking cursor in the
field. Now, using the Up or Down Arrow Keys, scroll
through the Number / Letter list, until the first letter of
the serial number appears. Press the = Key to enter
that letter, and advance the cursor to the next place.
Repeat this process until the entire Unit Serial Num-
ber is entered (i.e. MDP90512345).
d. Press the Up Arrow Key again, and the ID field will
appear. Press the = Key, then the Up Arrow Key. You
will see a blinking cursor in the field. Using the Up or
Down Arrow Keys, scroll through the Number / Letter
list, until the first letter / number of the required ID ap-
pears. Press the = Key to enter that number / letter,
and advance the cursor to the next place. Repeat
this process until the entire ID number is entered. If
the cursor is still blinking in a blank space after you
are finished, slowly (wait 2--3 seconds between
presses) press the = Key to leave blanks in the re-
maining spaces. When you reach the end, the mes-
sage “↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT” will
appear (i.e. XYZ5678).
e. Now, press the Down Arrow Key until SET TIME ap-
pears. Press the = Key then the Up Arrow Key to en-
ter that menu.
NOTE
Be certain that the clock you are using is accur-
ate. Also, some customers are located in differ-
ent time zones from the repair location. If you
know the customers desired time, enter that
time. If you don’t, enter your current time.
f. When MONTH appears, press the = Key, then the
Up Arrow Key. The MessageCenter will begin to
5--6
 flash, indicating that it is ready to accept changes.
Use the Up or Down Arrow Keys to scroll through the
number list until the correct number of the current
month appears. Press the = Key to enter that num-
ber for the month.
g. Now, press the Up Arrow Key to go to Day.
h. Using the same key presses as in f. and g. above,
continue to enter the correct numerical value for the
Day, Year, Hour and Minute.
i. When you are finished, the MessageCenter will
show PRESS = TO SAVE TIME CHANGES.
NOTE
If you do not press the = Key, the time changes
will not be saved.
j. Press the Up Arrow key again, and SET NEW
HOURS appears. Press the = key then the Up Arrow
key to enter that menu.
k. The first hour meter is Engine Protect Hours. Press
the = key to select this meter. The cursor will be blink-
ing on the ten-thousands place. Press the Up or
Down Arrow key to select the correct value, then
press the = key. If the correct number in any of the
locations is 0 (zero), just press the = key to enter 0 as
the value and move the cursor to the next place. For
example, if you are entering 567 hours, you will press
the = key twice to leave a 0 for the first two numbers,
then use the Up and Down Arrow keys to scroll
through the numbers to enter the correct hours.
When the correct hours for Engine Protect Hours has
been entered, press the = key to advance to the next
hour meter. If an invalid number is entered, a warning
message will flash in the MessageCenter. For exam-
ple, you can not enter a higher number of hours for
Engine Protect than the number of Switch On Hours.
NOTE
None of the “Total” hour meters are listed.
When the hours for all the hour meters are en-
tered, the micro will add the correct hours to-
gether and calculate the Total Engine Hours,
and Total Switch On Hours. When the end of the
list is reached PRESS = TO SAVE HOURS will
be displayed. Pressing the = key will save the
hours, and return you to the Configuration list.
If you do not press the = key, none of the time
hours or cycles you just entered will be saved.
Hour meters may be changed for 60 minutes
following the initial hour entry. If an error has
been made, be certain to correct it within the 60
minute time period. Following that time, the
hour meters will count the appropriate hours
because the unit switch is on and the unit is op-
erating, and no further manual changes will be
allowed.
5--7
l. Now, press the Down Arrow key until SET TIME ap-
pears. Press the = key then the Up Arrow key to enter
that menu.
NOTE
The basic Configurations and Functional Para-
meters may be set using the keypad. If Intel-
liSets or changes to the Data Recorder are to be
programmed, those changes require the use of
ReeferManager and PC Cards. Refer to manu-
al 62--10889 User’s Guide For ReeferManager
and Reports for complete instructions.
If the Configurations and Functional Parame-
ters will be set from the keypad, continue with
following Sections 5.4.3 and 5.4.4. Following
programming using the keypad or ReeferMan-
ager and Reports, continue with Section 5.4.5 --
Microprocessor Final Checkout.
5.4.3 Configurations Via Keypad
a. Refer to Table 5--2 for information on the Configura-
tion settings and resultant microprocessor actions.
NOTE
Units equipped with IntelliSet MUST have the
settings installed using ReeferManager.
IntelliSet settings CANNOT be installed using
the Keypad.
b. Press an Arrow Key to go to the next Configuration.
Compare the setting already in the micro with the
setting required.
c. When a setting needs to be changed, first press the
= Key. This allows the setting to be changed.
d. Press the Up or Down Arrow Keys to scroll through
the selections for that Configuration.
e. When the desired setting is visible in the
MessageCenter, press the = Key.
f. Repeat steps b. thru e. until all Configurations have
been reviewed and changed as required.
5.4.4 Functional Parameters Via Keypad
a. Refer to Table 3--2 for information on the Micropro-
cessor Functional Parameters settings and resultant
microprocessor actions.
b. Press the Select Key, until PRESS ↑ ↓ TO VIEW
SETTINGS appears in the MessageCenter
c. Pressing the Up Arrow Key will bring ↑ ↓ TO
SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT into the
MessageCenter.
d. Press the Up Arrow Key to go to the first Functional
Parameter. The MessageCenter will display
DEFROST TIMER SET FOR X HRS.
e. To keep this setting and go to the next setting, press
the Up Arrow Key.
f. To change the parameter, press the = Key.
↑ ↓TO SCROLL, = TO SAVE will show in the
MessageCenter.
g. Press the Up Arrow Key and the parameter will be
flashing on and off, indicating that changes are pos-
sible.
62--61753
h. Press the Up Arrow Key to scroll through the avail- b. While the unit is running, scroll through the Data List
able selections for the parameter. When the setting of the microprocessor. Verify that all the data that
you desire appears, press the = Key to enter and was recorded in Step b. of Section 5.4.1 is now accu-
save your selection. rately displayed in the Data List. Also, verify that the
correct date and time is being displayed.
i. Repeat steps e. thru h. and continue through the en-
tire list of Functional Parameters.
c. Initiate a Pretrip test. Allow the unit to complete the
5.4.5 Microprocessor Final Checkout Pretrip and check for any alarms. Make any neces-
a. Start the unit and allow it to run for a few minutes. sary repairs before returning the unit into service.
Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

SHORT Indicates to the controller which engine is in the
LONG system
INTAKE HEATER LONG = Glow Plug equipped and longer glow times
are used (TV engines)
GLOW TIME SHORT= Glow Plug equipped and shorter glow
times are used (DI engines)
INTAKE HEATER = Intake Heater equipped (Tier 4
engines).
NOTE: Refer to Table 4-1 for glow time table.
YES / NO YES = Functional Parameters cannot be changed
using the keypad.
PARAMETERS LOCKOUT: NO = Functional Parameters can be changed using
the keypad, unless individually locked out by Reefer
Manager.
YES / NO YES = When alarm 39 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the engine will shut down.
RPM ALARM SHUTDOWN:
NO = When alarm 39 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the engine will continue to run.
YES / NO YES = When alarm 18 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will shut down.
LOW PRESSURE SHUTDOWN
NO = When alarm 18 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
(0 -- 255 seconds If the Low Pressure Shutdown Configuration is set
in 1 second incre- to YES, shutdown is to be delayed for this amount
ments) of time after the Low Pressure Shutdown signal is
SLOW PRESSURE SHUTDOWN 10 SECS received.
DELAY USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT
SETTING.
YES / NO YES = When alarm 27 is active the alarm light will
HIGH SUCTION PRESS SHUT- illuminate and the unit will shut down.
DOWN NO = When alarm 27 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
30 PSIG (2.0 BAR)
Pressure to maintain if discharge pressure trans-
0 -- 50 psig (0 to ducer is opened or shorted.
SUCTION PRESSURE 3.4 bar)
[in 1 psig (0.1 bar)
increments]
YES / NO YES = When alarm 28 is active the alarm light will
REFRIGERATION SYSTEM illuminate and the unit will shut down.
SHUTDOWN NO = When alarm 28 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
7.0A In Start/Stop Operation the alternator charging cur-
rent must drop below this value before the unit is
CURRENT FOR S/S SHUTOFF 1A TO 10A allowed to shut down.
(in 0.5A incre-
ments)

62-61753 5--8
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

12.2V The engine will restart from a Start/Stop Off cycle
12.0 TO 12.8V or a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the battery drops
to this value.
VOLTAGE FOR START/STOP RE- A lower selection may result in a longer off cycle
START (based on battery voltage) and possibly overall
shorter battery life. A higher selection may result in
a shorter off cycle (based on battery voltage) and
possibly overall longer battery life.
0°C (32°F) The engine will restart from a Start/Stop Off cycle
ENGINE TEMPERATURE FOR or a Sleep Mode Off cycle when the engine coolant
RESTART --12.2°C to 0°C
(10°F to 32°F) temperature drops to this value.
YES / NO YES = When alarm 51 is active the alarm light will
ALTERNATOR CHECK illuminate and the unit will shut down.
SHUTDOWN: NO = When alarm 51 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SWITCH YES / NO YES = An Engine Oil Level Switch is installed.
NO = An Engine Oil Level Switch is not installed.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SHUTDOWN YES / NO YES = When alarm 2 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will shut down.
NO = When alarm 2 is active the alarm light will
illuminate and the unit will continue to run.
LOW COOLANT LEVEL YES / NO YES = A Coolant Level Sensor is installed.
NO = A Coolant Level Sensor is not installed..
NO DEVICE NOT INSTALLED = There is no Fuel Level Sensor
DISCREET INPUT installed in the fuel tank.
(SWITCH) DISCREET INPUT = A Low Fuel Level Switch is
0--5 VDC installed in the fuel tank.
FUEL SENSOR 0--5 VDC = A Low Fuel Level Sensor with a 0 to 5
0.25--4.75 VDC
VDC signal range is installed in the fuel tank.
0.25--4.75 VDC = A Low Fuel Level Sensor with a
0.25--4.75 VDC signal range is installed in the fuel
tank.
OFF OFF = No fuel tank installed
114 Liters 30 to 120 GALLON = Size fo fuel tank installed.
(30 Gallons)
(Refer to Fuel Sensor Configuration for additional in-
190 Liters formation)
(50 Gallons)
FUEL TANK SIZE 248 Liters
(75 Gallons)
379 Liters
(100 Gallons)
454 Liters
(120 Gallons)
26A Indicates to the controller the maximum allowable
10 TO 35 amperage in Diesel operation.
DIESEL MAXIMUM GENERATOR in 0.5A increments
AMPS USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT
SETTING.
22A Indicates to the controller the maximum allowable
10 TO 35 amperage in Standby operation.
STANDBY MAXIMUM in 0.5A increments
GENERATOR AMPS USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT
SETTING.

5--9 62--61753
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

17A Indicates to the controller the maximum allowable
10 TO 35 amperage during start up.
STARTUP MAXIMUM in 0.5A increments
GENERATOR AMPS USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT
SETTING.
4.0A Indicates to the controller the maximum allowable
0 TO 10 amperage in low speed operation.
DIESEL OFFSET MAXIMUM AMPS in 0.5A increments USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT
SETTING.
OFF Indicates to the controller the delay for this unit
5 Seconds when starting in standby.
10 Seconds This setting is used when multiple units are on the
STANDBY STARTUP DELAY 15 Seconds same line to stagger the occurrence of high inrush
20 Seconds current in situations such as restart after a power
loss.
YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence and will be in hour
meter menu.
DISPLAY TOTAL ENGINE HR
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during
the startup messaging sequence and will be shown
with the “other meters and counters”.
YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence and will be in hour
meter menu.
DISPLAY STANDBY RUN HR
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during
the startup messaging sequence and will be shown
with the “other meters and counters”.
YES / NO YES = This hour meter will be displayed during the
startup messaging sequence and will be in hour
meter menu.
DISPLAY TOTAL SWITCH ON HR
NO = This hour meter will not be displayed during
the startup messaging sequence and will be shown
with the “other meters and counters”.
0 When the meter is reset, the value selected here
DIESEL RESET VALUE 50 TO 30,000 will be added to the to the present meter reading to
(Refer to Section 8.2 for oil/filter hours in 50 hour in- indicate to the controller when the next service in-
change intervals.) crements terval alarm will be triggered. If the value entered is
“0” the alarm feature is turned off.
0 When the meter is reset, the value selected here
50 TO 30,000 will be added to the to the present meter reading to
STANDBY RESET VALUE hours in 50 hour in- indicate to the controller when the next service in-
crements terval alarm will be triggered. If the value entered is
“0” the alarm feature is turned off.
OFF When the meter is reset, the value selected here
50 TO 30,000 will be added to the to the present meter reading to
SWITCH ON RESET VALUE hours in 50 hour in- indicate to the controller when the next service in-
crements terval alarm will be triggered. If the value entered is
“0” the alarm feature is turned off.

62-61753 5--10
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

PM HOUR METER #1 (or 2 or 3 or OFF OFF = The PM Maintenance Hour Meter is turned
4 or 5) CONFIGURATION ENGINE HOURS off.
SWITCH ON ENGINE HOURS = PM Meter will monitor the num-
HOURS ber of hours the engine has operated since the last
reset.
STANDBY HOURS
SWITCH ON HOURS = PM Meter will monitor the
START CYCLES number of hours the unit has been switched on
HIGH SPEED since the last reset.
HOURS STANDBY HOURS = PM Meter will monitor the
number of hours the unit has operated in standby
since the last reset.
START CYCLES = PM Meter will monitor the num-
ber of times the unit has started since the last reset
HIGH SPEED HOURS = PM Meter will monitor the
number of hours the engine has operated in high
speed since the last reset.
S PM HOUR METER #1 (or 2 or 3 ENGINE HOURS The value to be entered here is the desired number
or 4 or 5) RESET INTERVAL 0 or of hours or cycles between PM Maintenance
50 TO 30,000 Alarms for this meter.
Notes: hours in 50 hour in- When the meter is reset, the value selected here
crements will be added to the to the present meter reading to
1. This Configuration will not dis-
play for those meters that are con- SWITCH ON indicate to the controller when the next service in-
figured OFF. HOURS terval alarm will be triggered.
0 or
2. If the value entered is “0” the 50 TO 30,000
meter will still count hours or hours in 50 hour in-
cycles as as configured but the crements
alarm feature for that meter is
turned off.
STANDBY HOURS
0 or
50 TO hours in 50
hour increments in-
crements
START CYCLES 0
or
1,000 TO 90,000
CYCLES in 1,000
cycle increments
HIGH SPEED
HOURS
0 or
50 TO 30,000
hours in 50 hour in-
crements
OFF OFF = If both Range Locks are OFF, the unit will
START--STOP operate normally.
If either Range 1 or Range 2 is not OFF, the unit
CONTINUOUS will operate as selected whenever the setpoint is
RANGE 1 LOCK within that range
OR START--STOP = The unit will always operate in
Start--Stop whenever the setpoint is between the
RANGE 2 LOCK minimum & maximum temperatures for that range
(Applies to Compartment 1 only) (see below).
CONTINUOUS = The unit will always operate in
Continuous Run whenever the setpoint is between
the minimum & maximum temperatures for that
range (see the following sub--configurations).

5--11 62--61753
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

--30°C to 32°C Select the lowest temperature desired for this
• RANGE 1 (or 2) MINIMUM (--22°F TO 89.6°F) Range.
TEMPERATURE in 0.1°F or °C in-
crements
--30°C to 32°C Select the highest temperature desired for this
• RANGE 1 (or 2) MAXIMUM (--22°F TO 89.6°F ) range.
TEMPERATURE in 0.1°F or °C in-
crements
--30°C to 30°C Indicates to the controller the desired minimum al-
(--22°F TO 89.6°F) lowable set point .
MINIMUM SETPOINT in 0.1°F or C incre-
ments
--30°C to 32°C Indicates to the controller the desired maximum
(--22°F TO 89.6°F) allowable set point.
MAXIMUM SETPOINT in 0.1°F or °C in-
crements
ALARM & ALARM & SHUTDOWN = If standby power is lost
SHUTDOWN unit is to shut down
NO AC POWER
SWITCH TO EN- SWITCH TO ENGINE = If standby power is lost
GINE diesel engine will be started.
SEPARATE TOGETHER = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
TOGETHER mum Off Time, Maximum Off Time, and Override
Temperatures are set in the Functional Parameter
List, the same values will be used for both Frozen
and Perishable setpoints.
S/S PARAMETERS
SEPARATE = When the Minimum Run Time, Mini-
mum Off Time, Maximum Off Time, and Override
Temperatures are set in the Functional Parameter
List, different values may be entered for Perishable
and Frozen setpoints.
REMOTE TEMP SENSOR 1 (or 2 or ON / OFF ON = A remote sensor has been added to the unit,
3) and connected into the wire harness at Remote
Temp Sensor (1 or 2) plug.
OFF = There is no Remote Sensor (1or 2) in this
unit.
SWITCH NOT SWITCH NOT INSTALLED = There is no door
INSTALLED switch.
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH OPEN = A Door Switch has
SWITCH OPEN been installed. The switch contacts will be OPEN
DOOR SWITCH whenever the door is OPEN.
DOOR OPEN
SWITCH CLOSED DOOR OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = A Door Switch
has been installed. The switch contacts will be
CLOSED whenever the door is OPEN.
ALARM ONLY ALARM ONLY = When Door Switch indicates that
UNIT SHUTDOWN the door is open, a warning alarm will be displayed
in the MessageCenter.
LOW ENGINE
SPEED UNIT SHUTDOWN = When Door Switch indicates
that the door is open, a warning alarm will be dis-
DATA RECORDER played in the MessageCenter, and the unit will shut-
ONLY down.
• DOOR SWITCH UNIT SHUT- LOW ENGINE SPEED = When Door Switch indi-
DOWN cates that the door is open, the engine will be
forced to low speed.
DATA RECORDER ONLY = The Data Recorder will
record every time the door is opened or closed.
There will be no alarms or messages displayed in
the MessageCenter.

62-61753 5--12
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

REMOTE SWITCH 1 (or 2)
This Configuration indicates to the
microprocessor that a remote switch
has not, or has, been installed and, in
installed, what type of switch it is. The
action taken by the microprocessor
will be in accordance with the
following “Shutdown” Configuration
setting.
• REMOTE SWITCH 1 (or 2)
SHUTDOWN
This Configuration indicates to the unit.
controller what action is to be taken if
the switch is activated
• • UNIT SHUTDOWN BELOW
(temperature)
• • RUN LOW SPEED BELOW
(temperature)
SET TIME
• MONTH
• DAY
• YEAR
• HOURS
• MINUTES
NATURAL DEFROST
SWITCH NOT Switch not installed = There is no remote 1 (or 2)
INSTALLED switch.
DOOR OPEN DOOR OPEN SWITCH OPEN = A Remote Door
SWITCH OPEN Switch 1 (or 2) has been installed. The switch con-
tacts will be OPEN whenever the door is OPEN.
DOOR OPEN
SWITCH CLOSED DOOR OPEN SWITCH CLOSED = A Remote Door
SWITCH ON Switch 1 (or 2) has been installed. The switch con-
CONTACTS OPEN tacts will be CLOSED whenever the door is
CLOSED.
SWITCH ON
CONTACTS SWITCH ON CONTACTS OPEN = A Remote
CLOSED Switch 1 (or 2) has been installed. The switch is to
be considered “ON” when the contacts open.
SWITCH ON CONTACTS CLOSED = A Remote
Switch 1 (or 2) has been installed. The switch is to
be considered “ON” when the contacts close.
Remote Switch 1 REMOTE SWITCH 1 (or 2) ALARM WILL NOT
(or 2) alarm will SHUTDOWN THE UNIT = When the switch is ac-
not shutdown the tivated an alarm will be generated but the unit will
not shutdown.
Remote Switch 1 REMOTE SWITCH 1 (or 2) ALARM WILL
(or 2) alarm will SHUTDOWN THE UNIT = When the switch is ac-
shutdown the unit. tivated an alarm will be generated and the unit will
Data Recorder be shutdown.
Only DATA RECORDER ONLY = When the switch is
Low Engine Speed activated an alarm will not be generated but an
event will be recorded.
LOW ENGINE SPEED = When the switch is activ-
ated the engine will operate in low speed.
OFF If Door Switch= Unit Shutdown is selected:
120 to --20°F (49 to OFF = the unit will shutdown at any ambient tem-
--29°C) perature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the
entered value, shut down will be allowed. (When
ambient temperature is above the entered value,
the unit will not shutdown.)
OFF If Door Switch= Low Engine Speed is selected:
120 to --20°F (49 to OFF = the unit will transition to low speed at any
--29°C) ambient temperature.
Value = when ambient temperature is below the
entered value, transition to low speed will be al-
lowed. (When ambient temperature is above the
entered value, the unit will not transition to low
speed.)
Indicates to the controller the time and date for the Data Recorder Real
Time Clock .
1--12 Select the correct month of the year.
1--31 Select the correct day of the month.
1998 -- 2037 Select the correct year.
0--23 Select the correct hour (0--11 is AM / 12--23 is PM)
0--59 Select the correct minute.
YES / NO YES = Natural defrost will be allowed
NO = Natural defrost will not be allowed

5--13 62--61753
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued
CONFIGURATION
8 HOURS ADDITIONAL DATA:
DECIMAL DISPLAYED
CONDENSER PRESS CONTROL
HIGH SPEED DELAY
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION
UNIT OPERATION
SUPPLY AIR LIMIT FOR S/S
SUPPLY AIR LIMIT FOR
CONTINUOUS
HIGH SPEED PULLDOWN
UNIT MODEL NUMBER #
UNIT SERIAL NUMBER #
TRAILER ID #
62-61753
SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
YES / NO YES = When the SROS is turned OFF, the Data
Recorder will continue to record data for an addi-
tional 8 hours.
NO = When the SROS is turned OFF, the data
Data Recorder will stop recording data.
YES/NO YES -- Indicates to the microprocessor that the set
point is to be displayed in tenths of a degree.
NO -- Indicates to the microprocessor that the set
point is to be displayed in whole numbers.
NO/YES Not supported for Vector MULTI--TEMP at this time
USE FACTORY DEFAULT SETTING ONLY, DO
NOT OPERATE UNIT WITH DIFFERENT SETTING.
1 Minute
0 TO 10 MINUTES Select the length of time unit remains in low speed
IN 0.5 MINUTE IN- before transitioning to high speed.
CREMENTS
Other This feature is not supported for the Vector 1550
model at this time.
Qualcom
STANDARD STANDARD = The microprocessor is set to control
RAIL trailer refrigeration operation.
RAIL = Not recommended for Vector MT
--12° to + 0°C Value to be used to calculate the lowest allowable
(--21.6° to 0° F ) supply air temperature, when in Start/Stop Opera-
(in 0.5°F or °C in- tion, in accordance with the formula “Set Point +
crements) this value = coldest allowable supply air temperat-
ure“. For example, if the set point is 2°C and the
DEFAULT: --6°C
(--10.8°F) Configuration value is set at --6°C the calculation is
2 + (--6) = --4°C lowest allowed supply air temperat-
ure.
--12° to + 0°C Value to be used to calculate the lowest allowable
(--21.6° to 0° F ) supply air temperature, when in Continuous Opera-
(in 0.5°F or °C in- tion, in accordance with the formula “Set Point +
crements) this value = coldest allowable supply air temperat-
DEFAULT: --5°C ure“. For example, if the set point is 2°C and the
(--9.0°F) Configuration value is set at --6°C the calculation is
2 + (--6) = --4°C°C lowest allowed supply air tem-
perature.
YES / NO When active, this logic indicates if temperature lim-
its regulating the exit of pulldown mode are modi-
fied or not.
YES = Requires the unit to remain in pulldown until
the control temperature is +/-- 0.2 °C (+/-- 0.36 °F)
of setpoint
NO = Normal unit operation.
Unit Family types, Indicates to the controller the model number of the
and then configur- unit. Scroll to the Vector Family entries and select
able numbers the model number from the Model/Serial Number
nameplate.
The unit S/N may be entered. This may be up to 10
characters long. Numbers, Letters, and a space are
available by scrolling through the available list.
The ID # may be entered. This may be up to 10
characters long. Numbers, Letters, and a space are
available by scrolling through the available list.
5--14
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued

CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

YES / NO YES = When alarm AL11 has been triggered three
ENGINE COOLANT RESTART times in the last two hours of engine operation
VALUE AL21 (Technician Reset Required) will be triggered.
NO = AL21 will not be triggered.
YES / NO YES = When alarm AL12 has been triggered three
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE times in the last two hours of engine operation
RESTART VALUE AL21 (Technician Reset Required) will be triggered
NO = AL21 will not be triggered.

5--15 62--61753
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued
CONFIGURATION SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION

OPTIONAL CONFIGURATIONS
(The following Configurations will display if the option has been loaded.)
YES / NO YES = When the refrigerated compartment temper-
OUT OF RANGE SHUTDOWN ature has been out--of--range for 45 minutes, the
(This Configuration is an option, it alarm light will come on, and the unit will shut down.
will not display if the option is not in- NO = When the refrigerated compartment tempera-
stalled. Refer to Section 2.7.3 for ture has been out--of--range for 30 minutes, the
additional information.) alarm light will come on and the unit will continue to
run.
YES / NO If the “Compressor Alarm Shutdown” option has
COMPRESSOR ALARM been installed (refer to Unit Data List), this setting
SHUTDOWN will be available.
(This Configuration is an option, it YES = The unit will shutdown and not restart when
will not display if the option is not in- alarm 13, 17, 18, 27, 28 or 56 occur 3 times within
stalled.) 2 hours of continuous engine operation.
NO = Normal shutdown rules for above alarms.
This Configuration will display when a replacement microprocessor is
SET NEW HOURS installed It allows entry of the hours (from the existing microprocessor)
into replacement microprocessor.
PRODUCTSHIELD SETUP
Note: ProductShield is only available when IntelliSet is installed. If installed, the following Configuration setup
(•) will be available. If the Configuration setup is not set to OFF, the sub--configurations (••) will also be avail-
able.
• PRODUCTSHIELD ECONO OFF OFF = ProductShield Econo is OFF
GO TO S/S
GO TO CONT GO TO START/STOP = Allows unit to be set for
and operate in Continuous Run until ambient tem-
perature falls within a user--defined range when
unit will go to Start/Stop. This allows fuel savings
while offering Continuous Run operation protection
when ambient is outside range. Unit will return to
Continuous Run when ambient goes beyond range.
GO TO CONTINUOUS = Allows unit to be set for
and operate in Start/Stop until ambient temperature
falls outside a user--defined range when unit will go
to Continuous Run. This provides continuous air
flow and good product protection for extreme ambi-
ent temperatures. Unit will return to Start/Stop
when ambient comes back inside range.
The minimum range allowed for this selection is
5.5°C (10°F).This means that the MIN temperature
will never be closer to the MAX temperature than
5.5°C
--28.3°C to 48.3°C
(--19°F to 119°F)
in 0.5°F or °C Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
•• ECONO MINIMUM increments for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.6.3 for more
TEMPERATURE Default: 48.3°C information on Econo Min. Temp.
(119°F )
OFF
--28.3°C to 48.3°C Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
(--19°F to 119°F) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.6.3 for more
in 0.5°F or °C information on Econo Max. Temp.
•• ECONO MAXIMUM increments
TEMPERATURE Default: 48.3°C
(119°F )
OFF

62-61753 5--16
 Table 5--2. Microprocessor Configurations -- Continued
CONFIGURATION
PRODUCTSHIELD SETUP -- Continued
•• ECONO DELTA--T
• PRODUCTSHIELD HIGH AIR
•• HIGH AIR MINIMUM
TEMPERATURE
•• HIGH AIR MAXIMUM
TEMPERATURE
•• HIGH AIR DELTA--T
• PRODUCTSHIELD WINTER
INTELLISET HOT KEY ENABLE
SELECTIONS DESCRIPTION
OFF Select the desired Delta--T value for activation of
2°C to 15°C ProductShield Econo: Go To S/S
(3.6°F to 27.0°F)
in 0.5° C or °F in- This parameter is not available for Econo: Go To
crements Continuous Run
OFF OFF = The unit will operate normally in high and
ON low speeds.
ON = The unit will operate in high speed when the
ambient air temperature falls OUTSIDE the mini-
mum / maximum temperature range (selected set-
tings for HIGH AIR MIN TEMP, HIGH AIR MAX
TEMP, AND HIGH AIR DELTA--T -- see below)
--28.3°C to 48.3°C
(--19°F to 119°F)
in 0.5°F or °C Select the lower limit of the ambient range desired
increments for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.6.3 for more
Default: 48.3°C information on High Air Min. Temp.
(119°F )
OFF
--28.3°C to 48.3°C Select the upper limit of the ambient range desired
(--19°F to 119°F) for this parameter. Refer to Section 4.6.3 for more
in 0.5°F or °C information on Econo Max. Temp.
increments
Default: 48.3°C
(119°F )
OFF
OFF Select the desired Delta--T value for activation of
2°C to 15°C ProductShield High Air
(3.6°F to 27.0°F)
in 0.5° C or °F in-
crements
OFF Select the desired ambient temperature for activa-
--28.9°C to 0°C tion of installed ProductShield Winter. When ambi-
(--20°F to 32.0°F) ent temperature falls below this selected value, the
in 0.5° C or °F in- unit will run in Continuous Run only. Refer to Sec-
crements tion 4.6.3 for more information on ProductShield
Winter.
OFF YES = Indicates to the controller that the IntelliSet
ON menu is to be entered when the = key is pressed.
NO = Indicated to the controller that this feature is
disabled
5--17 62--61753
 SECTION 6
MESSAGECENTER
6.1 MessageCenter MESSAGES
The following table lists all of the messages which do not appear in other lists in this manual and a description of their
meaning. Refer to Table 3--1 for a list of Unit Data messages. Refer to Table 3--2 for a list of Functional Parameter
messages. Refer to Table 5--1 for a list of Component Test Messages Refer to Table 5--2 for a list of Configuration
messages. Refer to Section 5.1 for a list of Component Test messages. Refer to Section 7 for a list of Alarm messages.
MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message Description
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO LOCK This message is used when viewing Unit Data. Use the UP and
DOWN arrow keys to move through the Data list. Press the = key
to lock a Data item in the MessageCenter.
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SAVE Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through menu selec-
tions available in this mode. When you reach the desired selection,
press the = key to store new value in microprocessor’s memory.
↑↓ TO SCROLL, THEN = TO SELECT Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through menu selec-
tions available in this mode. When you reach the desired selection,
press the = key to select it.
= TO INSTALL, INSTALLS LEFT XX An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot. Press
the = key to install the option into the microprocessor. The number
of installs remaining on the PC Card will be shown.
ACTIVE This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the cur-
rent IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and none of its
settings have been modified.
ACTIVE ALARM LIST CLEARED The list of active alarms in the microprocessor has been erased.
(This does not remove alarms from the data recorder.)
ALL ALARMS CLEARED The list of active and inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm
lists have been erased. (This does not remove alarms from the
data recorder.)
ALL INFO LOADED -- REMOVE CARD All data has been loaded into the microprocessor from the PC
Card. The card may be safely removed from the microprocessor.
BACK TO CONFIGS Pressing the = key with this message showing will return the user
to the main microprocessor Configuration list.
BACK TO FUNC PARAMS Pressing the = key with this message showing will return the user
to the main Functional Parameter list.
BAD PC CARD OR CARD SLOT The microprocessor has detected a problem with either the PC
card or the PC card slot.
CANNOT ENTER TRIP START Cannot enter Trip Start. A problem has been detected within the
Data Recorder.
CANNOT START DEFROST CYCLE Due to current unit conditions, the defrost cycle cannot be started.
Refer to Section 3.9.
CANNOT START PRETRIP Due to current unit conditions a Pretrip test cannot be started. Re-
fer to Pretrip Section 3.4.
CANNOT DOWNLOAD -- BATTERY TOO Data cannot be downloaded and software upgrades are prohibited
LOW when battery voltage is below 7.0 volts. This message will be dis-
played until the serial cable is removed.
CARD FULL, REMOVE CARD The PC Downloader Card is full. There is no additional room to
download information from the microprocessor. You may safely
remove the PC Card from the slot.
CARD LOCKED -- REMOVE CARD The lock switch on the PC Card is in the “Locked” position. To use
the PC Card, move the switch to the “Unlocked” position.
CARD REMOVED, DATA NOT COPIED The PC Card was removed before all data was copied onto the
card.
CARD REMOVED, REINSERT CARD The PC Card was removed from the card slot before the operation
was completed. Reinsert the PC Card into the card slot to perform
the operation.

6--1 62-61753
 MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message
CFG: =TO LOAD,↑ TO CANCEL
CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT
CHARGE MODE--HOLD=TO EXIT
CHECK AT NEXT SERVICE INTERVAL
CHECK DOOR
CHECK FUEL LEVEL
(Requires Optional Sensor)
CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO KEYPAD
COMPONENT TEST MODE
CONFIG ERROR, REMOVE CARD
CONFIGS COMPLETE,= TO EXIT
CONFIGURATION MODE
CONFIGURATION NOT CHANGED
CONTINUOUS LOCKED
CONTINUOUS RUN MODE SELECTED
COPY COMPLETE, REMOVE CARD XX
COPY ERROR, REMOVE CARD XX
COPYING DATA--PLEASE WAIT
DATA RECORDER FAILURE
DEFROST CYCLE STARTED
DOOR OPEN -- LOW SPEED
ENTERING SERVICE MODE
EVAC / CHARGE MODE
EXITING PRETRIP MODE
EXITING SERVICE MODE
62-61753
Description
A Configuration Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot.
Press the = key to load Configurations or IntelliSets into micropro-
cessor.
The IntelliSleep Intelliset is active. Alternates with
“INTELLI--SLEEP MODE” at 5 second interval whether unit is run-
ning or not.
Service mode has the refrigeration system set so that it can be
charged with refrigerant through the king valve. Press the = key to
manually exit, or wait until the charging is complete.
The unit needs to be checked at next service interval.
There is currently an active non--shutdown alarm in the alarm list.
Door switch indicates that trailer compartment door is not closed.
The level in the fuel tank is very close to empty.
There is a communication signal lost between the keypad/display
and the microprocessor. Check and test the wiring to the keypad/
display
Pressing the = key while this message is being displayed will allow
user access to Component Test mode.
There was an error configuring the microprocessor with the Config-
uration PC Card. Remove the PC Card from the slot.
The user has reached the end of the Configurations List. Pressing
the UP or DOWN ARROW key will start list over. Press the = key
to exit Configuration List.
Press the = key to enter Configuration Mode.
New Configuration selection was not entered (saved) within the 5
second time limit.
The current set point is within a range that has been locked into the
Continuous Run mode. Start--Stop can not be selected.
The unit operating mode has been changed from Start-Stop to
Continuous Run.
A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
all data from the DataRecorder has been copied onto the PC Card.
You may safely remove PC Card from the slot. XX = number of
empty download slots remaining on the card.
A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
an error occurred while the data was being copied onto the PC
Card. You may safely remove the PC Card from the slot.
XX indicates the number of empty download slots remaining on the
card.
A DownLoad PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
all data from the DataRecorder is being copied onto the PC Card.
DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS MESSAGE IS BE-
ING DISPLAYED.
The microprocessor has stopped recording Unit Data.
The unit has gone into defrost.
The refrigerated compartment door is open forcing the unit to run in
low speed.
The initial message for Service Mode.
The unit is in Service Mode, and the refrigeration system is ready
to be evacuated then charged with refrigerant. Refer to Section
5.1.3.
Pretrip has been aborted either by user or by a pretrip alarm.
Service Mode has been turned off and unit is returning to normal
operation.
6--2
 MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message
FUNCTION NOT CHANGED
HOUR METERS NOT CHANGED
INACTIVE ALARMS IN MEMORY
INSTALLED, REMOVE CARD XX
INSTALLING OPTION, PLEASE WAIT
INSTALL STOPPED, REINSERT CARD
INTELLI--SLEEP MODE
KEYPAD LOCKED--BATTERY TOO LOW
LIST END, = TO CLEAR ALARMS
LOADING INFO
MAIN MENU
MAX SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED
MICRO WILL RESET & RESTART NOW
MICRO WILL STOP IN XXX SECONDS
MIN SETPOINT HAS BEEN REACHED
MODIFIED
NEW SW: = TO LOAD, TO ↑ CANCEL
NO ACTION TAKEN, REMOVE CARD
NO ACTIVE ALARMS
NO DATA ON CARD, REMOVE CARD
Description
The = key was not pressed in the allotted amount of time to select
the new Functional Parameter setting. The new setting was not
stored and the old setting will be used.
Indicates that no changes have been made to the hourmeters in
either the Configuration or functional parameter lists.
There are inactive alarms in the microprocessor alarm list which
have not yet been cleared.
An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the option has been installed in the microprocessor. The PC Card
may safely be removed from the slot. XX indicates the number of
option installations remaining on card.
An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the option is being installed in the microprocessor. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS MESSAGE IS BEING DIS-
PLAYED.
An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the install process has been stopped by the PC Card not being fully
inserted in the slot, or by being removed. Remove and reinsert PC
Card to continue.
The IntelliSleep IntelliSet is active. This message alternates with
“CHANGE INTELLISET TO EXIT” at 5 second interval whether unit
is running or not
Once the battery voltage goes below 7.0 Volts for 10 seconds, all
of the keys on the keypad will be locked.
The end of the Alarm list has been reached. Pressing the = key will
clear the Alarm list.
A Configuration PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot,
and information from the Configuration card is being loaded into the
microprocessor. DO NOT REMOVE THE CARD WHILE THIS
MESSAGE IS BEING DISPLAYED.
Consists of Configuration Mode, Component Test and Service
Modes.
Maximum set point allowed by Configuration settings has been
reached.
The microprocessor Program software has just been changed, or a
new Configuration has been programmed into the microprocessor.
The microprocessor will turn itself off then on again (similar to a
computer reboot) in order for the changes to be effective.
The START / RUN--OFF switch has been turned OFF and the sys-
tem valves are closing. The display will turn off when the count
down reaches zero.
Minimum Set Point allowed by Configuration settings has been
reached.
This message will appear in the MessageCenter along with the cur-
rent IntelliSet indicating that the IntelliSet is active and one or more
of its settings have been modified.
A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the program on the PC Card is a newer version than what is al-
ready loaded in the microprocessor. Press the = key to load the
program.
A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
no key presses have been made to install the program into the mi-
croprocessor. The PC Card may be safely removed from the slot.
There are no active alarms in the microprocessor Alarm List.
A Program or Configuration PC Card has been inserted into the PC
Card slot, and no valid data is present on the PC Card. The PC
Card may safely be removed from the unit.
6--3 62-61753
 MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message
NO DATA TO COPY, REMOVE CARD
NO INACTIVE ALARMS
NO INSTALLS LEFT, REMOVE CARD
OLD INTELLISETS--USE REEFERMAN
OLD SW:CANNOT LOAD--REMOVE
CARD
OLD SW, = TO LOAD, ↑ TO CANCEL
PC MODE
PM DUE
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW DATA
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW SETTINGS
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW PRINT MENU
PRESS = TO MARK TRIP START
PRESS = TO START PRETRIP
PRESS ↑↓ TO VIEW INTELLISET
PRETRIP FAIL & COMPLETED
PRETRIP FAIL IN TEST XX
PRETRIP PASS
PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER
PRODUCTSHIELD: HIGH AIR ON
PRODUCTSHIELD: WINTER ON
PRODUCTSHIELD: ECONO ON
READY TO INSTALL SOFTWARE
RECOVER / LEAK CHK / EVAC MODE
62-61753
Description
A Download PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
there is no valid data in the Data Recorder to copy onto the PC
Card. The PC Card may safely be removed from the unit.
There are no inactive alarms in the Alarm List
An Option PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and all
install options have been used. The PC Card may safely be re-
moved from the unit.
The IntelliSets that are on the Configuration PC Card were written
with too old of a PC Program, like ServiceManager. The software in
the micro requires IntelliSets to be written to the Configuration PC
Card using ReeferManager. Rewrite the information to the card us-
ing ReeferManager, then use it in the microprocessor again
A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the major version of the program on the PC Card is an older vers-
ion than what is already loaded in the microprocessor. Software
with older major versions can not be loaded into the micropro-
cessor. Remove the PC Card. (Refer to Section 5.3 for software
version description.)
A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot, and
the minor version of the program on the PC Card is an older ver-
sion than what is already loaded in the microprocessor. Press the =
key to load the older program. (Refer to Section 5.3 for software
version description.)
START/RUN-OFF switch is OFF, the PC mode Jumper or down-
load cable is connected and should be removed.
Preventative Maintenance is now due on the unit.
Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to scroll through the Data
List.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to scroll through Functional Pa-
rameter Settings.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to view the Strip Print setup
menu.
Press the = key to mark the start of the trip in the Data Recorder.
Press the = key to begin pretrip tests.
Press the UP or DOWN arrow key to view IntelliSet list. This mes-
sage will appear after IntelliSets are installed into the micropro-
cessor, and the unit can not be started until an IntelliSet is selec-
ted.
The Pretrip test is completed, and some of the pretrip tests did not
pass. Check the Alarm List for pretrip alarms.
Some of the pretrip tests did not pass and the pretrip was not com-
pleted. Check the Alarm List for pretrip alarms.
All of the pretrip tests were ok.
Pretrip has been stopped by user.
The unit is operating in ProductShield High Air which overrides nor-
mal unit speed operation. Refer to Section 4.6.3.
The unit is operating in ProductShield Winter which overrides nor-
mal unit operation. Refer to Section 4.6.3.
The unit is operating in ProductShield Econo which overrides nor-
mal unit Start--Stop or Continuous Run operation. Refer to Section
4.6.3.
The microprocessor has been forced into Program Install Mode. If
this message does not clear after loading the current version of
software, check for a shorted circuit between 5MP5 and 5MP6.
This message will be displayed when the unit is in Service Mode
and the system is ready for recovery and leak testing.
6--4
 MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message
REMOVE CARD -- BATTERY TOO LOW
REMOTE SWITCH 1 (2) OPEN
REMOTE SWITCH 1 (2) OPEN -- LOW
SPEED
REMOVE JUMPER
SAME SW, = TO LOAD, ↑ TO CANCEL
SERVICE MODE
SETPOINT CHANGED
SETPOINT NOT CHANGED
SETTING SMV: XXX %
SLEEP MODE, OFF / ON TO WAKE
SLEEP WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL
SMV CLOSING: WAIT XXX SECONDS
START MODE: AUTO or MANUAL
START STOP LOCKED
START/STOP MODE SELECTED
STATUS OK
TEST #1 to #15
TIME SELECTION NOT CHANGED
TRIP START ENTERED
UNIT BATTERY TOO LOW
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- DOOR OPEN
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- SEE ALARM LIST
UNIT SHUTDOWN -- RMS1(2)
UNKNOWN CARD -- REMOVE CARD
WARNING: DIESEL RESTART ON
Description
If a PC card is inserted when battery is below 7.0 volts this mes-
sage will be displayed until card is removed.
Remote switch is open. May be connected to a trailer compartment
door or a remote control switch.
Shows that the remote switch is open and that the unit is running in
low speed. Switch may be connected to a trailer compartment door
or a remote control switch.
The Configuration/Technician Test Mode has been entered. Re-
move the jumper wire before continuing.
A Program PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot and
the program on the PC Card is the same as the program currently
in the microprocessor. Press the = key to reload the same program
or press the UP ARROW key to cancel and remove card.
Selection in Configuration and Technician Test Modes which is
used when servicing the refrigeration system. Refer to Section
5.1.3.
The new set point has been entered (saved into microprocessor
memory), the new set point will be used.
The new set point has NOT been entered (NOT saved into micro-
processor memory), the old set point will be used.
The START/RUN--OFF switch has been placed in the
START/RUN position and the CSMV is opening.
The unit is cycled off in Sleep Mode. Place the
START/RUN--OFF switch in the OFF position, then back to the
START/RUN position to wake the microprocessor up.
The unit is running in Sleep Mode to charge the battery and (in en-
gine operation) warm the engine coolant. It is not running to
provide temperature control.
Power Up and the CSMV is closing. XX indicates the number of
seconds remaining until valve is fully closed.
Indicates whether the unit is in Auto Start or Manual Start mode
The set point has been locked into the Start--Stop mode. Continu-
ous Run can not be selected.
Start--Stop Mode has been selected.
The unit is operating correctly.
Pretrip is currently running this test and is x% complete.
A time change was started but not entered (saved) in Configuration
List.
The Trip Start marker has been placed in the DataRecorder.
The unit battery has dropped below 7 volts for more than 10 sec-
onds.
The unit has shut down because the refrigerated compartment door
is open.
An active shutdown alarm has shut the unit down.
The unit has shut down because switch is open. May be connected
to a door or a remote control switch.
A defective PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot. The
microprocessor can not recognize any data on the card. The card
may be safely removed from the microprocessor.
When electric power is not available while the unit is operating in
Standby Operation, the unit will switch to diesel operation.
6--5 62-61753
 MessageCenter MESSAGES
Message Description
WARNING: NO TEMP CONTROL Both 1RAT and 1SAT alarms are on and unit is running with a set-
point in the frozen range in low speed six cylinder cool.
WRONG UNIT TYPE, REMOVE CARD A Configuration PC Card has been inserted into the PC Card slot.
The unit model family type on the PC card is not in the same unit
family type as the microprocessor. The card may be safely re-
moved from the microprocessor.

62-61753 6--6
 SECTION 7
ALARM TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
LogiCOLD microprocessor equipped units
may start automatically at any time the
START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) is not in
the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fit-
ted with two way communication equip-
ment that will allow stating of the unit from a
remote location even though the SROS is in
the off position.
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied at the
power plug or from the generator. When
performing service or maintenance proced-
ures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufac-
turers instruction, ensure the START/RUN--
OFF switch is in the OFF position and,
whenever practical, disconnect the high
voltage source and disconnect the negative
battery connection. NEVER dis--assemble
the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD
INSIDE! This field can interfere with cardiac
implants such as pacemakers and defibril-
lators.
7.1 INTRODUCTION
This section provides guidance for troubleshooting
alarms. The alarm light will be illuminated when there is
one (or more) alarm(s) stored in the microprocessor.
Instructions for reviewing the alarm lists are provided in
sections 3.11 & 3.12.
When an alarm occurs, look through both Active and
Inactive alarm lists in the microprocessor and make
note of all alarms. Each alarm begins with an A (active)
or I (inactive) followed by an alarm number and
description. Alarms are listed in this guide by alarm
number in ascending order.
Before beginning to actually troubleshoot an alarm,
visually inspect the unit, in particular the area of the unit
that is causing a problem. In many cases the cause of
the problem will be obvious once a visual inspection is
performed. For those cases where the cause of the
problem is not obvious, this troubleshooting guide will be
of assistance.
Troubleshooting should begin with the first alarm that
appears in the active alarm list. The first alarm that
appears is the last alarm that was recorded. Other
alarms in the list may have contributed to the
occurrence of the first alarm.
The check items in the troubleshooting guide are listed
in order of their likeliness of occurrence and ease of
testing. We recommend that you follow the order in
which they are presented; however, there may be times
7--1
when situations or experience lead a to the use of a
different order. For example, if the trailer is loaded,
condensing unit checks should be done first, even
though some evaporator section checks may be listed
before them.
When the cause of the problem is corrected, it is not
necessary to continue through the remainder of the
steps. Some active alarms will inactivate themselves
automatically once the cause has been corrected.
Alarms that do not inactivate themselves automatically
must be cleared manually. (Refer to Note 1,
Section 7.2 )
When repairs are completed, run the unit through a
Pretrip cycle and verify that no further active alarms
occur. Also, the inactive alarm list should be cleared so
that there are no ‘old’ alarms in memory when the unit
leaves the repair facility.
If the message CHECK MICROPROCESSOR or
CHK WIRES FROM MICRO TO KEYPAD appears in
the MessageCenter, there is a communication error
between the keypad and the microprocessor. With no
communication, there will not be an associated alarm.
Should this occur, check the wire connections behind
the keypad assembly, at the keypad itself (remove the
rear cover to check), and at connector 5MP on the
microprocessor. Check for microprocessor status led
blinking at 1 second rate (1 second ON/1 second OFF).
When working on the refrigeration system, an
accurately calibrated manifold test set should always be
installed. It is not necessary to connect an additional
high pressure gauge at the liquid line service valve. The
MessageCenter, under DATA, will display compressor
suction pressure, compressor discharge pressure and
evaporator outlet pressure.
In high or low ambients it may be necessary to cool or
warm the refrigerated compartment temperature before
performing specific tests providing that the
compartment is not loaded with perishable product.
7.2 NOTES
Note 1 The active alarm list may be cleared by
scrolling to the end of the list. “LIST END, =
TO CLEAR ALARMS” will appear in the
MessageCenter. Pressing = will inactivate
the alarms. That is: the alarm is “cleared”
from the active alarm list and moved to the
inactive alarm list for later review if the
condition that caused the alarm has been
corrected. When Shutdown Alarms are
cleared, the unit will attempt to restart. When
non-Shutdown Alarms are cleared, there will
be no noticeable change in the unit’s
operation.
The Inactive Alarm list is cleared in the same
way. When the inactive alarm list is cleared
both the inactive and active lists are cleared.
62-61753
 Clearing the inactive alarm list removes the
alarm from the microprocessor.
Note 2 Many electrical circuits may be tested by
powering the circuits without starting the en-
gine. This can be done by first setting the NO
POWER Configuration to the ALARM &
SHUTDOWN selection, then leaving the unit
disconnected from any Standby Power, pla-
cing the Diesel/Electric Switch in the Electric
position, and placing the SROS in the
START/RUN position. In this mode, the Run
Relay will be energized and the unit will re-
main off.
Note 3 Sensors may be tested at the component
plug using an ohmmeter. If required, sensor
circuits may also be tested at the 1MP plug.
Remove plug and, using an ohmmeter, test
62-61753
resistance of circuits. Be careful not to
damage the connector pins. (Refer to
Section 8.7.7 for chart of resistances for
different sensors.)
Note 4 The Defrost Air Switch, RPM Sensor, Engine
Oil Level Switch, Fuel Level Sensor, Door
Switch, or HP1 can be tested as components
alone. If required, the circuits may be tested
at the 2MP plug. Remove plug from Micro-
processor and using the wiring schematic,
check for voltage at the appropriate terminal.
Note 5 Some tests can only be conducted while the
unit is operating. The unit may be started au-
tomatically in either Diesel or Electric by plac-
ing the Diesel / Electric Switch in the desired
operating position, then placing the SROS in
the START/RUN position.
7--2
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.3 DRIVER / OPERATOR ALARMS
1 LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING
Note: This is an optional alarm which will not occur unless a fuel level sensor is present and configured ON.

• TRIGGER ON: Fuel level is 15% or less for more than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm only.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when the fuel level is above 17% for more than 30 seconds, or
alarm may be manually reset via keypad, or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Fuel Level
a. Check fuel level in the tank. Add fuel as needed.
2 Check Fuel Level Sensor. Refer to procedure for Alarm 126

7--3 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.4 SHUTDOWN ALARMS
11 LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine oil pressure is below 0.82 bar (12 psig) for longer than 5 seconds while the
engine is running.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset, or alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Engine Oil Level
a. Check oil dipstick. Add oil as needed.
2 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
between pins A (+) and B (ground).
3 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch
a. Remove switch, connect to an Contacts close on a pressure rise when pressure is
external pressure source and test. above 1.02 bar (15 psig) .
Contacts open on a pressure fall when pressure is
below 0.82 bar (12 psig).
4 Check Engine Oil Pressure
a. Connect mechanical oil gauge. Oil pressure must be greater than 1.02 bar (15 psig).

62-61753 7--4
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Engine Coolant Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 129 first) and:
Ambient temp below 48.9°C (120°F) and engine coolant temperature rises above 110°C (230°F) or
Ambient temp above 48.9°C (120°F) and engine coolant temperature rises above 116°C (241°F) or
Ambient temperatures equal to or below 48.9°C (120°F) and engine coolant temperature is between
110°C and 116°C (230°F and 241°F) for more than 5 minutes
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if the engine coolant temp falls below 100°C (212°F), or alarm
may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Coolant Level
a. Check coolant level in overflow Level must be in the normal range.
bottle.
WARNING
Do not remove the cap from
a hot radiator; if the cap
must be removed, do so
very slowly in order to re-
lease the pressure without
spray.

b. Check coolant level in radiator Level must be at the top of the radiator fill tube.
c. Inspect connecting tube between Connections must be airtight. No leakage or holes in
overflow bottle and radiator. tube.
2 Check Freeze Point Of Coolant
a. Use Coolant Tester to check Must be between 40% to 60% Ethylene Glycol to
concentration of anti-freeze water mixture.
mixture.
3 Check Airflow Through Radiator / Condenser Coil
a. Inspect condenser / radiator fins. Fins must be straight. 90% or more of the coil sur-
face must be undamaged. No “dead” air spaces.
Condenser / Radiator coil must be clean (refer to
Section 8.6.3).
b. Check airflow. Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check condenser fan rotation / Fans should operate correctly. Air should be drawn in
operation. through the grill, and directed into the engine
compartment.
4 Check Water Pump Belt
a. Check engine water pump belt. No Glazing, cracking or slipping.
Additional steps on the next page.

7--5 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
12 HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE (Continued)
5 Check Engine Cooling System
a. Compare actual engine tempera- Temperature must be within ±11.1°C (±20°F).
ture to the microprocessor reading.
b. Test operation of engine coolant Must operate correctly. Refer to engine manual
thermostat.
c. Check water pump operation. No seepage at weep hole. Bearings tight and quiet.
Impeller firmly attached to shaft.
d. Check cooling system for scale, Coolant must be clean & clear with foreign particles
sludge, rust, etc. or substances in it. Flush & clean the coolant system
as necessary.
e. Check water pump bypass hose to Must be clear and open.
thermostat housing for internal
blockage.

62-61753 7--6
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
13 HIGH DISCHARGE PRESSURE
• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor discharge pressure is over 31.6 bar (465 psig)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes if the compressor discharge pressure falls below
23.8 bar (350 psig), or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
check and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures Pressures must be in the normal range for ambient &
with those shown on the refrigerated compartment temperature conditions.
microprocessor. NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evaporator
(EVOP) pressure readings have a maximum value of
7.5 bar (100 psig). The actual suction pressure must
be lower in order to perform this test.
2 Check For Refrigerant Overcharge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Generally, level should be between upper & lower
receiver. sight glasses with a refrigerated compartment tem-
perature of 1.0C (35°F) or lower, refer to Section
8.5.4
3 Check Airflow Through Radiator / Condenser Coil
a. Inspect condenser / radiator fins. Fins must be straight. 90% or more of the coil sur-
face must be undamaged. No “dead” air spaces.
Condenser / Radiator coil must be clean (refer to
Section 8.6.3).
b. Check airflow. Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check condenser fan rotation / Fans should operate correctly. Air should be drawn in
operation. through the grill, and directed into the engine
compartment.
4 Check Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
between pins A (+) and B (ground).
5 Check High Pressure Switch
d. Check switch operation. Refer to Section 8.6.11.
6 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for alarms. before proceeding.
7 Refer to Abnormal Pressure Discharge Pressure must be in normal range for the
Trouble Shooting Section 9.4.7. current ambient and refrigerated compartment tem-
perature conditions.

7--7 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
14 HIGH A/C AMPS
• TRIGGER–ON: AC Current Sensor 1 or 2 is greater than 28.5A for 3 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm
Standby operation: Refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 14 minutes if the AC current sensor readings are less than
27 amps or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning unit off then back on.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Generator Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at GENCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.12.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
2 Check Power Source Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at PSCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.12.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
3 Check Voltage Output From Contactors
a. Check voltage at GENCON T1--T2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.12.
T1--T3, T2--T3.
b. Check voltage at CCON with Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.12.
compressor operating. T1--T2,
T1--T3, T2--T3.
4 Verify AC Current Sensor Accuracy
a. Place the SROS in the Unit AC Current #1 and #2 reading in Data List must
START / RUN position. be 0.0  1.0 amp.
5 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
6 Check High Voltage Components Amp Draw
a. Check condenser fan amp draw for
CDCON on all 3 legs.
b. Check evaporator fan motor amp
draw for 1EVCON on all 3 legs.
c. Check compressor amp draw for The unit must be running for these tests to be per-
CCON on all 3 legs. formed. Refer to Section 2.11 for correct electrical
values.
d. Check Lower Evaporator Heater
amp draw for 1HTCON1.
e. Check Upper Evaporator Heater
amp draw for 1HTCON2.

62-61753 7--8
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
15 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH
• TRIGGER–ON: Voltage at the microprocessor is greater than 17 VDC.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the microprocessor is
between 11 and 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off,
then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Battery Voltage
a. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be between 12--16 VDC.
off.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be between 12--16 VDC.
running.
2 Check Battery Charger Voltage
a. Test voltage at battery charger Must be between 12--16 VDC.
output terminal with unit off.
b. Test voltage at battery charger Must be between 12--16 VDC.
output terminal with unit running.
3 Check Voltage At Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at Energize circuit. (Refer to Note 2 Page 7--2.)
microprocessor input (MPQC1+ to Must be between 12--16 VDC.
MPQC2--.)
b. Check voltage reading on Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained in 3a
microprocessor display. (above.)

7--9 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
16 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW
• TRIGGER–ON: Voltage at the microprocessor is less than 10 VDC (except when the engine starter
is engaged.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm. Alarm only, if activated while starting unit.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes when the voltage at the microprocessor is
between 11 -- 14 VDC, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then
back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Alarm 51
a. Check for “Alternator Not Charging Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
Alarm”. (Note: The A51 name is cleared to continue.
carried over from unit models with
alternators. For the Vector Model,
Alarm 51 indicates that the solid
state battery charger is not per-
forming correctly.
2 Check Battery Voltage
a. Inspect battery cable ends and Must be clean and tight.
posts.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test voltage at battery with unit Must be above 11 VDC.
running.
d. Test specific gravity of battery. (Check for battery specifications.)
e. Perform load test on battery. (Check for battery specifications.)
(Follow battery manufacturer’s
procedure.)
3 Check Voltage At Microprocessor
a. Check voltage reading at Must be above 11 VDC.
microprocessor input (MPQC1+ to
MPQC2--).
b. Check voltage reading on Must be within 0.5 VDC of reading obtained in 3a
microprocessor display. (above.)

62-61753 7--10
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
17 HIGH COMP DISCHARGE TEMP
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Compressor Discharge Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 125 first) and:
discharge temp rises above 140.6°C (285.1°F) for 30 seconds, or
Discharge temp rises above 146.1°C (295.0°F).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after 15 minutes when discharge temp falls below 130.0°C
(266°F) or
alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Airflow Through Radiator / Condenser Coil
a. Inspect condenser / radiator fins. Fins must be straight. 90% or more of the coil sur-
face must be undamaged. No “dead” air spaces.
Condenser / Radiator coil must be clean (refer to
Section 8.6.3).
b. Check airflow. Even airflow through the entire coil. No “dead” spots.
c. Check condenser fan rotation / Fans should operate correctly. Air should be drawn in
operation. through the grill, and directed into the engine
compartment.
2 Check LIV, CSMV and EVXV
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
3 Check For Low Refrigerant Charge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Generally, level should be between upper & lower
receiver. sight glasses with a refrigerated compartment tem-
perature of 1.0C (35°F) or lower. refer to Section
8.5.4
4 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
check and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures Pressures must be in the normal range for ambient &
with those shown on the refrigerated compartment temperature conditions.
microprocessor display. NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evaporator
(EVOP) pressure readings have a maximum value of
100 psig (7.5 bar) The actual suction pressure must
be lower than 100 psig in order to perform this test.
5 Check Compressor
a. Check compressor for excessive Replace compressor
vibration or noise
6 Check System For Non-Condensables
a. Check refrigeration system for No non–condensable gas(es) may be present. (Refer
non-condensable gas(es). to Section 8.5.5.)

7--11 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
• TRIGGER–ON:
Suction Pressure has been less than --0.43 bar (--6.3 psig) for the Low Suction Pressure Configura-
tion time or 10 seconds (whichever is less).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine Operation: Engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) refrigeration
system shutdown and alarm with PSCON still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when suction pressure rises above 0.0 (bar or psig). Alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit OFF, then ON again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Refrigerant Charge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Generally, level should be between upper & lower
receiver. sight glasses with a refrigerated compartment tem-
perature of 1.0C (35°F) or lower. refer to Section
8.5.4
2 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction pressure must be above 0.0 (psig or bar)
check and compare compressor Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
discharge & suction pressures reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
with those shown on the NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evaporator
microprocessor. (EVOP) pressure readings have a maximum value of
7.5 bar (100 psig) The actual suction pressure must
be lower than 100 psig in order to perform this test.
3 Manually Defrost Unit
a. Defrost unit and terminate Typical defrost cycle time is 5--20 minutes.
automatically. Suction pressure should rise gradually during cycle.
4 Check Transducer Wiring
a. Inspect transducer & connector No physical damage to sensor.
pins & terminals. (See wiring No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
schematic Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
transducer plug between pins A If OK, go to step e. If not, continue with this step.
(+) and B (ground).
d. Reconnect the transducer plug. Voltage should be greater than 0.24 VDC and less
Check for voltage between than 5 VDC,.
1MP--29 and ground.
5 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for alarms. before proceeding.
6 Check Unloader Operation
a. Check Unloader Solenoid Valve Refer to Alarm 112
Additional steps on the next page.

62-61753 7--12
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
18 LOW REFRIGERANT PRESSURE (Continued)
7 Check CSMV
a. Check compressor suction Refer to procedure “How To Check CSMV”, Section
modulation valve. 8.6.7.
8 Check Evaporator Section
a. Check evaporator section, return Refer to Section 9.4.10
air bulkhead, air chute, cleanliness
of evap. coil and airflow.
9 Visually Inspect Unit
a. Visually inspect unit for damage to All tubing from the receiver to the evaporator section
the liquid line causing a restriction is in good condition
or any signs of temperature drop There is no temperature drop at the drier or any-
at the drier. where on the liquid line
10 Check Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Check operation of valve. Refer to Section 8.6.8

7--13 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
19 LOW FUEL SHUTDOWN
This is an optional alarm. This alarm will not occur unless a fuel level sensor is present and configured ON
and a fuel tank size has be selected.
• TRIGGER ON:
“Check Fuel Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 126 first) and:
Fuel level is 10% or less for more than 1 minute when the unit is operating in diesel Mode
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) shutdown
and alarm.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when fuel level is above 12% for more than 1 minute, or alarm
may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Fuel Level Warning Alarm
a. Check for alarm 1. Must be cleared.
2 Check For Low Fuel Level
a. Check fuel level in tank. Add fuel as needed to the fuel tank.

62-61753 7--14
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
20 MAXIMUM COMPRESSOR ALARMS
• TRIGGER ON: Option must be installed and alarm must be enabled by configuring the Compressor
Alarm Shutdown to YES. Alarms 13, 17, 18, 27 or 28 individually occur 3 times within the last 2
hours of engine running time.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Reset from inactive alarm list only. Can not be reset by turning switch OFF
and then ON again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Determine Which Alarm Caused This Alarm To Be Active.
a. Check active alarm list for One or more of these alarms will be present.
Alarm #’s 13, 17, 18, 27or 28.
b. Follow the steps for the alarm(s) All alarms condition must be fixed.
found above, and correct the alarm
condition.
2 Reset Alarm
a. Reset all alarms from the inactive All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
alarm list.

21 TECHNICIAN RESET REQUIRED

• TRIGGER ON: The High Engine Temp Shutdown Configuration and/or Engine Oil Pressure
Shutdown Configuration is/are set to YES, and either Alarm 11 – Low Engine Oil Pressure, or
Alarm 12 – High Coolant Temperature has become active and shut the unit down three times within
the past 2 hours
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine Operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby Operation: This alarm will not activate in Standby Operation
• RESET CONDITION: Reset from inactive alarm list only. Can not be reset by turning switch OFF
and then ON again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1. Determine Which Alarm Caused This Alarm To Be Active.
a. Check active alarm list for One or more of these alarms will be present.
Alarm #’s 11 or 12.
b. Follow the steps for the alarm(s) All alarms condition must be corrected.
found above, and correct the alarm
condition.
2. Reset Alarm
Reset all alarms from the inactive All alarms must be cleared to start unit.
alarm list.

7--15 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
22 LOW SUCTION SUPERHEAT
• TRIGGER ON:
“Check Suction Temperature Sensor” and/or “Check Evaporator Temperature Sensor” alarms are
not active (refer to alarm 127 and/or 131 first) and:
Compressor suction superheat (Compressor Suction Temperature (CST) minus saturated tempera-
ture for Compressor Suction Pressure (CSP) is less than 5°C (9°F) for more than 2 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Pressures must have the same reading on gauges &
and compare compressor dis- on microprocessor display.
charge, suction and evaporator out- NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evaporator
let pressure with those shown on (EVOP) pressure readings have a maximum value of
the microprocessor display. 7.5 bar (100 psig) The actual suction pressure must
be lower than 100 psig in order to perform this test.
2 Check Evaporator Section
a. Check evaporator section, return Refer to Section 9.4.10
air bulkhead, air chute, cleanliness
of evap. coil and airflow.
3 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
4 Check EVXV
a. Check operation of EVXV Refer to Section 8.6.8.

62-61753 7--16
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT
• TRIGGER ON: The high voltage amp draw is over the following limit for more than 10 seconds.
Mode Diesel High Speed (AMPS) Diesel Low Speed or Standby (AMPS)
Cooling 24 24
Heating 168 14
Normal Defrost 16 12
Null or Natural Defrost 10 8
Engine Off 24 24
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 15 minutes or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit OFF, then back ON.
1 Perform Pretrip Check.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Perform Pretrip Check.
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared be-
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. fore proceeding.
2 Check Configurations for Correct Maximum Amps Settings
a. Check Configuration setting for: Setting should be factory default only -- refer to Sec-
DIESEL MAX GEN AMPS, STAND- tion 5.1.1
BY MAX GEN AMPS, STARTUP
MAX AMPS & DIESEL OFFSET
MAX AMPS
3 Check For Electrical Failure In System
a. Check electrical motors. Visually inspect condenser and evaporator fan mo-
tors for damage to motor or fan blade, or for foreign
material obstructing the movement of the motor. Lis-
ten for noise caused by failed bearing or motor ob-
struction.
b. Check for defective wiring. Check for discolored wiring at contactors and loose
connections.
c. Check for defective contactor. Remove and replace any suspected contactor(s).
4 Check High Voltage Components Amp Draw
a. Check condenser fan amp draw on
all legs. These checks must be made with the unit operating.
b. Check evaporator fan motor amp WARNING
draw on all 3 legs. Caution and good electrical practices must
c. Check compressor amp draw on all be used when working around and with
3 legs. high voltage circuits.
d. Check Heater amp draw for Verify that all three actual amperage readings for
1HTCON1. each component are within 10% of each other, and
e. Check Heater amp draw for are within the values shown in Section 2.11.
1HTCON2.
Additional steps on the next page.

7--17 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
23 A/C CURRENT OVER LIMIT (Continued)
5 Check Generator Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at GENCON Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.11.
L1--L2, L1--L3, L2--L3.
6 Check Power Source Voltage (If Used When Alarm Occurred)
a. Check voltage at PSCON L1--L2, Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.11.
L1--L3, L2--L3.
7 Check Voltage Output From Contactors
a. Check voltage at GENCON Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.11.
T1--T2, T1--T3, T2--T3.
b. Check voltage at CCON with com- Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.11.
pressor operating. T1--T2, T1--T3,
T2--T3.
8 Defective Overload Ground Fault Module (OGF)
Check OGF. Refer to procedure for Alarm 100
9 Verify AC Current Sensor Accuracy (CT2 & CT3)
a. Place the SROS in the Unit AC Current #1 and #2 reading in Data List must
START / RUN position. be 0.0  1.0 amp.

62-61753 7--18
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
24 COMPRESSION RATIO EXCEEDED
• TRIGGER ON: If the compressor compression ratio is greater than 21 for 20 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when compression ratio is less than 21 for 3 minutes or,
alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Look for high discharge or low suction Discharge and suction pressures must be in normal
pressure causes. range for the current ambient and refrigerated
compartment temperature conditions. Refer to
Abnormal Pressure Trouble Shooting Section 9.4.7.

7--19 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
27 HIGH SUCTION PRESSURE
• TRIGGER ON: The compressor is running and the suction pressure has been greater than
6.7 bar (98 psig) for more than 10 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shut
down) engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) refrigeration
system shutdown and alarm with PSCON still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when suction pressure is less than 75 psig (5.1 bar) for 5 minutes
and configured for Alarm Only in standby operation or Auto Reset after 30 minutes if in engine
operation if configured as a Shutdown Alarm or, alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
check and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures
Pressures must be in the normal range for ambient &
with those shown on the
refrigerated compartment temperature conditions.
microprocessor.
NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
orator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maxi-
mum value of 7.5 bar (100 psig). The actual suc-
tion pressure must be lower in order to perform
this test.
2 Check For Refrigerant Overcharge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Generally, level should be between upper & lower
receiver. sight glasses with a refrigerated compartment
temperature of 1.0C (35°F) or lower. refer to Section
8.5.4
3 Check Transducer Wiring
a. Inspect transducer & connector No physical damage to sensor.
pins & terminals. (See wiring No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
schematic Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
transducer plug between pins A If OK, go to step e. If not, continue with this step.
(+) and B (ground).
d. Reconnect the transducer plug. Voltage should be greater than 0.24 VDC and less
Check for voltage between than 5 VDC,.
1MP--29 and ground.
4 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared be-
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. fore proceeding.
5 Check Evaporator Expansion Valve (EVXV)
a. Check operation of valve. Refer to Section 8.6.8
6 Check Compressor
a. Check compressor for excessive Replace compressor
vibration or noise

62-61753 7--20
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
28 CHECK REFRIGERATION SYSTEM
• TRIGGER ON: The refrigeration system is running and the discharge pressure is less than 0.34 bar
(5 psig) higher than suction pressure for more than 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit
shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) refrigeration
system shutdown and alarm with PSCON still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when discharge pressure is more than 1.36 bar (20 psig) above
the suction pressure when in alarm only, or auto reset after 30 minutes when shutdown is
configured or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Verify Compressor Is Running.
a. Check compressor Amp draw -- Check all three voltage legs. Readings must be in
CCON T1--T2, T1--T3, T2--T3. the range as shown in Section 2.11.
2 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and check Suction pressure must be above 3 psig (0.2 bar)
and compare compressor
discharge & suction pressures with Discharge pressure must be more than 5 psig (0.3
those shown on the microprocessor bar) higher than the suction pressure.
display.
Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
orator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maxi-
mum value of 100 psig (7.5 bar) The actual suc-
tion pressure must be lower than 100 psig in or-
der to perform this test.
3 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared be-
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. fore proceeding.
4 Check Compressor
a. Check compressor for excessive Replace compressor
vibration or noise

7--21 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.5 START--UP / ENGINE ALARMS
30 FAILED TO RUN MINIMUM TIME
• TRIGGER–ON: The unit has shut down on an alarm 3 times without having run for at least 15
minutes between each shutdown (not including Door shut downs.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Alarms
a. Check for shut down alarms. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm(s)
cleared to continue.

62-61753 7--22
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
31 FAILED TO START -- AUTO MODE
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine has tried to start three times unsuccessfully in the auto start mode.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Fuel Level in Tank.
a. Check fuel gauge on tank. Fill tank as needed.
2 Check For Alarms
a. Check for the following alarms: Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
130 Check engine RPM sensor cleared to continue.
71 Check for Bad F2 or F3 Fuse
40 Check Glow Plugs
35 Check Starter Circuit.
3 Check Fuel Solenoid
b. Check Run Relay LED LED 28 must be ON.
c. Inspect solenoid & connector pins & No damage to solenoid
terminals No damaged or corroded pins
d. Check voltage at the fuel solenoid Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1). Voltage
plug between pin A and ground should be approximately 12 VDC
(running) or between pin B and
ground (cranking)
e. Check for continuity at the fuel Repair wiring.
solenoid plug between pin C and
ground (running)
f. Check resistance of solenoid Refer to Section 2.12
g. Check operation of solenoid Plunger must move in when energized
4 Check Fuel System
a. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
b. Check fuel flow. Unrestricted fuel flow through system.
5 Check Engine Air–intake System
a. Check air filter. Replace if required.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
6 Check For Correct Engine Oil
a. Check for correct oil viscosity Refer to Section 2.8.
(weight) for conditions. Must be correct for ambient conditions.
7 Check Engine Exhaust System
a. Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.
8 Check Engine
a. Check engine compression. Refer to Section 2.8.

7--23 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
34 ENGINE FAILED TO STOP
• TRIGGER–ON: In engine mode, engine is turning more than 500 RPM for 20 seconds after unit
shut down or cycled off or Oil Pressure Switch is closed longer than 20 seconds after unit shut
down or cycle off.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Engine Running
a. Verify that engine is still running. Engine should not be running.
2 Check For Bad Engine RPM Sensor Alarm
a. Check for Alarm 130. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue.
3 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug
between pins A (+) and B (ground). Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
4 Check Engine Oil Pressure Switch
b. Remove switch, connect to an Contacts close on a pressure rise when pressure is
external pressure source and test. above 1.02 bar (15 psig) .
Contacts open on a pressure fall when pressure is
below 0.82 bar (12 psig).

62-61753 7--24
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
35 CHECK STARTER CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine speed fails to reach 50 RPM during 2 start attempts.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Change unit to standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check That Engine Has Actually Started
a. Check that engine starts, runs for a If NO, continue with Step 2 below.
few seconds then shuts off. If YES, check sensor and wiring. Refer to Section
8.4.12
2 Check Starter Relay Circuit
a. Check operation of starter solenoid Energize Circuit. (Refer to Note 2 Page 7.2.)
relay. Relay contacts closed when SSR is grounded.
b. Check relay socket and terminals. No signs of discoloration from overheating.
No corrosion.
c. Check voltage to starter solenoid Negative lead on 85, Positive lead on 86 = 12 VDC.
relay. Negative lead on Gnd, Positive lead on 87 & 30 = 12
VDC.
d. Inspect wiring to starter solenoid No physical damage to wiring or battery cable end.
and starter motor. No damaged or corroded terminals.
e. Check voltage to starter solenoid. Must be above 11.5 VDC.
3 Check Starter
a. Inspect starter and wiring. No damage or corrosion.
Wiring and battery cable must be clean and tight
b. Check resistance of starter motor. Refer to Section 2.12.
c. Check amperage draw of starter. Refer to Section 2.12.
4 Check Battery Voltage
a. Inspect battery cable ends and Must be clean and tight.
posts. No corrosion.
b. Test voltage at battery with unit off. Must be above 11 VDC.
c. Test specific gravity of battery. Must be 1.225 or higher.
d. Perform load test on battery. (Follow battery manufacturer’s procedure and
guidelines.)
5 Check For Correct Engine Oil
a. Check for correct oil viscosity Refer to Section 2.8.
(weight) for conditions. Must be correct for ambient conditions.

7--25 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
36 CHECK COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Engine Coolant Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 129 first) and
coolant temperature is below 0°C (32°F) after the engine has been running for 5 minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only.
Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset when coolant temperature is less than 2.2°C (36°F) or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Coolant Temperature
a. Check temperature of coolant or Must be above 0°C (32°F)
upper radiator hose
2 Check Engine Cooling System
a. Compare actual engine tempera- Temperature must be within ±11.1°C (±20°F).
ture to the microprocessor reading.
b. Test operation of engine coolant Must operate correctly. Refer to engine manual
thermostat.
c. Check water pump operation. No seepage at weep hole. Bearings tight and quiet.
Impeller firmly attached to shaft.
d. Check water pump bypass hose to Must be clear and open.
thermostat housing for internal
blockage.

62-61753 7--26
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
37 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Engine Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 130 first) and:
the microprocessor is calling for low speed and speed being read is less than 1300 or greater than
1550 for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the microprocessor calls for a change from high
speed to low speed, or when the unit first starts)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if the engine speed is within 1320 to 1530 for 60 seconds or
alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Model Number
a. Verify that the model number on the Configure the unit for the correct model number.
Unit Data label matches the model (Refer to Section 5.1.1.)
number shown in the
microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Force Low Speed operation
a. Using Functional Parameters, set Unit will run in low speed. Speed must be within
the Low Speed Start Up Delay to 10 range provided above. Adjust speed linkage as
minutes and start unit. needed. Refer to Section 8.4.9
b. Check LED27 LED27 must be OFF.
3 Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using Refer to Section 2.8 for required speed. Adjust
hand held tachometer. engine linkage setting as needed. Refer to Section
8.4.9
b. Compare actual speed with those Both readings within ± 50 RPM.
shown on display.
4 Check Engine Air–Intake System
a. Check air filter. Replace if required.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
5 Check Engine Fuel System
a. Check fuel tank level. Must have enough fuel to run engine.
b Check fuel lines. Connections are tight and not leaking.
No kinks or sharp bends in the lines.
c Check fuel screen. Fuel screen is located in the inlet fitting to the lift
pump. Screen must be clean.
d Check fuel filters. Fuel filters must be clean and allow full flow of fuel
through them.
6 Check Engine Exhaust System
a. Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.

7--27 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
38 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Engine RPM Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 130 first) and:
the microprocessor is calling for high speed and speed being read is less than 1650 or greater than
2075 for more than 60 seconds (120 seconds when the microprocessor calls for a change from low
speed to high speed, or when the unit first starts)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if the engine speed is within 1670 to 2050 for 60 seconds or
alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Model Number
a. Verify that the model number on the Configure the unit for the correct model number.
Unit Data label matches the model (Refer to Section 5.1.1.)
number shown in the
Microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Force High Speed Operation
a. Place unit in continuous run and The microprocessor will call for High Speed
adjust set point to at least 15 operation.
degrees away from refrigerated
compartment temperature, and a
temperature greater than 5.6°C
(20°F). If the unit does not
immediately go into High Speed,
set the AIRFLOW Functional
Parameter to HIGH.
b. Check Speed Relay LED27. LED27 must be ON. (If LED27 is not on, the
microprocessor is not calling for High Speed.)
3 Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using Refer to Section 2.8.
hand held tachometer. Adjust engine linkage setting as needed.
b. Compare actual speed with those Both readings within ± 50 RPM.
shown on display.
4 Check Engine Air–Intake System
a. Check air filter. Replace if required.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
5 Check Engine Fuel System
a. Check fuel tank level. Must have enough fuel to run engine.
b Check fuel lines. Connections are tight and not leaking.
No kinks or sharp bends in the lines.
c Check fuel screen. Fuel screen is located in the inlet fitting to the lift
pump. Screen must be clean.
d Check fuel filters. Fuel filters must be clean and allow full flow of fuel
through them.
6 Check Engine Exhaust System
a. Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.

62-61753 7--28
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM
• TRIGGER–ON:
“Check Engine RPM Sensor” alarm not active (if so, refer to alarm 130 first) and:
engine speed is less than 1350 or greater than 2050 for 5 minutes or engine speed drops to less
than 1300 for 5 seconds after the engine speed has been greater than 1350 for 3 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if configured for shutdown) engine and unit
shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: Will not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if engine speed is greater than 1350 and less than 2000 for 5
minutes or after 15 minutes if the engine has been shutdown or change unit to standby operation
or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Model Number
a. Verify that the model number on the Configure the unit for the correct model number.
Unit Data label matches the model (Refer to Section 5.1.1.)
number shown in the
microprocessor Unit Data list.
2 Check Engine Fuel System
a. Check fuel tank level. Must have enough fuel to run engine.
b Check fuel lines. Connections are tight and not leaking.
No kinks or sharp bends in the lines.
c Check fuel screen. Fuel screen is located in the inlet fitting to the lift
pump. Screen must be clean.
d Check fuel filters. Fuel filters must be clean and allow full flow of fuel
through them.
3 Check Engine Air–Intake System
a. Check air filter. Replace if required.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
4 Force Low Speed operation
a. Using Functional Parameters, set Unit will run in low speed. Speed must be within
the Low Speed Start Up Delay to 10 range provided above. Adjust speed linkage as
minutes and start unit. needed. Refer to Section 8.4.9
b. Check Speed Relay LED27. LED27 must be OFF.
5 Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using Refer to Section 2.8 for required speed. Adjust
hand held tachometer. engine linkage setting as needed. Refer to Section
8.4.9
b. Compare actual low speed with that Both readings within ± 50 RPM.
shown on display.
Additional steps on the next page.

7--29 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
39 CHECK ENGINE RPM (Continued)
6 Force High Speed Operation
a. Place unit in continuous run and The microprocessor will call for High Speed
adjust set point to at least 15 operation.
degrees away from refrigerated
compartment temperature, and a
temperature greater than 5.6°C
(20°F). If the unit does not
immediately go into High Speed,
set the AIRFLOW Functional
Parameter to HIGH.
b. Check Speed Relay LED. LED27 must be ON. (If LED27 is not on, the
microprocessor is not calling for High Speed.)
7 Check Engine Speed
a. Check actual engine speed using Refer to Section 2.8.
hand held tachometer. Adjust engine linkage setting as needed.
b. Compare actual high speed with Both readings within ± 50 RPM.
that shown on display.

62-61753 7--30
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
40 CHECK GLOW PLUGS
• TRIGGER–ON: During engine startup glow plug amperage is less than 30 Amps, or greater than
16 Amps after 14 seconds of glow time (NOTE: In auto start, this can only occur when the Engine
Coolant Temperature is below 32°F (0°C) and the glow time is configured SHORT.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only. Standby operation: this alarm will not activate in
standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if glow plug amperage is between 30 to 16 amps for at least
14 seconds during the glow cycle or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1. Check Glow Plug Circuit
a. Inspect glow plug relay & socket No signs of discoloration from overheating
No corrosion
b. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
c. Check Non–Running Amps View Current Draw in Data List
Refer to Section 2.12.
d. Check Glow Plug circuit amperage Current Draw = Non–Running Amps + Glow Plug
Amps
e. Check voltage to glow plugs Must be 11 VDC or higher
2. Check Glow Plug Circuit Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals (See No damaged or corroded pins
wiring schematic)
3. Check Glow Plugs
a. Check amp draw of each glow plug Refer to Section 2.12

7--31 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
41 ENGINE STALLED
• TRIGGER–ON: The engine is running, RPM sensor is good, and engine speed is less than 10
RPM; or
The engine is running, RPM sensor alarm is ON, and the Oil Pressure switch contacts are open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine Operation: Engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby Operation: This alarm will not activate in standby operation.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Restart after 15 minutes, or Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Alarm 130 -- Check RPM Sensor
a. Check for alarm 130. When Alarms 130 and 41 occur at the same time,
generally the engine has run out or is running out of
fuel. This causes the engine RPM to surge and drop.
Check fuel tank and add fuel as necessary.
Check fuel lines between the fuel tank and the fuel
pump inlet for drawing air in.
2 Was Engine Shut Off Manually?
a. Check for external cause. Correct problem.
3 Check For Bad F2 Or F3 Fuse Alarm
a. Check for alarm 71. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue.
4 Check Fuel System
a. Check for Alarm 1. Fill tank as needed.
b. Check fuel flow. Unrestricted fuel flow through system.
Fuel not gelled.
c. Check fuel system prime. No air in fuel system.
d. Check fuel system check valve from Check valve must hold fuel and not leak back.
filter to injection pump.
5 Check engine air–intake system
a. Check air filter. Replace if required.
b. Inspect air intake system. Hoses & tubes in good condition.
No kinks or restrictions.
6 Check engine exhaust system
a. Inspect the exhaust system. Must be clear and unobstructed.
7 Check engine
a. Check Injection pump timing. Timing must be correct.
b. Check engine valve adjustment. Rocker arm clearance must be correct.
c. Check engine compression. Compression must be above 400 psig (27.2 bar.)
8 Check refrigeration system
a. Check discharge & suction Must be within normal operating range for conditions.
pressures.

62-61753 7--32
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.6 WARNING / STATUS ALARMS
51 ALTERNATOR (BATTERY CHARGER) NOT CHARGING
• TRIGGER–ON: Unit is running on either engine or standby and there is a current flow of more than
1.0 amp (discharge) between the battery charger and the battery for 3 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: alarm only or (if Alternator Check Shutdown Configuration
is set to YES (configured for shutdown) engine and unit shutdown and
alarm.
Standby operation: alarm only regardless of Configuration setting.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset (if not shut down) when alternator is charging or change unit to
standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Microprocessor Current Sensor
a. Check microprocessor current Power up microprocessor, refer to Note 2, page
value. 7--2. Must be --2.0 to 1.5A with no load.
2 Check Wire Direction Through Current Sensor
a. Visually inspect wire at current Must go through current sensor in the direction of the
sensor. arrow on the sensor toward the F--5 (80A) fuse.
3 Check Battery Charger Wiring
a. Check output & ground wire (unit Negative lead on Ground terminal
OFF.) Positive lead on Output terminal = same as battery
voltage.
b. Check battery charger input. Must be within voltage limits shown in Section 2.11.
Must be between the two red Wires.
c. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

d. Check output and ground wire When the unit is started, battery voltage at the bat-
voltages (unit running.) tery will begin near 12.0 VDC, and slowly rise toward
13.5 VDC as the battery charges.
NOTE: Do not test for voltage at the output connec-
tor of the battery charger without the connector being
connected to the battery. Without the battery con-
nected any reading will be very inaccurate. (Refer to
Section 8 for more information on checking battery
charger.)
4 Check For Add–on Equipment Drawing Excessive Current
a. Check amperage of added–on Total of all add–on components & accessories must
components & accessories. draw less than 20 Amps.
5 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.

7--33 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE
• TRIGGER–ON:
Alarm Only:
Condition One: The refrigerated compartment temperature has been in range [within ±1.5°C
(±2.7°F) for perishable set points or ±1.5°C (±2.7°F) for frozen set points] at least once since the
unit was started and is now further away from set point than the limit set in the functional
parameters for the Out--of--Range Value [ 2°, 3°, or 4°C (4°, 5°, or 7°F)] for 15 continuous minutes
(30 minutes following a defrost cycle) OR

Condition Two: The unit is running in COOL and the Delta T (SAT minus RAT) is not greater than
--0.56°C (--1°F) for 30 continuous minutes or if the unit is running in HEAT and the SAT is not
greater than the RAT for 30 continuous minutes OR

Condition Three: If a shutdown alarm occurs and the RAT temperature is further away from set
point than the limit set in the functional parameters for the Out--of--Range value [ 2°, 3°, or 4°C (4°,
5°, or 7°F)] for more than 30 continuous minutes regardless if the refrigerated compartment
temperature has been in--range or not.

Shut Down & Alarm:

Condition One: When configured for shutdown the unit will shut down when the conditions for
Alarm Only Condition One are met for 45 continuous minutes.

Condition Two: When configured for shutdown the unit will shut down when the conditions for
Alarm Only Condition Two are met for 30 continuous minutes.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation:
If the microprocessor is not configured for shutdown, alarm only.
If the microprocessor is configured for shutdown the engine and unit will shutdown
and alarm.

• RESET CONDITION: Condition 1: Auto Reset when the refrigerated compartment temperature is
within ±1.5°C (±2.7°F) of set point;
Condition 2: Auto Reset when the Delta T is greater than --0.56°C (--1°F); or
For either Condition, alarm may be manually reset via Keypad OR by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
NOTE: For Condition One, the temperature criteria for this alarm is reset, and the refrigerated compartment
temperature must again go In--Range before this alarm can be triggered if any of the following occur:
•Pretrip is started.
•Set point is changed.
•A door switch or remote switch is installed and configured as a door switch, and the switch is opened indicating
that the refrigerated compartment door has been opened.
NOTE: The15, 30, or 45 minute timer is reset and starts again whenever:
•The unit cycles off and restarts in Start--Stop.
•The unit goes into and comes out of Defrost.
NOTE: This alarm does not go into the Inactive alarm List when it becomes inactive or is cleared.
NOTE: This alarm will not be used in Sleep Mode.
Troubleshooting steps begin on the next page.

62-61753 7--34
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
53 BOX TEMP OUT--OF--RANGE (Continued)
1 Check Refrigerated Compartment Doors
a. Inspect all box doors. Must be closed, no air leakage.
2 Defrost Evaporator
a. Initiate Manual Defrost Cycle. Must terminate automatically.
All ice cleared from all evaporator coils.
3 Check For Any Shutdown Alarm(s)
a. Check the Alarm List for any Shut- Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
down Alarms. cleared to continue.
4 Check For Low Refrigerant Pressure Alarm
a. Check for alarm 18. Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
cleared to continue.
5 Check Refrigerant Charge
a. Check refrigerant level in the Generally, level should be between upper & lower
receiver. sight glasses with a refrigerated compartment
temperature of 1.0C (35°F) or lower. refer to Section
8.5.4
6 Check System Pressures
a. Install Manifold Test Set and Suction & Discharge Pressures must have the same
check and compare compressor reading on gauges & on microprocessor display.
discharge & suction pressures
Pressures must be in the normal range for ambient &
with those shown on the
refrigerated compartment temperature conditions.
microprocessor.
NOTE: Microprocessor suction (CSP) and evap-
orator (EVOP) pressure readings have a maxi-
mum value of 7.5 bar (100 psig). The actual suc-
tion pressure must be lower in order to perform
this test.
7 Check Evaporator Section
a. Check evaporator section, return Refer to Section 9.4.10
air bulkhead, air chute, cleanliness
of evap. coil and airflow.
8 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
9 Check For Low Delta--T
a. Read Delta--T from Unit Data List. In Cool, the Delta--T reading must be greater than
--0.56°C (--1°F).
Note for Delta--T readings a higher number after the
“--” sign is “greater than”. For example, --3°C is
greater than --2°C.
In Heat the Delta--T must be greater than 0 (SAT
must be higher than RAT).

7--35 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
54 DEFROST NOT COMPLETE
• TRIGGER–ON: Defrost cycle did not complete within 45 minutes
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only. While this alarm is active, the Defrost
Timer will be set to initiate a defrost cycle 90 minutes (1.5 hours) of unit running time after the alarm
comes on.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle is started again, or alarm may be manually
reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Heat & Sensor Alarms
a. Check the Alarm List for alarms 91, Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
92 &/or 124 cleared to continue.
1 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
2 Check For Defective Defrost Sensor Location/Correct Installation
a. Has sensor fallen from location? Must be corrected to continue.
3 Check Evaporator Fan Contactor
a. Check that contactor is not Must de--energize evaporator fan during defrost.
energized and that the contacts are
not stuck closed when in defrost.
4 Check Evaporator Heater Current Draw
a. Check Heater amp draw for
HTCON1 Verify that all three actual amperage readings for
each component are within 10% of each other, and
b. Check Heater amp draw for are within the values shown in Section 2.11.
HTCON2

62-61753 7--36
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
55 CHECK DEFROST AIR SWITCH
• TRIGGER–ON: The defrost air switch has called for a defrost cycle within 8 minutes of a defrost
termination for 2 consecutive defrost cycles. (The air switch contacts were closed continuously for
15 seconds before the defrost cycle was started.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only. While this alarm is active, the defrost
air switch will NOT be used to initiate a defrost cycle; however the Defrost Timer will initiate a
defrost cycle 90 minutes after the alarm comes on, and the manual defrost switch will remain
operative.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when defrost cycle terminates correctly, and the air switch does
not call for a defrost cycle within the 8 minutes following defrost termination, or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug
between pins B (+) and A (ground). Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
1 Check Defrost Air Switch
a. Check switch operation and setting. Refer to Section 8.6.13
2 Check Air Switch Hoses
a. Inspect air hoses to switch. No kinks or other obstructions.
No holes.
Connected to correct nipple.
3 Check Condition Of Evaporator
a. Visually inspect evaporator Coil must be clean and cleared of ice or any other
following defrost. material.
4 Perform Pretrip
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
5 Check Evaporator Pressure Drop
a. Check pressure reading by Check evaporator section, return air bulkhead, air
connecting Magnehelic Gage to chute, cleanliness of evap. coil and airflow. Refer to
switch tubing. Section 9.4.10
6 Check Evaporator Contactor
a. Check Evap Fan operation in Must disengage fan.
defrost.
7 Check Condition Of Refrigerated Compartment & Load
a. Check condition of refrigerated Doors must be closed, and door seals must seal and
compartment doors & seals. prevent outside air from leaking in.
b. Check condition of product. If it is
warm and moist, frequent defrost
cycles can be expected.

7--37 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
57 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 1
58 CHECK REMOTE SWITCH 2
• TRIGGER–ON: Microprocessor has received an alarm trigger signal from the switch (contacts open
or contacts closed depending on Configuration) for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only, or may be configured to shut unit down. (Shut down may be overrid-
den in the Functional Parameters)
• RESET CONDITION:
Alarm Only: Auto Reset after the alarm trigger signal is removed for more than five seconds.
Unit Shutdown: Auto Reset after three minutes (minimum off time for Remote switch shutdown condi-
tion) and the alarm trigger signal is removed more than five seconds.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Determine what Remote Switch is controlled by.
a. Remote Switch may be connected Locate Remote Switch
to a refrigerated compartment door,
or some other device and used to
remotely control the unit.
2 Check to see if compartment side or rear door is open, or if the device that the
remote switch is connected to is set to trigger the alarm.
a. Inspect compartment doors. Compartment door(s) must be closed
b. Check switch. Must be in the position that allows unit to operate.
3 Check Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug
between pins B (+) and A (ground). Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
c. Locate and inspect 10-way Connector must have cap on,
connector for optional sensors and No corrosion or moisture inside connector.
switches. Check for power between terminals A (+) & B
(Ground). Voltage should be approximately 12VDC.
Repair wiring as required.
4 Check Configurations
a. Verify that Configuration is set for Must be correct for type of remote switch being used.
the type of switch being used (i.e.
when door is open, switch contacts
are closed; etc.)
NOTE: In the event a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, the switch may be configured OFF
temporarily. Refer to Section 5.1.1 -- Configurations.

62-61753 7--38
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
59 DATALOGGER (DATACORDER) NOT RECORDING
• TRIGGER–ON: No data is being recorded by the data recorder.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Clear Alarm
a. Clear Active Alarm(s). Alarms Clear.
b. Check for Active Alarm If Inactive, download all data & retain.
reoccurring. If Active, go to next step.
2 Microprocessor Defective
a. Replace microprocessor Refer to Section 5.4

7--39 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
60 DATALOGGER (DATA RECORDER) TIME WRONG
• TRIGGER–ON: The real time clock in the Data Recorder does not contain a valid date.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the Data Recorder Real Time Clock is reset, or alarm may
be manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Real Time Clock
a. Check Real Time Clock in the Data Must show correct date and time.
List.
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Turn main switch off for 30 seconds, Microprocessor powers up OK.
then turn on.
b. Check for valid Real Time Clock Reset “Set Time” Configuration. Refer to Section
reading in Data List. 5.1.1.
c. Real Time Clock can not be Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4
changed.

62-61753 7--40
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
61 DOOR OPEN
• TRIGGER–ON: Refrigerated compartment door has been open for more than five seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only, or may be configured to shut unit down or operate the unit in Low
Engine Speed.
• RESET CONDITION:
Alarm Only: Auto Reset after the door has been closed for more than five seconds.
Shutdown: Auto Reset after three minutes (minimum off time for door open condition) and the door has
been closed for more than five seconds.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check To See If Refrigerated Compartment Side Or Rear Door Is Open
a. Inspect refrigerated compartment Refrigerated compartment door(s) must be closed.
doors.
2 Check Door Switch
a. Check switch operation. Contacts must Open & Close as door is opened and
closed.
3 Check Configurations
a. Verify that Configuration is set for Must be correct for type of door switch.
the type of switch being used (i.e.
when Door is open, switch contacts
are closed; etc.)
4 Check Switch Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug
between pins A (+) and B (ground). Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
c. Locate and inspect 10-way Connector must have cap on,
connector for optional sensors and No corrosion or moisture inside connector.
switches. Check for power between terminals A (+) & B
(Ground). Voltage should be approximately 12VDC.
Repair wiring as required.
NOTE: In the event a defective switch that can not be repaired or replaced, the switch may be configured OFF
temporarily. Refer to Section 5.1.1 -- Configurations.

7--41 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.7 ELECTRICAL ALARMS
71 BAD F2 OR F3 FUSE
• TRIGGER–ON: F2 &/or F3 has been open for more than 2 seconds: F2, F3
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only. If the engine shut off, refer to troubleshooting
steps below to correct.
Standby operation: Additional verification required if the “No Power” configu
ration is set for “Installed and Shut Down” the refrigeration system will shut
down with the alarm on and PSCON still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (Refer to Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active
alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Unit Operation
a. Did engine shut down? Yes, Check F3.
No, Check F2.
2 Check Fuses
a. Locate blown fuse(s). Will have open circuit.
b. Verify fuse size. Refer to Section 2.13.
Must be correct rating for circuit. (See wiring schem-
atic. Section 10.)
c. Inspect fuse & fuse holder. Terminals tight; No signs of overheating, melting or
discoloration.
3 Check Run Relay Circuit
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
Check for voltage between Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
MPQC--8 and ground.
b. Check for voltage between Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
MPQC--4 and ground.
4 Check Speed Relay Circuit
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
Check for voltage between Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
MPQC--8 and ground.
b. Check for voltage between Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
MPQC--3 and ground.

62-61753 7--42
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
73 NO POWER--CHECK POWER CORD
• TRIGGER–ON: In standby mode AND no AC power
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: this alarm will not activate in engine operation.
Standby operation: if the “No Power” Configuration is set for “Installed and
Shut Down” the refrigeration system will shut down with the alarm on and
PSCON still energized.
If the “No Power: Configuration is set for “Switch to Engine” and the “No
Power--Switch to Diesel” functional parameter is set to “Yes”, the unit will re
main off for 5 minutes, then restart on Engine power.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when AC power is present AND Configuration is set to shutdown
or if the user changes the switch to standby operation or alarm may be manually reset via keypad
or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Circuit Breaker On The Main Supply
a. Check circuit breaker. 30A supply circuit breaker -- Must be on.
b. Check the voltage at the plug. Nominal 380V/3P/50Hz.
2 Check Power Cord
a. Inspect connections in the socket Connections must be tight.
and the plug.
b. Inspect the cable. Cable must not be frayed, cut or damaged.
3 Check For Power In The Control Box
a. Check for voltage at PSCON All three readings must be nominal 380V.
L1--L2, L2--L3, L1--L3.
b. Check for voltage at PSCON2 All three readings must be nominal 380V.
L1--L2, L2--L3, L1--L3.
4 Check Connections
a. Check for bad connections in the Connections and wire crimps must be tight.
control box.
5 Check Phase Reversal Module (PRM)
a. Check for voltage at 5MP04. Must be +12 VDC.
b. Check Phase Reversal Module for Replace PRM if defective.
correct operation.

7--43 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
75 COMP MOTOR OVERLOAD
• TRIGGER–ON: If alarm A22, A27 and/or A28 was triggered with current below 5.5 amps, this alarm
will also trigger or on restart from alarm A22, A27 and/or A28 trigger on if compressor current does
not rise above 1 amp.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm. Standby operation:
refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON still energized.

NOTE
The compressor motor is fitted with an internal line break that may have caused
this alarm. The line break is an auto reset device. Additional time may be required
to reduce winding temperature to the reset temperature of this device.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto reset after 30 minutes alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by
turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1. Check For A--22. A27 and/or A28 (Check Download)
a. A22, A27 and/or A28 will always Review steps for triggered alarms and correct if nec-
cause this alarm to activate essary.
2. Check Compressor Operation
a. Start unit. Check voltage and current on each phase, must be
greater than 0 and less than 16 amps. (Compressor
is operating.)
3. Check Compressor Motor Contactor
a. Check condition and wiring Repair/replace as required.

4. Check Motor Windings

a. Check phase to phase Reading as specified in Section 2.11.

62-61753 7--44
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED
• TRIGGER–ON: One or both of the condenser fan motor Internal Protectors (IP--CDM1 or 2) circuit
is open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when motor overload input is within limits, or change to engine
operation, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Condenser Fan Blades for Free Operation
a. Visually inspect condenser fan Fan blade must be in good condition.
blades for any foreign material or No material obstructing movement
damage or anything that will pre- No ice build--up preventing blade rotation.
vent the blade and motor from turn-
ing freely
2 Check For Power At 4MP2
a. If 12VDC. Alarm should have cleared itself.
b. If no power (0VDC.) Continue with step 2 below.
3 Check IPC circuit
a. Check MPQC9. There should be 12 VDC from MPQC9 to Ground.
b. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
c. Unplug the connector to condenser 12 VDC between pin 4 and pin 5 indicates the open
fan motor 1 (CDM1) and check circuit is in the IP for CDM1.
voltage on pins 4--5 in the engine
harness connector.
d. Test continuity through CDM1 IP at Should be 0 Ohms. If condenser fan motor 1 is ex-
pins 4--5 in the fan motor harness tremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IP
connector. continuity.
e. Test continuity through IPC. Should be 0 Ohms. If either condenser fan motor is
extremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IPC
continuity.
f. Test IP circuit from condenser fan 12 VDC at 4MP2.
motor wires to microprocessor.
4 Check Condenser Fan Motor Contactor
a. Inspect the wire connections to No signs of overheating of the contactor. Wiring is
the contactor. routed correctly to the contactor.
b. Check tightness of the contactor Tighten with screwdriver and check for discoloration
wire connections. of wires.
5 Perform Pretrip
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
Additional steps on the next page.

7--45 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
76 CONDENSER MOTOR OVERHEATED (Continued)
6 Check Condenser Fan Motors
a. Disconnect power plug at motor. Test IP circuit for continuity using ohmmeter.
If open, remove and replace motor.
If closed, then an intermittent IP circuit is suspect.
Check phase to phase and phase to ground for short
or open circuits. Refer to Section 2.11.
If motor tests good, check the DC IP circuit to micro-
processor.
7 Check Motor Operation
a. Turn the unit ON. Check current on each phase (must be less than
shown on Section 2.11.)
Check voltage on each phase (must be within voltage
limits shown in Section 2.11.)

62-61753 7--46
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
77 EVAP (EVAPORATOR) MOTOR OVERHEATED
• TRIGGER–ON: The evaporator fan motor Internal Protectors (IP--EVM1 AND 2) is open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Evaporator will shut down.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset after a 15 minute off time when motor overload input is within
limits, or change to engine operation, or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the
unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Evaporator Fan Blades for Free Operation
a. Visually inspect evaporator fan for Blower wheel must be in good condition.
any foreign material or damage or No sticks or other material obstructing its movement
anything that will prevent the blade No ice build--up preventing blade rotation.
and motor from turning freely
2 Check For Power At 4MP3
b. If 12VDC Alarm should have cleared itself.
a. If no power (0VDC) Continue with step 2 below.
3 Check IPC Circuit
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
b. Unplug the connector to the evapo- 12 VDC between pin 4 in the engine harness connec-
rator fan motor and check voltage tor and Ground.
on IP--EVM (white) wire.
c. Check MPQC9. There should be 12 VDC from MPQC9 to Ground.
d. Test continuity through IPC. Should be 0 Ohms. If the evaporator fan motor is
extremely warm, allow it to cool off, then recheck IPC
continuity.
e. Test IP circuit from evaporator fan 12 VDC at 4MP3
motor junction box to microproces-
sor.
4 Check Evaporator Fan Motor Contactor
a. Inspect the wire connections to No signs of overheating of the contactor. Wiring is
the contactor. routed correctly to the contactor.
b. Check tightness of the contactor Tighten with screwdriver and check for discoloration
wire connections of wires.
5 Perform Pretrip
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
Additional steps on the next page.

7--47 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
77 EVAP MOTOR OVERHEATED (Continued)
6 Check Evaporator Fan Motor
a. Disconnect power plug at motor Test IP circuit for continuity using ohmmeter
If open, remove and replace motor
If closed, then an intermittent IP circuit is suspect.
Check phase to phase and phase to ground for short
or open circuits. Refer to Section 2.11.
If motor tests good, check the DC IP circuit to micro-
processor.
7 Check Motor Operation
a. Turn the unit ON Check current on each phase (must be less than
shown on Section 2.11).
Check voltage on each phase (must be at within lim-
its shown in Section 2.11.)

62-61753 7--48
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
89 CHECK REMOTE AUTO LIGHT
• TRIGGER–ON: Remote Auto light current (amp) draw is higher than 0.8 Amps.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Auto light current (amp) draw is normal, or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check 2--Light Bar Wiring
a. Inspect Remote 2-- Light Bar No damaged or corroded pins.
connector and wiring harness.
b. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)
2 Check 2--Light Bar
a. Check operation of 2--Light Bar Refer to Note 2 on page 7--2

91 CHECK HTCON1 RELAY COIL

• TRIGGER–ON: Heater Contactor 1 Relay (HTCON1R) coil current is excessive
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check HTCON1R
a. Inspect relay coil and terminals. No damage to coil.
No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check relay coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check HTCON1R Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check HTCON1R Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

7--49 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
92 CHECK HTCON2 RELAY COIL
• TRIGGER–ON: Heater contactor 2 (HTCON2) coil current is excessive
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check HTCON2
a. Inspect contactor coil and No damage to coil
terminals No damaged or corroded pins
b. Check contactor coil resistance Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check HTCON2 Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check HTCON2 Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins
wiring schematic Section 10.)

62-61753 7--50
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
93 CHECK START UP BUZZER
• TRIGGER–ON: The Buzzer circuit is shorted. (The Buzzer output from the microprocessor is neg-
ative, so the circuit will not be shorted to ground, but is shorted either within the Buzzer itself, or to
a positive wire.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Buzzer amp draw is normal, or alarm may be manually
reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Buzzer
a. Inspect Buzzer & wire No damage to buzzer.
connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check resistance of buzzer. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check Buzzer Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)
3 Check Buzzer Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.

94 CHECK COMP CONTACTOR 1 (COMPRESSOR CONTACTOR RELAY)

• TRIGGER–ON: Compressor Contactor Relay (CCONR) coil current is excessive.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check CCONR
a. Inspect relay coil and terminals. No damage to coil.
No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check relay coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check CCONR Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the coil. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check CCONR Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

7--51 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
95 CHECK CDCON RELAY COIL
• TRIGGER–ON: Condenser Contactor Coil (CDCON) current is excessive
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check CDCON
a. Inspect contactor coil and No damage to coil.
terminals. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check CDCON Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the coil. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check CDCON Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

96 CHECK GENCONR RELAY COIL

• TRIGGER–ON: Generator Contactor Relay coil (GENCONR) current is excessive
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check GENCONR
a. Inspect relay coil and terminals. No damage to coil.
No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check GENCONR Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the coil. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check GENCONR Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

62-61753 7--52
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
98 CHECK HIGH TEMP THERMOSTAT (EVHTS)
• TRIGGER–ON: With the SROS in the START / RUN position the EVHTS circuit is open.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm AND no heat allowed.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the EVHTS circuit is closed for 15 minutes, or alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Evaporator Area For High Temperature
a. Check Evaporator temperature us- EVHTS opens when the temperature of the evapora-
ing a test thermometer. tor becomes very high (Refer to Section 2.10 for set-
tings). (For example, if the heaters are on when the
fan is not running.)
2 Check EVHTS Wiring
a. Inspect switch & connector pins & No physical damage to harness.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins.
Section 10.)
b. Check switch circuit Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Page 7--1).
Check for voltage at the switch plug
between pins A (+) and B (ground). Voltage should be approximately 12 VDC.
3 Check Switch Contacts
a. Contacts must be closed when Must be 0 (zero) Ohms. Cannot be opened (infinite
temperature is normal. Unplug ohms) or shorted to ground.
EVHTS and check for continuity.

99 CHECK STANDBY (POWER SUPPLY CONTACTOR RELAY) COIL

• TRIGGER–ON: Power Supply Contactor Relay (PSCONR) current is excessive.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the PSCONR Coil current draw is normal, or alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check PSCONR
a. Inspect relay coil and terminals. No damage to coil.
No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check relay coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms), shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground.
2 Check PSCONR Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the coil. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check PSCONR Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

7--53 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
100 OVERLOAD/GROUND FAULT
• TRIGGER–ON: The SROS is in the START / RUN position and the overload and ground fault
detector is reading more than 40 Amps on any A/C current leg OR there is A/C voltage leaking to
ground of more than 150 mAmps.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: engine and unit shutdown and alarm.
Standby operation: refrigeration system shutdown and alarm with PSCON
still energized.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset in engine mode. Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or,
alarm may be reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Overload Ground Fault Detector (OGF) LED
a. Check the LED. LED is Off -- Circuit Overload is detected. Start with
Step 2 below.
LED is On -- Ground Fault is detected. Start with
Step 3 below.

2 Check For Electrical Overload

a. Check high voltage amp draw from Must be less than 40 Amps.
GENCON if running on engine or
PSCON2 if running on standby.
3 Check For High Voltage Short To Ground
a. Check resistance from from T1, T2 Reading must be greater than 25.000 Ohms.
and T3 of ALL High voltage
contactors to ground.
b. Perform Megohmmeter test on all Disconnect from standby power source if required.
high voltage circuits. Follow Magohmmeter manufacturers instructions.
4 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Note during which test Alarm 100 occurs.
Pretrip & check for any new alarms.
b. Further test circuit from Steps Use a megohmmeter to test.
above.
5 Check Overload / Ground Fault Device
a. With the engine OFF and standby Must have 12 VDC at HC19 and 2MP26.
power disconnected, place the
SROS in the START / RUN position.

62-61753 7--54
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
109 CHECK EVCON COIL
• TRIGGER–ON: Evaporator fan motor contactor (EVCON) current is excessive
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check EVCON
a. Inspect evaporator fan contactor No damage to coil
coil and terminals No damaged or corroded pins
b. Check contactor coil resistance Refer to Section 2.12. Cannot be opened (infinite
ohms); Shorted (Zero Ohms) or shorted to ground
2 Check EVCON Current Draw
a. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
3 Check EVCON
a. Inspect harness & control box No physical damage to harness.
connector pins & terminals. (See No damaged or corroded pins.
wiring schematic Section 10.)

7--55 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
112 CHECK BYPASS (Unloader) CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Unloader Solenoid Valve coil current draw is higher than 2.0 Amps.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the USV coil current draw is normal, or alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Coil Wiring
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & No physical damage to coil.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
2 Check Current Draw
b. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
c. Check for voltage at the coil plug Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
3 Check Coil
a. Check coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12 for resistance value.
4 Check Circuits With Another Coil
a. Substitute known good coil and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new coil if neces-
sary.)

62-61753 7--56
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
113 CHECK ECONOMIZER CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Economizer Solenoid Valve coil current draw is higher than 2.0 Amps.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the USV coil current draw is normal, or alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Coil Wiring
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & No physical damage to coil.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
2 Check Current Draw
b. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
c. Check for voltage at the coil plug Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
3 Check Coil
a. Check coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12 for resistance value.
4 Check Circuits With Another Coil
a. Substitute known good coil and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new coil if neces-
sary.)

7--57 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
114 CHECK LIV CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Liquid Injection Solenoid Valve coil current draw is higher than 2.0 Amps.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when the USV coil current draw is normal, or alarm may
be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Coil Wiring
a. Inspect coil & connector pins & No physical damage to coil.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
2 Check Current Draw
b. Use Component Test Mode to test Component FET or board LED (refer to Table 5--1)
actual current draw of the circuit. must be illuminated.
(Refer to Section 5.1.2.) View current draw in Data List.
Refer to Section 2.12 for normal current values.
c. Check for voltage at the coil plug Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
3 Check Coil
a. Check coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12 for resistance value.
4 Check Circuits With Another Coil
a. Substitute known good coil and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new coil if neces-
sary.)

62-61753 7--58
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.8 SENSOR ALARMS
121 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR (AAT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47° to +70° C (--53 to +158°F)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset
via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

7--59 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
122 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR (RAT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 to +70° C (--53 to +158°F)
• UNIT CONTROL:Engine and standby operation:
If Alarm 123 -- Check Supply Air Sensor -- is not active: alarm only and switch to supply air control.
If Alarm 123 is active enter Default Mode (refer to Section 4.7.2).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Return Air Sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually
reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

62-61753 7--60
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
123 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR (SAT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 to +70° C (--53 to +158°F)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby:
If Alarm 122 is not active and functional parameter Temperature Control is set for Supply Air and
the set point for is in the perishable range: alarm only and switch to return air control.
If Alarm 123 is active enter Default Mode (refer to Section 4.7.2).
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

7--61 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
124 CHECK DEFROST TERMINATION 1 SENSOR (DTT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 to +70° C (--53 to +158°F).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby:
If Alarm 122 is not active: Alarm and RAT will be used for defrost initiation and a heat defrost will
end after 10 minutes.
If Alarms 122 and 123 are also both active: alarm and defrost will not be allowed.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

62-61753 7--62
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
125 CHECK COMPRESSOR DISCHARGE SENSOR (CDT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --40 to +200°C (–40 to +392°F)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually reset
via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

7--63 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
126 CHECK FUEL SENSOR (FLS)
• TRIGGER–ON: The fuel level signal is less than 2% for 30 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only.
Standby operation: This alarm does not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when fuel level signal above 4% for 30 seconds or, alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Low Fuel Level
a. Check fuel level in the tank. Add fuel as needed.
2 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B If OK, go to step e. If not, continue with this step.
(ground).
Connector must have cap on,
d. Locate and inspect 10-way No corrosion or moisture inside connector.
connector for optional sensors and Check for power between terminals A (+) & B
switches. (Ground). Voltage should be approximately 12VDC.
Repair wiring as required.
e. Reconnect the fuel level sensor Voltage should be greater than 0.24 VDC and less
plug. Check for voltage between than 5 VDC, unless the sensor is completely dry.
2MP--4 and ground.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if nec-
essary)
NOTE: If new sensor is not available, the sensor may be configured OFF temporarily. Refer to Section 5.1.1 --
Configurations.)

62-61753 7--64
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
127 CHECK SUCTION TEMPERATURE SENSOR (CST)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 to +70° C.(--53 to +158°F)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

128 AMPS MEASURE

• TRIGGER–ON: The compressor is on and AC Current Sensor 1 or 2 is less than 5 amps for 10
seconds OR If the difference between AC Current 1 and AC Current 2 is greater than 10 amps for
10 seconds.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Change unit to standby operation when AC Current Sensor 1 and 2 is greater
than 7 amps for 5 minutes AND difference between AC Current 1 and AC Current 2 is less than 7
amps for 5 minutes OR alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then
back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Configurations
a. Check the NO POWER This alarm will occur when NOT INSTALLED is se-
Configuration. lected and the Diesel / Electric Switch is set to Elec-
tric, and the SROS is placed in the START / RUN
position.
2 Perform Pretrip Check
a. Clear Active Alarm list, then run Any active alarms must be corrected and cleared
Pretrip & check for any new alarms. before proceeding.
3 Check Current Draw
a. Check current at power wires. Must be 1.0 Amp of reading in Data List.
b. Check A/C amps with compressor Must be greater than 5 Amps.
running.
c. Compare A/C Amp readings Maximum allowable difference is 10 Amps.
between L1--L2--L3.

7--65 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
129 CHECK ENG COOLANT SENSOR (ENCT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --50 to +130°C (--58 to +266°F).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine operation: Alarm Only.
Standby operation: This alarm does not activate in standby.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset or alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit
off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 Page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if nec-
essary)

62-61753 7--66
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
130 CHECK ENGINE RPM SENSOR (ENRPM)
• TRIGGER–ON: Engine mode only. This alarm does not activate in standby.
In Auto Start, after the 2nd or 3rd start attempt the Engine Oil Pressure switch is closed (oil
pressure good) and engine speed sensed at less than 1000 rpm
NOTE: This alarm can only be triggered during the engine starting sequence and during the 20 sec-
onds immediately following.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only and engine will be considered running.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset in Auto Start when engine speed is greater than 1,000 rpm or
alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Alarm List
a. Check for Alarm 41. When both Alarm 41 and Alarm 130 are activated,
this is an indication the engine may have run out of
fuel.
2 Check Sensor
a. Check sensor and wiring. Refer to Section 8.4.12
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if nec-
essary)

7--67 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
131 CHECK EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (EVOT)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 to +70°C (--53 to +158°F).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby: alarm only and superheat for EVXV will be calculated using
SAT.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when sensor is in range or, alarm may be manually
reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (refer to reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see
if any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (refer to wiring No damage, moisture or corroded pins in plug.
schematic Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B
(ground).
2 Check Sensor
a. Check Sensor resistance. (Refer Refer to Section 8.7.7 for complete table of tempera-
to Note 3 page 7--1.) tures and resistance values.
3 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if ne-
cessary.)

62-61753 7--68
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
133 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 (REMSN1)
134 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 (REMSN2)
135 CHECK REMOTE TEMPERATURE SENSOR 3 (REMSN3)
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor is not within the range of --47 °to +70°C (--53 to +158°F).
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when Remote Temperature Sensor 1 is in range or, alarm may be
manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Sensor Wiring
a. Inspect sensor & connector pins & No physical damage to sensor.
terminals. (See wiring schematic No damaged or corroded pins in plug.
Section 10.)
b. Energize sensor circuit. Refer to Note 2 Page 7--1.
c. Check for voltage at the sensor Voltage should be approximately12VDC.
plug between pins A (+) and B If OK, go to step e. If not, continue with this step.
(ground).
Connector must have cap on,
d. Locate and inspect 10-way No corrosion or moisture inside connector.
connector for optional sensors and Check for power between terminals A (+) & B
switches. (Ground). Voltage should be approximately 12VDC.
Repair wiring as required.
2 Check Circuits With Another Sensor
a. Substitute known good sensor and
clear alarm. Start unit and run for
30 seconds.
b. Check to see if alarm re-occurs. Alarm should not come on. (Install new sensor if nec-
essary)
NOTE: If new sensor is not available, the sensor may be configured OFF temporarily. Refer to Section 5.1.1 --
Configurations.)

7--69 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.9 Pretrip ALARMS
P141 PRETRIP STOPPED BY USER
• TRIGGER–ON: Pretrip cycle was stopped by user before the Pretrip cycle ended automatically.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on
again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check For Any Pretrip Alarms
a. Scroll the alarm list for any Active Alarm conditions must be corrected and the alarm
Pretrip alarms. cleared to continue.
2 Rerun Pretrip Check (If Desired)
a. Clear Active Alarm List, then run Unit running in Pretrip. Check for any new alarms.
Pretrip & check for any new alarms.
b. Allow to terminate automatically. Pretrip cycle operates normally.

P145 CHECK SPEED SOLENOID CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Solenoid coil did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Check high speed operation -- refer to alarm 38

P151 CHECK GLOW PLUG CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Glow plug circuit did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Check glow plug operation -- refer to alarm 40

P152 CHECK FUEL SOLENOID CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Solenoid coil did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or Alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check fuel solenoid operation -- refer to alarm 31 step 3

P153 CHECK RETURN AIR SENSOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 122

62-61753 7--70
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P154 CHECK SUPPLY AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 123

P155 CHECK COOLANT TEMP SENSOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 129

P156 CHECK BYPASS (UNLOADER SOLENOID VALVE) CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Solenoid coil did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check bypass (unloader) solenoid valve -- refer to alarm 112

P157 CHECK BATTERY CURRENT

• TRIGGER–ON: With all circuits off, current flow of more than 1.5 amps is detected in the electrical
circuits.
NOTE: If this alarm occurs, Pretrip Test #2 will not be performed. Pretrip will need to be
restarted to continue testing.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check No Load Current Draw
a. Energize circuit (refer to Note 2 Reading is less than 1.5 Amps.
Page 7--1). Observe current draw
on microprocessor display.
b. Disconnect F5 wire and remove Without wire in loop, reading should be 0 +/-- 1 amp.
from inside current sensing loop.
Reconnect at F5 and place SROS in
the ON position.
2 Check Individual Circuits
a. Isolate individual circuits and test Must be in range. (Refer to Section 2.12.)
amp draw.
3 Check for parasitic loads.
a. Check for electrical loads that are Check for non--factory installed devices such as lift
drawing current with all circuits OFF gates, inside lights, satellite systems, etc. These
devices must be wired so as to not draw current
during pretrip testing.

7--71 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P158 CHECK AMBIENT AIR SENSOR
• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 121

P159 CHECK DEFROST TERMINATION 1 SENSOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 124

P160 CHECK DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 125

P161 CHECK SUCTION TEMPERATURE SENSOR

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 127

P169 CHECK ECONOMIZER CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Solenoid coil did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check economizer solenoid valve -- refer to alarm 113

P170 CHECK LIV (liquid Injection Valve) CIRCUIT

• TRIGGER–ON: Solenoid coil did not draw expected amperage during test
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check economizer solenoid valve -- refer to alarm 114

62-61753 7--72
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P174 CHECK LOW SPEED RPM
• TRIGGER–ON speed was not within expected range during test or speed did not return to expected
range following transition back from high speed test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”..
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Check microprocessor speed control and engine -- refer to alarm 37

P175 CHECK HIGH SPEED RPM

• TRIGGER–ON speed was not within expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”..
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Check microprocessor speed control and engine -- refer to alarm 38

P177 CHECK EVAPORATOR SUPERHEAT

• TRIGGER–ON: Superheat control by the EVXV was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”..
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Perform diagnostic testing and service of valve as required -- refer to Section 8.5.4

P180 CHECK SUCTION MODULATING VALVE

• TRIGGER–ON: Suction pressure control by the valve was not within the expected range during
test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”..
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
1 Perform diagnostic testing and service of valve as required -- refer to Section 8.6.7

P186 CHECK EVAPORATOR OUTLET TEMPERATURE

• TRIGGER–ON: Sensor reading was not within the expected range during test.
• UNIT CONTROL: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
1 Check Sensor -- refer to alarm 131

7--73 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT
This device is checked twice in Pretrip -- once in Test 2 and again in Test 8.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the HTCON1R relay coil are 0.05 to 1.0 Amps (12 VDC).
The circuit tests outside this range.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 8: Normal amps for the 1HTCON1 heaters are 1.0 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).
The circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Determine Which Test Triggered This Alarm
a. Review active alarm list. Make a note of all alarms.
b. Clear active alarm list.
c. Restart and monitor Pretrip. Stop Pretrip during Test #3 by holding = Key for 6
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2 thru 4 If alarm is
187. not present, follow steps 5 thru 10.
2 Check 1HTCON1R
a. Inspect heater contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. Wire connections to contactor coil are tight.
No damaged or corroded wires to contactor coil.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12.
3 Check 1HTCON1R Amp Draw
a. Check HTCON1R amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
12 VDC
Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
CIR- draw in Data List.
CUIT
4 Check 1HTCON1R Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box con- See Note 2 & Note 5 Page 7.2.
nector pins & terminals. (See wiring No physical damage to harness.
schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.
5 Check Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
a. Inspect for open EVHTS per wiring If open, replace switch as required.
schematic Section 10.
Additional steps on the next page.

62-61753 7--74
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P187 CHECK HEATER 1 CIRCUIT (Continued)
6 Check Amp Draw of 1HTCON1 Heater Circuit
a. With the unit running and calling for Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for all
Heat, use a clamp on ammeter to three legs.
check the current draw of all 3 legs.
b. Check fuses for heater elements. F10, F11, and F12 must not be blown.

c. Check voltage at 1HTCON1 con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
tacts. L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
7 Check Heater Elements
a. Check heater elements with the unit No visual physical damage.
460 Off. Remove and replace if damaged.
VAC
b. Check heater element Ohms. Check from “T” terminals on HTCON1 contactor. See
CIR-
Section 2.11 for correct Ohm ratings.
CUIT
8 Check Heater Element Connections
a. Inspect high voltage heater con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nections at evaporator. discoloration.
Remove, repair, or replace if required.
b. Disconnect heater element plug. Heater resistance per Section 2.11.
Remove and replace heaters if required.
a. Inspect plugs, plug seal and con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nectors. discoloration.
Remove and replace if required.
9 Verify Accuracy of AC Current Sensor
a. Place SROS in the OFF position. Must have 0 AC1 Amps and 0 AC2 Amps in Unit
Put microprocessor in PC Mode. Data List.
See Note 5 Page 7.2.

7--75 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT
This device is checked twice in Pretrip -- once in Test 2 and again in Test 8.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the 1HTCON2 contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12
VDC). The circuit tests outside this range.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 8: Normal amps for the 1HTCON2 heaters are 1.0 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).
The circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Determine Which Test Triggered This Alarm
a. Review active alarm list. Make a note of all alarms.
b. Clear active alarm list.
c. Restart and monitor Pretrip. Stop Pretrip during Test #3 by holding = Key for 6
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2 thru 4 If alarm is
188. not present, follow steps 5 thru 10.
2 Check 1HTCON2
a. Inspect heater contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12.
3 Check 1HTCON2 Amp Draw
a. Check 1HTCON2 amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
12 VDC Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
CIR- draw in Data List.
CUIT 4 Check 1HTCON2 Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box con- See Note 2 & Note 5 on Page 7.2.
nector pins & terminals. (See wiring No physical damage to harness.
schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.
5 Check Evaporator High Temperature Switch (EVHTS)
a. Inspect for open EVHTS per wiring If open, replace switch as required.
schematic Section 10.
Additional steps on the next page.

62-61753 7--76
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P188 CHECK HEATER 2 CIRCUIT (Continued)
6 Check Amp Draw of 1HTCON2 Heater Circuit
a. With the unit running and calling for Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for all
Heat, use a clamp on ammeter to three legs.
check the current draw of all 3 legs.
b. Check fuses for heater elements F10, F11, and F12 must not be blown.

c. Check voltage at 1HTCON2 con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
tacts. L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
460
VAC 7 Check Heater Elements
CIR- a. Check heater elements with the unit No visual physical damage
CUIT Off. Remove and replace if damaged
b. Check heater element Ohms Check from “T” terminals on HTCON2 contactor. See
Section 2.12 for correct Ohm ratings.
8 Check Heater Element Connections
a. Inspect high voltage heater con- No corrosion, water damage or burning /
nections at evaporator. discoloration.
Remove, repair, or replace if required.
9 Verify Accuracy of AC Current Sensor
a. Place SROS in the OFF position. Must have 0 AC1 Amps and 0 AC2 Amps in Unit
Put microprocessor in PC Mode. Data List.
See Note 5 Page 7.2.

7--77 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR
This device is checked twice in Pretrip -- once in Test 2 and again in Test 8.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 2: Normal amps for the 1EVCON contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12
VDC). The circuit tests outside this range.
• TRIGGER–ON TEST 9: Normal amps for the Evaporator Fan motor are 0.7 to 3.5 Amps (460
VAC). The circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Determine Which Test Triggered This Alarm
a. Review active alarm list. Make a note of all alarms.
b. Clear active alarm list.
c. Restart and monitor Pretrip. Stop Pretrip during Test #3 by holding = Key for 6
seconds.
d. Review active alarm list for Alarm If alarm is present, follow steps 2thru 4 If alarm is not
189. present, follow Steps 5 thru 8
2 Check 1EVCON
a. Inspect Evaporator Fan Motor coil No damage to coil.
and wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12.
3 Check 1EVCON Amp Draw
12 VDC
CIR- a. Check 1EVCON amp draw. Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
CUIT Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List.
4 Check 1EVCON Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 5 on Page 7.2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.
Additional steps on the next page.

62-61753 7--78
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P189 CHECK EVAPORATOR FAN MOTOR (Continued)
5 Check Amp Draw of 1EVCON Evap Fan Motor Circuit
a. With the unit running in either HEAT Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for all
or COOL use a clamp on ammeter three legs.
to check the current draw of all 3
legs.
b. Check fuses for evaporator fan mo- F18, F19, and F20 must not be blown.
tor.

c. Check voltage at 1EVCON con- Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
tacts. L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
460 6 Check Evaporator Fan Motor
VAC a. With the unit off, visually check fan No visual physical damage.
CIR- motor and blower wheel. No blockage to blower wheels.
CUIT Blower wheels spin freely.
Remove and replace if required.
b. With the unit off, check the resist- See Section 2.11 for correct resistance.
ance of the evaporator fan motor Resistance (Ohms) must be in range.
windings. No continuity from any high voltage lead to ground.
7 CheckEvaporator Fan Motor Connections
a. Inspect high voltage fan motor con- No corrosion, water damage or burning / discolor-
nections at evaporator. ation.
Remove, repair, or replace if required.
8 Verify Accuracy of AC Current Sensor
a. Place SROS in the OFF position. Must have 0 AC1 Amps and 0 AC2 Amps in Unit
Put microprocessor in PC Mode. Data List.
See Note 5 Page 7.2.

7--79 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P190 CHECK CONDENSER FAN MOTOR
• TRIGGER–ON Normal amps for the Condenser Fan Motors are 0.8 to 3.5 Amps (460 VAC).. The
circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Amp Draw of Condenser Fan Motor Circuit
a. With the unit running and calling for Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for all
HEAT or cool use a clamp on am- three legs.
meter to check the current draw of
all 3 legs. If higher than normal amps are read, the wiring for
the motors must be separated, and each motor
tested individually.
b. Check fuses for condenser fan mo- F18, F19, and F20 must not be blown.
tors.

c. Check voltage at CDCON contacts. Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
L1--L2, L1--L3, and L2--L3.
Must be within range shown in Section 2.11 for
T1--T2, T1--T3, and T2--T3.
2 Check Condenser Fan Motors
460 a. Check condenser fan motors. No visual physical damage.
VAC No blockage due to debris.
CIR- Remove and replace if required.
CUIT b. With the unit off, visually check fan No visual physical damage.
motors and fan blades. No blockage to fan blades.
Fan blades spin freely.
Remove and replace if required.
c. With the unit off, check the resist- See Section 2.11 for correct resistance.
ance of the condenser fan motor Resistance (Ohms) must be in range.
windings. No continuity from any high voltage lead to ground.
3 Check Condenser Fan Motor Connections
a. Inspect high voltage connections at No corrosion, water damage or burning / discolor-
the condenser fan motors. ation.
Remove, repair, or replace if required.
4 Verify Accuracy of AC Current Sensor
a. Place SROS in the OFF position. Must have 0 AC1 Amps and 0 AC2 Amps in Unit
Put microprocessor in PC Mode. Data List.
See Note 5 Page 7.2.

62-61753 7--80
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P206 CHECK CONDENSER FAN CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON : Normal amps for the CDCON contactor coil are 0.05 to 2.0 Amps (12 VDC). The
circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 7--1. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check CDCON
a. Inspect CDCON contactor coil and No damage to coil.
wire connections. No damaged or corroded pins.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12.
2 Check CDCON Amp Draw
a. Check CDCON contactor coil amp Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
draw. Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List.
3 Check CDCON Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 5 on Page 7.2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.

P207 CHK COMPRESSOR CONTACT CIRC

• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the CCONR and CCON relay coils are 0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12 VDC).
The circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset viakey-
pad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 7--1. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check CCONR
a. Inspect CCONR and CCON No damage to coil.
contactor coils and wire No damaged or corroded pins.
connections.
b. Check contactor coil resistance Refer to Section 2.12.
2 Check CCONR Amp Draw
a. Check CCONR and CCON contac- Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
tor coil amp draw. Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List. FET 2 On.
b. Listen for CCON to pull in. If CCON contactor pulls in, CCONR and CCON are
OK.
If CCON contactor does not pull in, check for voltage
at CCON coil. 12 VDC indicates defective CCON
coil. No voltage -- check CCONR.
3 Check CCONR Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 5 on Page 7.2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.

7--81 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P208 CHK GENERATOR CONT CIRC
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the GENCONR and GENCON coils are 0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12
VDC). The circuit tests outside this range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRE--TRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 7--1. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check GENCONR
a. Inspect GENCONR and GENCON No damage to coil.
contactor coils and wire connec- No damaged or corroded pins.
tions.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12.
2 Check GENCONR and GENCON Amp Draw
a. Check GENCONR and GENCON Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
contactor coils amp draw. Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List. FET 3 On.
b. Listen for GENCON to pull in. If GENCON contactor pulls in, GENCONR and
GENCON are OK.
If GENCON contactor does not pull in, check for volt-
age at GENCON coil. 12 VDC indicates defective
GENCON coil. No voltage -- check GENCONR.
3 Check GENCONR Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 5 Page 7.2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.

62-61753 7--82
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
P209 CHECK STANDBY CONT CIRCUIT
• TRIGGER–ON: Normal amps for the PSCONR relay coil and PSCON or PSCON2 contactor coils
0.0 to 1.0 Amps (12 VDC). The circuit(s) test outside this range. (During this test either PSCON or
PSCON2 will be tested depending on the phase reversal module.)
• UNIT CONTROL: Engine and standby operation: Pretrip will fail and display “PRETRIP FAIL AND
COMPLETED”.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset if Pretrip is started again, or alarm may be manually reset via
keypad or by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). See Note 1 Page 7--1. Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
NOTE: IF PRETRIP IS DONE IN STANDBY MODE, THIS PRETRIP ALARM WILL GENERATE MANY
OTHER PRETRIP ALARMS. THEREFORE, IT SHOULD BE ADDRESSED FIRST
1 Check PSCONR
a. Inspect PSCONR, PSCON and No damage to coils.
PSCON2 contactor coils and wire No damaged or corroded pins.
connections.
b. Check contactor coil resistance. Refer to Section 2.12 for resistance values
2 Check PSCONR, PSCON, and PSCON2 Amp Draw
a. Check PSCONR, PSCON and Use Component Test Mode (Section 5.1.2) to test.
PSCON2 contactor coils amp draw. Refer to Section 2.12 for amp values. View current
draw in Data List. FET 19 On.
b. Listen for PSCON or PSCON2 to If PSCON or PSCON2 contactor pulls in, PSCONR
pull in. and PSCON or PSCON2 are OK.
If PSCON or PSCON2 contactor does not pull in,
check for voltage at Phase Reversal Module (PRM)
“N” terminal. 12 VDC indicates defective PSCON or
PSCON2 coil. No voltage -- check PSCONR and
PRM. (Refer to Section 2.12).
3 Check PSCONR, PSCON, PSCON2 and PRM Wiring
a. Inspect harness & control box See Note 2 & Note 5 on Page 7.2.
connector pins & terminals. (See No physical damage to harness.
wiring schematic Section 10.) No damaged or corroded pins.

7--83 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.10 MAINTENANCE ALARMS
223 ENGINE MAINTENANCE DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The Engine Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Engine Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

224 STANDBY MAINTENANCE DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The electric motor Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Standby General Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

62-61753 7--84
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
225 GENERAL MAINTENANCE DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The General Maintenance Hour Meter time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset General Maintenance Hour Meter
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

226 SERVICE SOON--PM #1 DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #1 time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow instructions on proper maintenance form.
maintenance.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #1
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

7--85 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
227 SERVICE SOON--PM #2 DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #2 time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #2
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

228 SERVICE SOON--PM #3 DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #3 time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #3
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

62-61753 7--86
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
229 SERVICE SOON--PM #4 DUE
• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #4 time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #4
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

230 SERVICE SOON--PM #5 DUE

• TRIGGER–ON: The Maintenance Hour Meter #5 time has expired.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only. Alarm Light will NOT be turned on.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via keypad.
1 Check Unit Maintenance Records
a. Schedule unit into service facility for Must be done soon!
maintenance.
2 Perform Maintenance
a. Perform appropriate engine & unit Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
maintenance. Section 8.2.
3 Reset Maintenance Hour Meter #5
a. Reset hour meter for the next Reset Functional Parameter (refer to Table 3--2).
service interval.
b. If hour meter interval is not set for Follow maintenance interval recommendations in
your requirements, reset the Section 8.2.
Configuration, refer to Table 5--2.

7--87 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
7.11 MICROPROCESSOR ALARMS
232 SETPOINT ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the set point that is stored in the microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when a valid set point is entered, or alarm may be manually reset
by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Set Point
a. Check set point setting. Must be between--30°C and +32°C ( --22 and +89.6°
b. Enter new set point. F)
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position The microprocessor powers up OK and the latest set
for 30 seconds, then back to point appears in the display.
START / RUN.
b. Valid set point can not be entered. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

233 MODEL # ERROR

• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Model Number that is stored in the microprocessor memory
• UNIT CONTROL: Unit Shutdown & Alarm
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset only when a valid Model number is entered.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Model Number
a. Check Model Number in Configure the unit for the correct model number. (Re-
microprocessor. fer to Section 5.1.1.)
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
for 30 seconds, then back to
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Model number in Valid number is present.
Data List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid model number can not be Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4
entered.

62-61753 7--88
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
237 FUNCTION PARAMETERS ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in one or more of the Functional Parameters that are stored in the
microprocessor memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Functional Parameter(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when valid Functional Parameters are entered, or alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Functional Parameters
a. Check Functional Parameters. All must be set for selectable values.
2 Reset Microprocessor
a.Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
for 30 seconds, then back to
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Functional Parame- Valid number is set for all parameters.
ters in Functional Parameters List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Functional Parameter(s) can Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4
not be entered.

7--89 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
238 CONFIGURATIONS 1 ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Configuration settings that are stored in the microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Incorrect Configuration(s) will be automatically set for default value.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when valid Configuration(s) are entered, or alarm may be
manually reset by turning the unit off, then back on again
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Configurations
a. Check Configurations. All must be set for selectable values.
2 Check Software Version
a. Check Microprocessor Software Upgrade to the latest version of software. Newer
version. versions of ReeferManager may contain Configura-
tions that were not present in older versions of Micro-
processor software.
3 Reconfigure Microprocessor
a. Send settings to Microprocessor. Using ReeferManager and a Configuration PC Card,
write the desired Configuration file to the PC Card,
then load the file into the Microprocessor. Allow the
Microprocessor to reboot itself.
4 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
for 30 seconds, then back to
START / RUN.
b. Check for valid Configuration set- Values are set correctly for all parameters.
tings in Configuration List. Alarm is cleared.
c Disconnect positive battery cable Microprocessor powers up OK.
from the battery, wait 30 seconds,
then reconnect and place the SROS
in the START / RUN position.
d Check for valid Configuration Values are set correctly for all parameters.
settings in Configuration List. Alarm is cleared.
c. Valid Configurations can not be Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4
entered.

62-61753 7--90
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
242 DISCHARGE PRESS CALIBRATE ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Compressor Discharge Pressure Sensor Calibration value
stored in memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm Only.
• RESET CONDITION: See following instruction.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the Start/Run--Off switch in Microprocessor powers up OK.
the OFF position for 30 seconds,
then place it back in the RUN
position.
b. Alarm 242 remains active. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

243 SUCTION/EVAP CALIBRATE ERROR

• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in the Suction / Evaporator Pressure Sensor data processing.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: See following instruction.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the Start/Run--Off switch in Microprocessor powers up OK.
the OFF position for 30 seconds,
then place it back in the RUN
position.
b. Alarm 243 remains active. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

7--91 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
245 CANNOT SAVE SETTING
• TRIGGER–ON: There is an error in sending and saving new settings in the Microprocessor
memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only.
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Microprocessor Software Revision
a. Check Microprocessor Software Will be a 6 digit number.
Revision.
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Will be a 6 digit number.
for 30 seconds, then back to Upgrade to the latest version.
START / RUN.
b. Check Active Alarm List. Alarm is cleared -- microprocessor is OK.
c. Alarm 245 can not be cleared. Unit will operate, but changes to the settings will not
be retained in the microprocessor memory. Replace
microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

246 EEPROM WRITE FAILURE

• TRIGGER–ON: here is an error in the ability to write information to be stored in the memory.
• UNIT CONTROL: Alarm only
• RESET CONDITION: Alarm may be manually reset via Keypad or by turning the unit off, then back
on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, clear the
alarm(s). (See Note 1 Page 7--1) Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if any active alarm
occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Microprocessor
a. Check set point setting. Must be between --30°C to +32°C (--22°F to +89.6°F
)
b.Enter new set point. Must be between --30°C to +32°C (--22°F to +89.6°F
)
2 Reset Microprocessor
a. Turn main switch off for 30 seconds, Microprocessor powers up OK.
then turn on.
b. Alarm 246 remains active. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

62-61753 7--92
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
248 CONFIGURATION MODE / HP2 ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: EEPROM Configuration is out of range.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset only when valid info is available for the microprocessor are
entered.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check microprocessor
a. Check set point setting. Must be between --30°C to +32°C (--22°F to +89.6°F
)
b. Enter new set point. Must be between --30°C to +32°C (--22°F to +89.6°F
)
c. Check Functional Parameters. All settings must be valid.
2 Reset microprocessor
a. Place the SROS in the OFF position Microprocessor powers up OK.
for 30 seconds, then back to
START / RUN.
b. Alarm 248 remains active. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

7--93 62-61753
Alarm
NO. Steps ALARM / CAUSE CORRECTIVE ACTION
249 MICROPROCESSOR ERROR
• TRIGGER–ON: Microprocessor Input Conversion Error.
• UNIT CONTROL: Shutdown and alarm.
• RESET CONDITION: Auto Reset when input conversions are valid, or Alarm may be manually
reset by turning the unit off, then back on again.
NOTE: Follow the steps below until a problem is found. Once a repair or correction has been made, the active
alarm should clear itself (see reset condition above). Operate the unit through the appropriate modes to see if
any active alarm occurs. Continue with the steps below as necessary.
1 Check Microprocessor
a. Check Temperature Sensor Data Must be valid reading for RAT, SAT, AAT, etc.
b. Check for any Active Sensor Must all be cleared.
Alarms
2 Check Microprocessor & Unit Wiring
a. Check Wiring to Micro and at input Must not be miss wired to allow 12 VDC on any of
devices to the micro. the sensor input circuits.
3 Reset Microprocessor
a. Turn START/RUN-OFF switch off Microprocessor powers up OK
for 30 seconds, then turn back on.
b. Alarm 249 remains active. Replace microprocessor. Refer to Section 5.4

62-61753 7--94

WARNING
LogiCOLD microprocessor equipped units
may start automatically at any time the
START/RUN--OFF switch (SROS) is not in
the OFF position. Also, the unit may be fit-
ted with two way communication equip-
ment that will allow stating of the unit from a
remote location even though the SROS is in
the off position.
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied at the
power plug or from the generator. When
performing service or maintenance proced-
ures: ensure any two way communication is
disabled in accordance with the manufac-
turers instruction, ensure the START/RUN--
OFF switch is in the OFF position and,
whenever practical, disconnect the high
voltage source and disconnect the negative
battery connection. NEVER dis--assemble
the generator: HIGH MAGNETIC FIELD
INSIDE! This field can interfere with cardiac
implants such as pacemakers and defibril-
lators.
Table 8--1. Maintenance Schedule
SYSTEM
a. At the beginning of every trip
Pretrip Inspection
Check Engine Hours
b. At first 400 hours of operation
Engine 1. Change lube oil and filter
c. Every 1500 hours
Engine 1. Change lube oil and filter
SECTION 8
SERVICE
CAUTION
Unit uses R404A and POE oil. The use of in-
ert gas brazing procedures is mandatory for
all Carrier Transicold refrigeration units;
otherwise compressor failure will occur.
For more information Refer to Technical
Procedure 98-50553-00 Inert Gas Brazing
NOTE
To avoid damage to the earth’s ozone layer, use
a refrigerant recovery system whenever remov-
ing refrigerant. When working with refrigerants
you must comply with all local government envi-
ronmental laws.
8.1 SECTION LAYOUT
Service procedures are presented herein beginning
with Scheduled Maintenance (Section 8.2) & PreTrip
(8.3) then Refrigerant System Service (8.5) followed by
Refrigerant System Component Service (8.6) and then
Electrical System Component Service (8.7). Refer to
the Table Of Contents to locate specific topics.
8.2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
For the most reliable operation and for maximum life,
your unit requires regular maintenance. This includes oil
and filter changes, fuel and air filter replacement,
coolant replacement and pretrip inspections.
Maintenance should be performed according to the
following schedule:
These maintenance schedules are based on the use of
approved oils and regular pretrip trip inspections of the
unit. Failure to follow the recommended maintenance
schedule may affect the life and reliability of the
refrigeration unit.
REFERENCE
OPERATION
SECTION
3.4
Check
8.4.7
8.4.7
8--1 62-61753
 Table 8--1. Maintenance Schedule -- Continued

REFERENCE
SYSTEM OPERATION
SECTION
d. Every 3000 hours or Annually
Unit 1. Check unit mounting bolts Check
2. Check engine and compressor mounting bolts Check
3. Check door latches & hinges Check
4. Check gauges, switches and electrical connections Check
5. Check control box condition Check
Engine 1. Perform 1500 hour service 8.4.7
2. Check low oil pressure safety Check
3. Clean crankcase breather 8.4.13
4. Check engine speeds 8.4.9
Fuel System 1. Clean fuel pump filter 8.4.3 (8.4.4)
2. Change fuel filter 8.4.5
3. Check fuel warmer (if equipped) ------
Cooling 1. Check antifreeze using a refractometer (CTD P/N 07--00435--00) 8.4.10
System 2. Clean radiator/condenser fin surface 8.4.10 and 8.6.3
3. Check water pump Check
4. Check water temperature sensor 2.8
Exhaust 1. Check mounting hardware Check
System 2. Check muffler and exhaust pipes Check
Air Intake 1. Check air cleaner element 8.4.8
System
Starting 1. Check battery condition Check/Replace
System 2. Clean battery connections and cable ends Check/Replace
3. Check battery hold down clamps Check
4. Check starter operation Check
Charging 1. Check battery charger output voltage 2.11
System 2. Check battery charger amperage 2.11
A.C. 1. Check voltage output 2.11
Generator 2. Check amperage output 2.11
3. Check condenser and evaporator fan amperages 2.11
4. Check compressor amperage 2.11
5. Check heater amperages 2.11
Refrigera- 1. Check air switch and calibrate 2.10
tion 2. Check & clean evaporator coil and defrost drain hoses 8.6.2
System
3. Check operating refrigerant pressure Check
4. Perform Quick Check procedure 8.3
5. Perform Pre--Trip inspection 8.3
6. Check manual defrost operation Check
e. Every 6000 Hour Maintenance (Normal Operating Conditions)
Cooling 1. Drain and flush cooling system
System Engine Service Guide

f. Every 10,000 Hour Maintenance

Perform complete annual Preventive Maintenance and the following:
Engine 1. Adjust rocker arms Engine Service Guide
Fuel System 1. Clean and adjust injector nozzles. Engine Service Guide

62-61753 8--2
8.3 PRETRIP INSPECTION AFTER OPERATING UNIT FOR 15
MINUTES OR MORE
The following pretrip inspection should be performed Check refrigerant level
before every trip and at each scheduled maintenance.
Check for proper temperature control
Check auto--start/stop operation
Initiate defrost and allow to terminate
Check engine speeds
WARNING
OPERATE IN HIGH SPEED COOL
Inspect battery cables for signs of wear, AND RECORD
abrasion or damage at every Pretrip in- (From Microprocessor Unit Data List)
spection and replace if necessary. Also SUCTION PRESSURE
check battery cable routing to ensure DISCHARGE PRESSURE
that clamps are secure and that cables EVAPORATOR PRESSURE
are not pinched or chafing against any ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
components. RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE AMBIENT AIR TEMPERATURE
Drain water from bottom of fuel tank DEFROST TERM TEMPERATURE
Drain water from water separator on fuel SUCTION LINE TEMPERATURE
filter.
EVAPORATOR OUTLET
Check coolant level TEMPERATURE
Check condenser/radiator coil cleanliness COMP DISCHARGE TEMPERATURE
Check air cleaner and hoses BATTERY VOLTAGE
Check engine oil level DC CURRENT DRAW
Check condition of water pump belt ENGINE RPM
Check battery fluid level (if applicable) UNIT AC CURRENT #1
Check battery cables and terminals UNIT AC CURRENT #2
Check evaporator coil for cleanliness CSMV %
Check bulkhead and return air screen EXV %
Check all defrost water drains SOFTWARE REVISION
Place in Continuous Run, and start unit. CONTROL SERIAL #
UNIT MODEL #
DATALOGGER TIME & DATE
IMMEDIATELY AFTER STARTING HOURS TO ENGINE MAINTENANCE
ENGINE
HOURS TO S/B MOTOR MAINTE-
Check fuel lines and filters for leaks NANCE
Check oil lines and filters for leaks HOURS TO UNIT MAINTENANCE
Check coolant hoses for leaks TIME LEFT TO PM1
Check exhaust system for leaks TIME LEFT TO PM2
Check condenser fan for proper airflow. TIME LEFT TO PM3
Check evaporator fan for proper airflow. TIME LEFT TO PM4
Check for unusual noises TIME LEFT TO PM5

FINAL
PRETRIP Review Functional Parameters
Initiate a PreTrip, refer to Section 3.4 Download recorder data (if required)
List any Pre--trip Alarms Enter Trip Start in Micro (if desired)

8--3 62-61753
8.4 ENGINE SERVICE AND COMPONENTS

8.4.1 Fuel System

The fuel system (see Figure 8--1) consists of the fuel

tank, optional electric pump, mechanical lift pump, fuel
filter, fuel injection pump, the injectors and
interconnecting tubing.
3
2
4

1
11
10
1. Mechanical Fuel Lift 3. Bleed Screw
Pump 4. Injection Pump
2. Manual Plunger
Figure 8--2. Fuel Bleed Components
12 To prime the fuel system, do the following:
8
a. Turn the bleed screw counter-clockwise until fully
opened.
9 b. Turn the top of the manual fuel pump plunger
13 counter-clockwise to unlock it. S--L--O--W--L--Y
(up/down once per second) pump the manual
plunger until positive pressure (resistance) is felt.
This may take up to 200 strokes. This will indicate
7 fuel flow.
3
6 4 c. Continue to pump S--L--O--W--L--Y (up/down once
2 per second) approximately 100 more strokes to fill
5 the filter and bleed the air out of the lines.
1 d. Start engine. It may be necessary to continue to
pump until the engine starts.
e. Depress and turn the top of the manual plunger
clockwise to lock in place.
1. Fuel Tank 8. Injection Pump f. When engine is running smoothly, turn bleed screw
2. Fuel Supply Line 9. Bleed Screw clockwise until fully closed.
3. Electric Fuel Pump 10. Fuel Leak-off Line 8.4.3 Mechanical Fuel Pump Filter
(Optional) 11. Injector Nozzles Due to foreign particles in the fuel and wax, as a result of
4. Mechanical Lift Pump 12. Fuel Return Line using the wrong grade of fuel or untreated fuel in cold
5. Water Separator 13. Fuel Level Sensor weather, the mechanical pump filter (see Figure 8--3)
6 Fuel Filter (Optional) may become plugged or restricted, and the engine will
7. Fuel Warmer lose power. The filter must be cleaned on a regular
(Optional) schedule such as when the oil and fuel filters are
changed (Refer to Section 8.1). to check the filter do the
following:
a. Turn nut (item 1, Figure 8--3) counter-clockwise to
Figure 8--1. Fuel System Diagram
loosen and remove.
b. Remove banjo fitting (item 2) and let it hang loose,
8.4.2 Priming the Fuel System
making sure to keep copper rings (item 4) for replace-
ment.
The mechanical fuel lift pump (See Figure 8--2) is
mounted on the engine next to the injection pump. This c. Turn filter (item 3) counter-clockwise and remove.
pump has a manual plunger for priming the fuel system Check and clean.
when the fuel tank has been run dry. d. To install reverse steps 1 through 3.

62-61753 8--4
 8.4.5 Fuel Filter
To replace filter:
a. Place a shallow pan under filter (item 6, Figure 8--1)
3 and open the water separator (5) to drain contents.
b. Remove water separator and O--ring and then re-
move element.
c. Install water separator on new element using new
1 O--ring.
d. Fill new element with clean diesel fuel, lubricate the
seal and install. Tighten firmly by hand.
4
2 1 e. Start unit and check for leaks.
8.4.6 Fuel Level Sensor (FLS)
An optional fuel level sensor (item 13, Figure 8--1)
1. Nut supplies an input signal to the microprocessor as to the
2. Banjo Fitting % of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. The microprocessor
will activate the CHECK FUEL LEVEL alarm when the
3. Filter
level reaches 15%, and (if configured to do so) shuts the
4. Copper Rings engine down when the level reaches 10%. The fuel tank
Figure 8--3. Mechanical Fuel Pump level is be displayed in the Unit Data List.

8.4.4 Electric Pump Filter

To Check or Replace Filter
GROUND
a. Remove 3 screws from cover (item 1, Figure 8--4). SUPPLY
b. Remove cover, gasket and filter. VOLTAGE

OUTPUT

WARNING
Use the required protective eye wear and
clothing when working with solvents.
Figure 8--5. Fuel Level Sensor Wiring
c. Wash filter in cleaning solvent and blow out with air
pressure. Clean cover. To Check The Fuel Level Sensor, do the following
a. Verify that the wiring is correct. See Figure 8--5 for
d. To Install reverse above steps.
correct wiring.
b. With the fuel tank empty, and sensor dry (If the sensor
has been in the fuel, let it hang to dry for 2 hours) the
1 Cover output reading should be approximately 0.25 VDC.
2 Gasket
3 Filter c. With the fuel tank full, the output reading should be
approximately 4.75 VDC.
3
8.4.7 Lube Oil Filter
2
1
CAUTION
When changing oil filter, the new filter
should be primed (partially filled) with clean
oil if possible. If the filter is not primed, the
engine may operate for a period with no oil
supplied to the bearings.

After warming up the engine, stop engine, place shallow

drain pan under filter and remove filter. Lightly oil gasket
on new filter before installing. Tighten per filter
Figure 8--4. Electric Fuel Pump (Optional) manufacturer’s directions printed on filter.

8--5 62-61753

2 1 5 frost key. If unit will not enter Defrost, refer to Section
4
3
1. Filter Outlet 4. Engine Outlet
2. Filter Inlet 5. Oil Pressure Switch
3. Engine Inlet
Figure 8--6. Lube Oil Flow Diagram
8.4.8 Engine Air Cleaner
Inspection
The dry type air cleaner should be inspected regularly
for leaks. A damaged air cleaner or hose can seriously
affect the performance and life of the engine. The air
cleaner is designed to effectively remove contaminants
from the air stream entering the engine. An excessive
accumulation of these contaminants in the air cleaner
will impair its operation; therefore, a service schedule
should be set up and followed. The following simple
service steps are easily made while the engine is being
serviced in the field:
a. Check all connections for mechanical tightness. Be
sure cleaner outlet pipe is not fractured.
b. In case of leakage and if adjustment does not correct
the trouble, replace necessary parts or gaskets.
Swelled or distorted gaskets must always be re-
placed.
c. To remove air cleaner, unlatch cover, turn counter-
clockwise and lift out and away from the unit. Check
condition of paper element by shining a light through
it. If is is dirty or plugged, replace element.
8.4.9 Engine Speed Adjustment
a. Engine speed may be determined using a strobe ta-
chometer. (Carrier Transicold Part No. 07-00206.) or
by checking the Unit Data “ENGINE RPM” reading
(refer to Section 3.13). To use a strobe; with the en-
gine stopped, place a mark (white paint for example)
on the crankshaft sheave.
b. Current draw may be measured using a clamp on
ammeter (Carrier Transicold Part Number
07--00229--00) at PSCON, PSCON2 or GENCON
as applicable or by checking the Unit Data “UNIT AC
CURRENT #1 & UNIT AC CURRENT #2” readings
(refer to Section 3.13).
c. Start the unit in Cool Mode.
62-61753
d. To check or set high speed, press the Manual De-
3.9.
e. Check unit data readings for current at AC--1 & AC--2
and engine speed. Engine speed should be 1860
RPM, Current should be 9A.
3
4
2
1
1. Speed Lever (Shown in low speed position)
2 .Low Speed Adjustment Screw
3. High Speed Adjustment Screw
4. Jam Nut
Figure 8--7. Engine Speed Adjustment
f. To Increase Speed (see Figure 8--7):
Loosen jam nut on the high speed adjustment screw.
Turn capscrew counter--clockwise until correct speed
is achieved, then tighten jam nut and recheck engine
speed.
g. To Decrease Speed:
Loosen jam nut on the high speed adjustment screw.
Turn capscrew clockwise until correct speed is
achieved, then tighten jam nut and recheck engine
speed.
h. To check or set low speed, place the machine into
Silent Mode by setting the silent mode functional
parameter to “YES”. (Refer to Section 3.15)
NOTE
DO NOT disconnect the Speed Control Sole-
noid (SCS).
i. Check unit data readings for current at AC--1 & AC--2
and engine speed. Engine speed should be 1440
RPM, Current should be 7.0A.
j. To Increase Speed (see Figure 8--7):
Loosen jam nut on the low speed adjustment screw.
Turn capscrew clockwise until correct speed is
achieved, then tighten jam nut and recheck engine
speed.
k. To Decrease Speed:
Loosen jam nut on the low speed adjustment screw.
Turn capscrew counter--clockwise until correct speed
is achieved, then tighten jam nut and recheck engine
speed.
8--6
8.4.10 Radiator
The radiator is an integral part of the condenser coil.
Cooling air is drawn through the radiator by the
condenser fans. The radiator must be clean both
internally and externally for adequate cooling.
CAUTION
Use only monopropylene glycol anti-freeze
as glycol by itself will damage the cooling
system. Always add pre-mixed 50/50 anti-
freeze and water to radiator/engine. Never
exceed more than a 60% concentration of
anti-freeze. Use a low silicate anti-freeze.
CAUTION
NEVER POUR COLD WATER INTO A HOT
ENGINE, however hot water can always be
added to a cold engine.
WARNING
Do not remove the cap from a hot radiator; if
the cap must be removed, do so very slowly
in order to release the pressure without
spray.
Do the following to service the cooling sys-
tem:
a. Remove all foreign material from the condenser/radiat-
or coil by reversing the normal air flow. (Air is pulled in
through the front and discharges over the engine.)
Compressed air or water may be used as a cleaning
agent. It may be necessary to use warm water mixed
with any good commercial dishwasher detergent. Rinse
coil with fresh water if a detergent is used.
b. To fully drain the coolant, remove the lower radiator
hose and radiator cap.
c. Re--Install hose and fill system with clean, untreated
water to which 3 -- 5% of an alkaline based radiator
cleaner is added -- 6 oz. (151 grams) to 1 gallon (3.78
liters) of water.
d. Run engine 6 to 12 hours and drain system while
warm. Rinse system three times after it has cooled
down. Refill system with water.
e. Run engine to operating temperature. Drain system
again and fill with 50/50 water/anti-freeze mixture.
f. Check condition of the water pump V-belt. Refer to
Section 8.4.11
8--7
8.4.11 Water Pump V--Belt
WARNING
Beware of moving poly V-belt and belt driv-
en components.
WARNING
When working with belts, beware of pinch
points.
The poly V-belt is driven by a sheave on the engine
crankshaft. Its function is to drive the water pump.
To replace the poly V-belt, perform the following steps:
1. Using the proper size socket, slowly rotate the crank
by turning the crank pulley nut. At the same time, use
a flat, blunt object to guide the belt off the crank
pulley. Be careful not to damage grooves on the
pulley.
2. Replace the poly V-Belt by positioning the belt on the
water pump pulley, and while rotating the engine (as
in step 1), use a flat, blunt object to guide the belt
onto the crank pulley. Be careful not to damage
grooves on the pulley or belt.
8.4.12 Engine Speed Sensor
a. Verify that the wiring to sensor (ENSSN) is correct.
See wiring schematic, Section 10.
b. Check voltage at the RPM Sensor connector with the
Run Relay energized (Refer to Note 2, page 7--2)
c. Voltage between ENRPMA--2MP31 and
ENRPMC--2MP7 should be 5.0 VDC.
d. Check continuity between ENRPMB and 2MP18.
WARNING
The +5.0 VDC (terminal B) is common be-
tween the Compressor Discharge Pressure
Transducer, the Compressor Suction Pres-
sure Transducer, and the RPM sensor. If
this circuit is shorted to ground (due to one
of the mentioned components being defec-
tive, or a worn wire) the MessageCenter will
show
Suction Pressure: --1 bar (--14.7 PSIG)
Discharge Pressure: 0 bar/psig
Engine RPM: 0.
e. If the above tests check OK, read the preceding
WARNING. If the RPM display is still not correct, re-
place the RPM sensor.
8.4.13 Crankcase Breather
The engine uses a closed type breather with the
breather line attached to the cylinder head cover. (See
Figure 8--8)
The breather assembly should be cleaned at every
service interval or once a year (whichever comes first).
62-61753
 1 12
13
2
3 14 11
15
4

16
10
17
9
8
18
1. Screw
2. Breather Cover
4 7
3. Breather Valve 2 3
4. Breather Tube
1
Figure 8--8. Engine Crankcase Breather 6

5
8.4.14 Servicing Glow Plugs 1. Refrigerant 11. Condenser
Cylinder 12. Evaporator
The total circuit amp draw for the glow plug circuit is 2. Refrigerant 13. Compressor
checked during a Pretrip cycle. When servicing, the Recovery Unit
glow plug is to be fitted carefully into the cylinder head to Suction
3. Manifold Gage Modulation Valve
prevent damage to glow plug. Torque value for the glow
plug is 19 to 24 Nm (14 to 18 ft-lb). Set (CSMV)
4. Valve 14. Receiver
Checking for a Defective Glow Plug 5. Vacuum Gauge
15. Liquid Line Service
6. Vacuum Pump
Valve
a. The entire circuit may be tested using Component 7. Suction Service
Valve 16. Filter Drier
Test Mode. (Refer to Section 5.1.2.)
8. Compressor 17. Economizer Heat
b. To test individual glow plugs, disconnect all glow 9. Discharge Service Exchanger
plugs from each other, and place an ammeter (or clip- Valve 18. Unloader Solenoid
on ammeter) in series with each glow plug as it is en- 10. Economizer Valve (USV)
ergized. See Section 2.8 for glow plug amperage. Service Line Valve

Figure 8--9. Refrigerant System

8.5 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE
b. The recommended procedure for finding leaks in a
8.5.1 Removing The Refrigerant Charge.
To completely remove the refrigerant charge the entire
system must be “open” to the recovery system. To open
the system, place the unit in SERVICE MODE (refer to
section 5.1.3). Ensure the microprocessor message
center reads “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE”
during the refrigerant recovery process.
Connect a refrigerant recovery system to the unit to
remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to Figure 8--9 and
instructions provided by the manufacture of the
refrigerant recovery system.
8.5.2 Refrigerant Leak Checking
Service Connections
system is with an electronic leak detector. Testing
joints with soapsuds is satisfactory only for locating
large leaks, or pinpointing small leaks once a general
area has been located.
CAUTION
Only a refrigerant drum containing R404A
should be connected to this refrigeration
unit in order to pressurize the system.
However, dry nitrogen may be used to in-
crease pressure. Any other gas or vapor will
contaminate the system and require addi-
tional purging and evacuation.

a. If system was opened and repairs completed, leak c. Ensure the microprocessor message center reads
check the unit. “RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” when actu-

62-61753 8--8
 ally leak checking. If system is without refrigerant,
pressure, or pressure is below 2.0 bar (30 psig),
charge refrigerant to bring pressure between 2.0 to
3.4 bar (30 to 50 PSIG). During the charging pro-
cess, the microprocessor may switch to the charge
mode. If this occurs, switch it back to the
“RECOVER/LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (refer to sec-
tion 5.1.3). Leak check all connections.
d. Remove the refrigerant charge using a refrigerant
recovery system. If required, repair any leaks and re-
peat the leak check. Evacuate and dehydrate the
unit (refer to Section 8.5.3) and then charge unit with
refrigerant. (Refer to Section 8.5.4).
8.5.3 Evacuation
General
Moisture is the deadly enemy of refrigerant systems.
The presence of moisture in a refrigeration system can
have many undesirable effects. The most common are
copper plating, acid sludge formation, “freeze-up” of
metering devices (EVXV or TXV) by free water, and
formation of acids, resulting in metal corrosion.
Preparation
a. Evacuate and dehydrate only after pressure leak
test. (Refer to Section 8.5.2)
b. Essential tools to properly evacuate and dehydrate
any system include a good vacuum pump (5 cfm /
8m#H volume displacement, Carrier Transicold P/N
07-00176-11) and a good vacuum indicator such as
a thermocouple vacuum gauge, (Carrier Transicold
P/N 07--00414--00).
NOTE
The use of a compound gauge is not recom-
mended because of its inherent inaccuracy.
c. Keep the ambient temperature above 15.6_C (60°F)
to speed evaporation of moisture. If ambient temper-
ature is lower than 15.6_C (60°F) ice might form be-
fore moisture removal is complete. Heat lamps or al-
ternate sources of heat may be used to raise system
temperature.
Procedure
a. Remove the refrigerant charge using a refrigerant re-
covery system. Refer to paragraph 8.5.1.
b. The recommended method to evacuate and dehy-
drate the system is to connect four evacuation hoses
(Do not use standard service hoses, as they are not
suited for evacuation purposes.) as shown in
Figure 8--9.
c. With the economizer service line valve and unit ser-
vice valves closed (back seated) and the vacuum
pump and electronic vacuum gauge valves open,
start the pump and draw a deep vacuum. Shut off the
pump and check to see if the vacuum holds. This
operation is to test the evacuation setup for leaks,
repair if necessary.
d. Open the economizer service line valve and midseat
the refrigerant system service valves. Ensure the mi-
8--9
croprocessor message center reads “RECOVER/
LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (refer to section 5.1.3).
e. Then open the vacuum pump and electronic vacuum
gauge valves, if they are not already open. Start the
vacuum pump. Evacuate unit until the electronic vac-
uum gauge indicates 2000 microns. Close the elec-
tronic vacuum gauge and vacuum pump valves. Shut
off the vacuum pump. Wait a few minutes to be sure
the vacuum holds.
f. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen. Raise system
pressure to approximately 0.1 bar (2 PSIG). Ensure
the microprocessor does not switch to the charge
mode. If this occurs, switch it back to the “RECOVER/
LEAK CHK/EVAC MODE” (refer to section 5.1.3).
g. Purge nitrogen from system.
h. Repeat steps e through g one time.
i. Evacuate unit to 500 microns. Close off vacuum
pump valve and stop pump. Wait five minutes to see if
vacuum holds. This checks for residual moisture and/
or leaks.
j. With a vacuum still in the unit, the refrigerant charge
may be drawn into the system from a refrigerant con-
tainer on weight scales. The correct amount of refrig-
erant may be added by observing the scales. Correct
charge will be found in Table 2-1.
8.5.4 Adding Refrigerant To System
CAUTION
Do not vapor charge R--404A. Only liquid
charging is acceptable.
Adding A Full Charge
a. Dehydrate unit and leave in deep vacuum. (Refer to
section 8.5.3)
b. Place drum of refrigerant on scale and connect charg-
ing line from drum to liquid line service valve. Purge
charging line at outlet valve.
c. Note weight of drum and refrigerant.
d. Open liquid valve on drum. Open liquid line service
valve half way and allow the liquid refrigerant to flow
into the unit until the correct weight of refrigerant has
been added as indicated by scales. Correct charge
will be found in Table 2-1.
NOTE
It is possible that all liquid may not be pulled into
the receiver, as outlined in step d. In this case,
frontseat the liquid line service valve and run
the unit in cooling until the correct amount of re-
frigerant is added.
e. When scale indicates that the correct charge has
been added, close liquid line valve on drum and back-
seat the liquid line service valve.
f. Start unit in cooling mode. Run approximately ten
minutes. Partially block off air flow to condenser coil
so discharge pressure rises to 15.8 bar (230 psig).
62-61753
 Refrigerant should appear at center line of lower re-
ceiver sight glass. CAUTION
k. Check for proper unit operation by running Pretrip The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
(Refer to Section 3.4). tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
Adding A Partial Charge compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
a. Start the unit in high speed Engine Operation (ambi- the suction or discharge service valves
ent between 18°C (24°F) and 30°C (86°F) with a set- closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
point of 20°C (68°F) or lower. result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum.
b. When return air reaches 0°C (32°F), check the sight
glasses. 7 6
c. If the bottom ball is floating at the top of the sight glass
and the top ball is not floating, the charge is correct. 5
d. Liquid charge through the suction service valve.
e. Check for proper unit operation by running Pretrip
(Refer to Section 3.4). 8 4
8.5.5 Checking For Noncondensibles 3
9
To check for noncondensibles, proceed as follows: 2
1 Stabilize system to equalize pressure between the 1
suction and discharge side of the system. The en-
gine needs to be off for several hours.
2 Measure temperature at any of the copper tubing in
the condenser.
3 Check pressure at the compressor discharge ser-
vice valve.
4 Determine saturation pressure as it corresponds to 1. Mounting Hardware 6. Discharge
the condenser temperature using the Temperature- 2. Compressor Temperature Sensor
Pressure Chart, Table 8--7. 3. Suction Connection 7. Discharge
5 If gauge reading is 0.2 bar (3 psig) or higher than the 4. Economizer Connection
calculated P/T pressure in step 4, noncondensibles Connection 8. Power Plug
are present. 5. Lifting Lug 9. Oil Level Adjustment
Port
6 Remove refrigerant using a refrigerant recovery sys-
tem. (Refer to Section 8.5.1) Figure 8--10. Compressor Kit
7 Evacuate and dehydrate the system. (Refer to Sec- a. Remove the refrigerant charge. Refer to section
tion 8.5.3) 8.5.1
8 Charge the unit. (Refer to Section 8.5.4) b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position.
8.6 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM COMPONENT c. Frontseat the discharge and suction service valves
SERVICE to help protect the remainder of the system.
d. Remove the Rotalock fittings from the suction and
8.6.1 Compressor discharge service connections, and uncouple the
economizer line from the compressor.
e. Disconnect the compressor discharge temperature
WARNING sensor (CDT) connector. The replacement com-
pressor comes with the compressor discharge tem-
Before removal of the compressor, relieve perature sensor already assembled.
the internal pressure by very carefully loos- f. Remove and save the compressor base--mounting
ening the couplings to break the seal. bolts and washers.

62-61753 8--10
g. Rotate the compressor to gain access to the power
plug. Remove the power plug retaining clip (see
Figure 8--11) by pulling out gently on the left side (to
clear the shorter left locking tab and rotate the right
locking tab) and then slide up and off the plug. Pull
the plug out and away from the compressor to re-
move.
STEP 1 STEP 2
Figure 8--11. Compressor Plug Retaining Clip
NOTE
Inspect the power plug terminals to ensure they
are not deformed or have any signs of heat or
arcing. If any damage is noted, replace the
power cable.
h. Remove (slide out) the old compressor from the unit
and slide the new compressor into the unit. Refer to
Figure 8--10.
NOTE
DO NOT add any oil to the replacement com-
pressor. Replacement compressor is shipped
with full oil charge of 60 oz.
i.. Install the “D” ring into the square groove of the
power plug
j. Inject a small amount of Dupont Krytox Performance
Lubricant into each of the pin connections in the
power plug. For ease of installation and to prevent
the “D” ring from rolling, use a small amount of the
lubricant to lubricate the outside radius of the “D”
ring.
k. Align the power plug with the cutout in the terminal
fence. Insert the power plug at a slight angle allowing
the “D” ring to start at the lower portion of the terminal
fence. Apply even pressure on the back of the power
plug until the flat surface of the plug seats against the
outer face of the terminal fence.
l. Reinstall the plug retaining bracket or molded plug
retainer as required.
m. Install the four base--mounting bolts loosely.
n. Place new Teflon seals at the compressor suction
and discharge ports. Lubricate the O--ring, back side
of sleeves and coupling nut and put in place at the
economizer line connection port. Hand tighten all
three connections.
o. Torque the four base--mounting screws to 126 Nm
(93 ft--lbs.).
8--11
p. Using a backup wrench, torque the compressor con-
nections as follows:
Service Valve / Connection Torque Value
Suction and Discharge Rota- 109 to 136 Nm
locks (80 to 100 ft--lbs.)
Economizer Connection 32 to 36 Nm
(24 to 27 ft--lbs.)
q. Connect the new compressor discharge temperat-
ure sensor (CDT) connector. Wire--tie any loose wir-
ing as appropriate.
r. Backseat the suction and discharge service valves.
Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
the suction or discharge service valves
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum.
s. Following installation of a replacement compressor,
the oil level in the unit may be above the required
level. Adjust the oil level in accordance with the in-
structions packaged with the replacement com-
pressor.
8.6.2 Evaporator Coil
Cleaning
The use of recycled cardboard cartons is increasing
across the country. The recycled cardboard cartons
create much more fiber dust during transport than “new”
cartons. The fiber dust and particles are drawn into the
evaporator where they lodge between the evaporator
fins. If the coil is not cleaned on a regular basis,
sometimes as often as after each trip, the accumulation
can be great enough to restrict air flow, cause coil icing,
repetitive defrosts and loss of unit capacity. Due to the
“washing” action of normal defrost the fiber dust and
particles may not be visible on the face of the coil but
may accumulate deep within.
It is recommended that the evaporator coil be cleaned
on a regular basis, not only to remove cardboard dust,
but to remove any grease or oil film which may coat the
fins and prevent water from draining into the drain pan.
Cardboard fiber particles after being wetted and dried
several times can be very hard to remove. Therefore,
several washings may be necessary.
a. Remove rubber check valves (Kazoo) from drain
lines on front of trailer.
b. Spray coil with a mild detergent solution (such as
Oakite 202) or any good commercial grade automatic
dish washer detergent such as Electrosol or Cas-
cade, let the solution stand for a few minutes and re-
verse flush (opposite normal air flow) with clean water
at mild pressure. A garden hose with spray nozzle is
usually sufficient. Ensure drain lines are clean.
62-61753
c. Run unit until defrost mode can be initiated to check
for proper draining from drain pan.
Coil Replacement
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position.
c. Disconnect return air sensor (RAT) and remove
screen. Remove upper louvered panel.
d. Remove heater connection service access cover
(see to Figure 2--3) and disconnect heaters.
e. Disconnect and remove the defrost termination tem-
perature sensor (DTT), evaporator outlet pressure
transducer (EVOP) and evaporator outlet temperat-
ure sensor (EVOT). Disconnect air switch tubing.
f. Disconnect and remove the evaporator expansion
valve coil. Remove suction line between coil stub
and suction modulating valve and liquid line with
EVXV body.
g. Remove the mounting hardware from the coil.
h. After defective coil is removed from unit, note loca-
tion of heaters (dimension form right end), remove
heaters and install on replacement coil.
i. Install coil assembly by reversing above steps.
j. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
8.6.3 Condenser Coil
Coil Cleaning
Remove all foreign material from the condenser/radiator
coil by reversing the normal air flow. (Air is pulled in
through the front and discharges over the engine.)
Compressed air or water may be used as a cleaning
agent. It may be necessary to use warm water mixed with
any good commercial dishwasher detergent. Rinse coil
with fresh water if a detergent is used.
Coil Replacement
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Drain engine coolant, refer to section 8.4.10 and re-
move coolant hoses.
c. Remove the condenser grille.
d. Unsolder discharge line, subcooler lines and liquid
outlet line.
e. Remove coil mounting hardware and remove the
coil.
62-61753
f. Install replacement coil and solder connections.
g. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
h. Reconnect coolant hoses and refill engine coolant
(Refer to section 8.5.1).
8.6.4 Economizer Heat Exchanger
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in the OFF position.
c. Remove insulation and clamps from economizer line
assemblies (refer to figure Figure 8--12).
d. Remove liquid Injection Solenoid Valve, Economizer
Solenoid Valve and Unloader Solenoid Valve coils.
e. Remove thermal expansion valve bulb.
f. Unbraze the liquid injection line at either valve con-
nection. Disconnect the economizer line at the un-
loader solenoid valve and compressor economizer
connection, unbraze line from economizer heat ex-
changer.
g. Disconnect the liquid inlet line at the filter drier and un-
braze line from economizer.
h. Disconnect the liquid outlet line at the connection just
above the economizer heat exchanger and unbraze
line from economizer heat exchanger.
i. Remove economizer heat exchanger, bolt replace-
ment economizer heat exchanger in place and reb-
raze lines by reversing the previous steps.
j. Procure new O--rings. Lubricate the O--rings, back
side of sleeves and coupling nuts. Using a backup
wrench at each connection torque as follows
Connection Torque Value
Filter Drier 41 to 51 Nm
(30 to 38 ft--lbs.)
Unloader Solenoid Valve 81 to 89 Nm
(60 to 66 ft--lbs.)
Liquid Outlet Line 52 to 57 Nm
(38 to 42 ft--lbs.)
Compressor Economizer 32 to 36 Nm
(24 to 27 ft--lbs.)
k. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
l. reinstall the thermal expansion valve bulb, valve
coils and insulation.
m. Place unit back in service and check operation.
8--12
 2 4

3 5

1
7 8

10

1. Liquid Inlet Line 6. Economizer Solenoid Valve

2. Liquid Outlet Line 7. TXV bulb
3. Liquid Injection Line 8. Economizer Line
4. Economizer Heat Exchanger 9. Compressor Economizer Connection
5. Liquid Injection Solenoid Valve 10. Unloader Solenoid Valve
Figure 8--12. Economizer Assembly

8.6.5 Filter Drier 8.6.6 Sight Glass Assembly

To Check Filter Drier
Check for a restricted or plugged filter-drier by feeling
the liquid line inlet and outlet connections of the drier
cartridge. If the outlet side feels cooler than the inlet
side, then the filter-drier should be changed.
To Replace Filter Drier
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Remove bracket, then replace drier.
c. Procure new O--rings. Lubricate the O--rings, back
side of sleeves and coupling nuts. Using a backup
wrench at each connection torque as follows
Connection Torque Value
Filter Drier 41 to 51 Nm
(30 to 38 ft--lbs.)
c. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Remove the sight glass assembly and O--ring. Using
a new O--ring, install and torque to 50 to 60 Nm
(37--44 ft--lbs)
c. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
8.6.7 Compressor Suction Modulation Valve
(CSMV)
The purpose of the SMV is to maintain the compressor
within its operating envelope and maximize unit
capacity and fuel economy.
At initial startup, the microprocessor will go through a
self test. When the test is complete, the MessageCenter
will display “SMV CLOSING”. Then the MessageCenter
will display “SETTING SMV XX%” with actual
percentage depending on ambient temperature and
refrigerated compartment temperature. The unit will
then go through its normal start procedure.

8--13 62-61753
 4 PIN CONNECTOR
CSMV 2-1/8 inch Nut
Figure 8--13. Suction modulation valve (CSMV)
If it is suspected that the SMV is malfunctioning, the
most efficient method of diagnosing the valve is to run a
pretrip (refer to Section 3.4). The pretrip steps will check
the remainder of the system and the #10 test will check
the SMV. The valve will be brought to a preset position,
the unit started and then the valve will be opened while
the microprocessor monitors suction pressure. If there
is a problem with the valve, valve stepper motor or
microprocessor wiring to the valve the test will fail.
Diagnostics -- Microprocessor or Wiring
a. Locate the wires, on the engine harness side of the
SMV connector labeled CSMVA, CSMVB, CSMVC
and CSMVD. These will correlate to the connector
pins labeled A, B, C and D. Refer to Table 8--2.
Table 8--2. CSMV Connections
Connector Pin Wire Color Winding/Pole
A BLACK 1A
B WHITE 1B
C RED 2B
D GREEN 2A
b. Place the SROS in the Start/Run position. DO NOT
ALLOW THE UNIT TO START. When the Message-
Center displays “SMV CLOSING”, measure the AC
voltage between pins A and B and then between C
and D. A reading of 10 to 16 VAC should be read by
the digital voltmeter for each pair of wires. If the read-
ing of 10 to 16 VAC is present on both of the wire
pairs there is a good signal coming from the micro-
processor.
c. If the reading of 10 to 16 VAC is not present on one or
both of the wire pairs, check the wiring between the
microprocessor and the SMV connector, or check
the microprocessor for proper model number Con-
figuration.
Diagnostics -- Stepper Motor
The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper
motor drive tester or ohmmeter.
a. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (Carrier
Transicold part number 07--00375--00), connect the 4
pin test cable to the valve connector, refer to
Table 8--2, and the cable wires to the tester in accord-
ance with wire and terminal color.
b. Set the step rate to 200 steps per second and either
open or close the valve. Each red LED should light se-
quentially until all four are illuminated. Any LED failing
62-61753
to illuminate indicates an open on that leg and a need
to replace the piston and drive motor assembly .
c. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding resist-
ance between connector pin 1A & 1B and then
between 2A & 2B, see Figure 8--14. In normal ambi-
ent, the resistance between the pins should be 72 to
84 ohms. If an infinite or zero reading is observed, the
piston and drive motor assembly is to be replaced.
1
1A (BLACK) (WHITE) 1B
2A (GREEN) (RED) 2B
2
Figure 8--14. CSMV Coil (Bi--Polar Design)
Diagnostics -- Valve
NOTE
If the valve failed pretest and passed the pre-
ceding diagnostic testing, this is an indication
that the valve internal mechanism is damaged
and the piston and motor assembly is to be re-
placed.
a. To test the valve internal mechanism, connect a gage
to the suction service valve and a stepper motor drive
tester.
CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
the suction or discharge service valves
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum.
b. Start the unit, set the step rate to 200 steps per
second and close the valve while watching the suc-
tion pressure. Within one minute the suction pressure
should begin to fall. Place the SROS in the OFF posi-
tion before the reading enters a vacuum.
c. If the suction pressure does not change, this is an in-
dication the valve is stuck and the piston and drive
motor assembly is to be replaced.
Replacing the Drive and Motor Assembly
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Remove valve piston and motor assembly and re-
place with a new assembly and gasket. The power
head should be set to 100% open when received from
the warehouse. This is to ensure the Teflon valve seal
is not damaged when it is installed. Ensure the valve
is fully open by using the stepper motor tester to
8--14
 manually open the valve to 100% before it is installed.
Torque nut to 47.4 Nm (35 ft--lb). 3

c. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-

ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
2 4
Emergency Repair Procedures :
1
In the event that the SMV system has a failure, and
replacement components are not readily available in an
emergency. A LIMP-HOME procedure can be done as
follows :
FLOW
DIRECTION
a. Attach a manifold gauge set.

b. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section

8.5.1).

c. Remove SMV power head by loosening the 2-1/8

inch diameter nut (see Figure 8--13), and sliding the
power head out.
d. Remove the piston by loosening the Allen screw and
removing the piston and screw.
e. Install the power head assembly (without piston),
torque to 47 to 54 Nm (35 to 40 ft--lb).
f. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
g. Start the unit.
7. Adjust the suction service valve so that the approxi-
mate temperature OR current limit is maintained.
For perishable loads, it is recommended that the ad-
justment be made so that the available capacity is
slightly larger than the load, the unit will cycle OFF
and ON.
h. Once repair parts become available, repair as re-
quired.
8.6.8 Electronic Expansion Valve
The electronic expansion valve (EVXV -- see
Figure 8--15) is an automatic device which maintains
constant superheat of the refrigerant gas leaving the
evaporator regardless of suction pressure. The valve
functions are: (a) automatic response of refrigerant flow
to match the evaporator load and (b) prevention of liquid
refrigerant return to the compressor. Unless the valve is
defective, it seldom requires any maintenance.
NOTE
As a preliminary check, ensure the EVXV coil is
snapped down fully, and the coil retention tab is properly
seated in one of the valve body dimples.
1. Electronic Expansion 3. Coil
Valve 4. Five Pin
2. Coil Boot Connector
Figure 8--15. Electronic expansion valve
Diagnostics -- Microprocessor or Wiring
a. Locate the wires, on the engine harness side of the
EVXV connector labeled EXVA, EXVB, EXVC,
EXVD and EXVE. These will correlate to the connec-
tor pins labeled A, B, C, D and E. Refer to Table 8--3.
Table 8--3. EVXV Connections
Connector Pin Wire Color Winding
A ORANGE A
B RED B
C YELLOW A
D BLACK B
E GREY COM (+12V)
b. Place the SROS in the Start/Run position. DO NOT
ALLOW THE UNIT TO START. When the Message-
Center displays “SMV CLOSING”, measure the AC
voltage between pins E & A and then between E & B,
E & C and E & D. A voltage should be read by the
digital voltmeter for each pair of wires. If the reading
is present on all of the wire pairs there is a good sig-
nal coming from the microprocessor.
c. If the reading is not present on one or more of the
wire pairs, check the wiring between the micropro-
cessor and the SMV connector, or check the micro-
processor for proper model number Configuration.
Diagnostics -- Stepper Motor
The valve stepper motor may be tested using a stepper
motor drive tester or ohmmeter.
a. To test with a stepper motor drive tester (carrier
Transicold part number 07--00375--00), connect the 5
pin test cable to the valve connector, and the cable

8--15 62-61753
 wires to the tester in accordance with wire and termin-
al color. (if a 5 pin tester cable is required, order Carri-
er Transicold part number 07--00375--11
b. Set the step rate to 50 steps per second and either
open or close the valve. Each red LED should light se-
quentially until all four are illuminated. Any LED failing
to illuminate indicates an open on that leg and a need
to replace the drive.
c. To test with an ohmmeter, check the winding resist-
ance between connector pin A & E, B & E, C & E and
then between D & E. In normal ambient, the resist-
ance between the pins should be 46 ohms. If an infin-
ite or zero reading is observed, the piston and drive
motor assembly is to be replaced.
Diagnostics -- Valve
NOTE
If the valve failed pretest and passed the pre-
ceding diagnostic testing, this is an indication
that the valve internal mechanism is damaged
and the piston and motor assembly is to be re-
placed.
PIN A (ORANGE) PIN B (RED)
A B
COMMON
(+12VDC)
A B
PIN C (YELLOW) PIN D (BLACK)
PIN E (GRAY)
Figure 8--16. Electronic Expansion Valve
62-61753
a. To test the valve internal mechanism, connect a gage
to the suction service valve and a stepper motor drive
tester.
CAUTION
The scroll compressor achieves low suc-
tion pressure very quickly. Do not use the
compressor to evacuate the system below
0 psig. Never operate the compressor with
the suction or discharge service valves
closed (frontseated). Internal damage will
result from operating the compressor in a
deep vacuum.
b. Start the unit, set the step rate to 200 steps per
second and close the valve while watching the suc-
tion pressure. Within one minute the suction pressure
should begin to fall.
c. If the suction pressure does not change, this is an in-
dication the valve is stuck and the piston and drive
motor assembly is to be replaced.
Replacing Expansion Valve & Screen
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Remove coil and unbraze valve. Clean all tube stubs
so new valve fits on easily.
c. Use a wet rag to keep the replacement valve cool and
braze in place.
d. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
8--16
 LIQUID INJECTION OR ECONOMIZER VALVE UNLOADER VALVE

1
6
2 7

3 8

4 9

5 10

6 11
COIL ASSEMBLY INTERNAL COMPONENTS

1. Locking Nut 7. Internal O--Ring

2. Upper O--Ring 8. Spring
3. Threaded Collar 9. armature
4. Coil 10. Diaphragm
5. Lower O--Ring 11. Drilled Washer
6. Armature Tube
Figure 8--17. Solenoid Valves (ESV, LIV & USV)
8.6.9 Economizer, Unloader, & Liquid Injection and then install the diaphragm as shown in
Solenoid Valves Figure 8--17.
Replacing the Coil d. IInstall a new internal O--ring into the valve body and
then reinstall the enclosing tube with armature and
NOTE spring.
The coil may be replaced without removing the Replacing Valve
refrigerant. a. To replace a valve, remove the refrigerant charge.
(Refer to section 8.5.1).
a. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position. Disconnect source and that SROS is in OFF position. Remove
coil leads. Remove locking nut, upper O--ring, coil, refer to “Replacing the Coil” above.
threaded collar coil and lower O--ring (See
Figure 8--17). c. If servicing the unloader solenoid valve, disconnect
the inlet connection and remove O--ring.
b. Verify coil type, voltage and frequency of old and new d. Unbraze valve from unit and braze new valve in
coil. This information appears on the coil housing. place. Wrap valve in wet rag and point flame away
c. Ensure upper and lower O--rings are installed on top from valve during brazing operation.
and bottom of coil and tighten locking nut to 1,2 to e. For the unloader solenoid valve, procure new O--ring.
1,4Nm (10 to 18 inch--pounds).
Lubricate the O--ring, back side of sleeves and coup-
Repairing Valve ling nut. Using a backup wrench torque as follows
a. Remove the armature tube, taking care the armature Connection Torque Value
and spring do not drop out. Unloader Solenoid Valve 81 to 89 Nm
b. Ensure the spring is properly seated in the armature (60 to 66 ft--lbs.)
and install into the armature tube.
f. Install coil, refer to “Replacing the Coil” above. Leak
c. If the valve is of the diaphragm type, install the drilled check, evacuate the unit and charge in accordance
washer into the body with the concave ends down with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.

8--17 62-61753
8.6.10 Economizer Thermostatic Expansion Valve
The thermostatic expansion valve (TXV) is an
automatic device which maintains constant superheat
of the refrigerant gas leaving the economizer heat
exchanger regardless of suction pressure. The valve
functions are: (a) automatic control of refrigerant flow to
match the economizer heat exchanger load and (b)
prevention of liquid refrigerant return to the compressor.
Unless the valve is defective, it seldom requires any
maintenance.
Replacing Expansion Valve
a. To replace a valve, remove the refrigerant charge.
(Refer to section 8.5.1).
b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position. Remove in-
sulation from the valve bulb and remove bulb.
c. Remove insulation from the expansion valve power
head.
d. Heat inlet and outlet connections to valve body and
remove valve. Clean all tube stubs so new valve fits
on easily.
e. Install new valve.
f. The thermal bulb is located on the bottom of the
equalizer line. This area must be clean to ensure
positive bulb contact. Firmly tighten the straps
around the thermal bulb and equalizer line.
g. Leak check and evacuate the unit in accordance with
sections 8.5.2 & 8.5.3. Reinstall insulation on bulb
and power head and charge in accordance with sec-
tion 8.5.4.
h. Check superheat in accordance with the following
section.
Measuring Superheat
a. Loosen the insulation at one end of the expansion
valve bulb.
b. Loosen one TXV bulb clamp and make sure area un-
der clamp (above TXV bulb) is clean.
c. Place a thermocouple parallel to the TXV bulb and
then secure loosened clamp making sure both bulbs
are firmly secured to suction line as shown in
Figure 8--18. Use insulation to completely cover
both.
62-61753
3
2
4
1
5
1. Equalizer Line
2. TXV Bulb Clamp
3. Nut and Bolt (Clamp)
4. Thermocouple
5. TXV Bulb
Figure 8--18. Thermostatic Expansion Valve Bulb
and Thermocouple
d. Connect an accurate gauge to the 1/4” port on the
economizer line.
e. Run unit until stabilized. Set controller to a frozen
setpoint. The economizer solenoid valve must be
energized (check FET 22 is illuminated) in order to
measure economizer TXV superheat. Several oper-
ating conditions may prevent energizing of the eco-
nomizer solenoid valve. These conditions include
high discharge pressure, low suction pressure, high
compression ratio and high current draw. The most
common condition that limits energizing of the valve
is maximum allowable current. If current is above the
limit, allow the unit to pull--down to a lower temperat-
ure to reduce power.
f. Take five or six readings of pressure and temperat-
ure 10 seconds apart and average readings.
g. From the temperature/pressure chart, determine the
saturation temperature corresponding to the aver-
age economizer heat exchanger outlet pressure.
h. Subtract the average saturation temperature from
the average bulb temperature. The difference is the
superheat of the economizer outlet gas. Refer to
section 2.10 for superheat setting. The valve is not
adjustable if superheat is not correct, replace valve.
8.6.11 High Pressure Switch
Replacing High Pressure Switch
a. Remove the refrigerant charge. (Refer to section
8.5.1).
b. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position.
c. Disconnect wiring from switch, and remove switch.
d. Install switch after verifying switch settings. (Refer to
following “Checking High Pressure Switch” sec-
tion)
e. Leak check, evacuate the unit and charge in accord-
ance with sections 8.5.2, 8.5.3 & 8.5.4.
8--18
Checking High Pressure Switch meter will indicate open. Close cylinder valve. Slowly
open bleed-off valve (to decrease pressure) until
switch closes (light will illuminate or ohmmeter will in-
WARNING dicate open).

Do not use a nitrogen cylinder without a 8.6.12 Pressure Transducers

pressure regulator. Cylinder pressure is The Compressor Discharge Pressure Transducer
approximately 159.9 bar (2350 PSIG). Do not (CDP) has a range of 0 to 34.0 bar (0 to 500 PSIG) while
use oxygen in or near a refrigerant system the Compressor Suction Pressure Transducer (CSP)
as an explosion may occur. (See and Evaporator Pressure Transducer (EVOP) have a
Figure 8--19)
range of --1 to 6.8 bar (--14.7 to100 PSIG). To test the
transducers, do the following:
1
4 NOTE
The Compressor Discharge Pressure on the
2 5 microprocessor Data List will never read less
than 0 bar/psig, even if it is exposed to a
vacuum (such as when evacuating the system.)

a. Verify that the wiring to the transducer is correct.

3 6
b. Power up microprocessor, refer to Note 2, page 7--2.
Check Voltage to transducer connector. Voltage
reading between A (positive) and B (negative) should
be 5.0 VDC.
c. To check the signal wiring, check continuity between
the transducer connector C terminal and the following
1. Cylinder Valve microprocessor connector:
and Gauge
2. Pressure Regulator CDP = 1MP--5, CSP = 1MP--29, EVOP = 1MP--17
3. Nitrogen Cylinder
d. If voltage and signal wire are good, replace the trans-
4. Pressure Gauge ducer. The transducer may be removed by discon-
[ 0 to 27.2 bar (0 to necting the connector and quickly backing it off the
400 PSIG)] Schrader connection.
5. Bleed-Off Valve
6. Switch 8.6.13 Defrost Air Switch

Figure 8--19. Typical Setup for Testing High NOTE

Pressure Switch
a. Remove switch as outlined in preceding section
b. Connect ohmmeter or continuity light across switch
terminals. Ohmmeter will indicate resistance and
continuity light will be illuminated if switch closed after
relieving pressure.
c. Connect switch to a cylinder of dry nitrogen. (See
Figure 8--19)
d. Set nitrogen pressure regulator higher than close set-
ting for switch being tested. Pressure switch open
and closing settings are provided in Section 2.10.
e. Close valve on cylinder and open bleed-off valve.
f. Open cylinder valve. Slowly close bleed-off valve and
increase pressure until the switch opens. If light is
used, light will go out and if an ohmmeter is used, the
If the DTT temperature is above 4.4°C (40°F)
defrost cannot be initiated and the Message-
Center will show “CANNOT START DEFROST
CYCLE”.
a. To check the Defrost Air Switch, run unit in cooling and
jumper across the air switch terminals. This will start
the defrost cycle as it simulates the action of the de-
frost air switch. Bypassing the switch in this manner
operates all components involved in defrost.
b. Unit should remain in defrost until DTT reaches
12.8_C (55_F). At this point the defrost cycle will ter-
minate, and the unit will resume automatic opera-
tion.
c. If the above test indicates satisfactory operation, test
DAS settings using a Magnehelic gauge (P/N
07-00177) or similar instrument as follows.

8--19 62-61753
 8.7 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM COMPONENT
SERVICE
2
5 8.7.1 Heaters

Description
6 3 The evaporator coil heaters and drain pan heater are
4 energized through the power supply or engine driven AC
1 generator. They are used in the defrost and heat modes.

1. Ohmmeter or Continuity Device Replacing Heaters

2. Adjustment Screw
(0.050” socket head size)
3. Low Side Connection
4. Pressure Line or Aspirator Bulb (P/N
07-00177-01)
5. Magnehelic Gauge (P/N 07-00177-00)
6. High Side Connection
Figure 8--20. Defrost Air Switch Test Setup
d. Ensure magnehelic gauge is in proper calibration.
NOTE
The magnehelic gage may be used in any posi-
tion, but must be re-zeroed if position of gauge
is changed from vertical to horizontal or vice
versa. USE ONLY IN POSITION FOR WHICH
IT IS ZEROED.
e. With air switch in vertical position, connect high pres-
sure side of magnehelic gauge, a tee and and aspir-
ator to high side connection of air switch. Tee is to be
placed approximately half-way between gauge and air
switch or an improper reading may result. (See
Figure 8--20)
f. Attach an ohmmeter to the air switch electrical con-
tacts to check switch action.
WARNING
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the
generator as the unit may start
automatically. Before servicing the unit, en-
sure the START/RUN--OFF switch is in the
OFF position. Also disconnect the power
plug and negative battery cable. NEVER
dis--assemble the generator: HIGH
MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE!
a. Remove the evaporator access panel.
b. Determine which heater(s) need replacing by check-
ing resistance of each heater rod (refer to section
2.11).
c. Remove hold-down clamp securing heaters to coil or
pan.
d. Lift the “U” portion of the heater (with the opposite
end down and away from coil). Move heater left (or
right) enough to clear the heater end support.
8.7.2 Evaporator Fan & Motor

NOTE The evaporator fan is of the blower type and circulates

Use a hand aspirator (P/N 07-00177-01), since air throughout the refrigerated compartment. The air is
blowing into tube by mouth may cause an incor- drawn through the evaporator coil where it is either
rect reading. heated or cooled and then discharged out the nozzles
into the compartment. The fan motor bearings are
g. With the gauge reading at zero, apply air pressure factory lubricated and do not require additional grease.
very slowly to the air switch. An ohmmeter will indi- For electrical data, refer to section 2.14.
cate continuity when switch actuates. The switch
contacts should close and the ohmmeter needle NOTE
move rapidly to 0. Any hesitation in the ohmmeter in- The evaporator blower assemblies are different
dicates a possible problem with the switch, and it
and rotate in opposite directions. Refer to
should be replaced.
Table 8--4 for correct identification.
h. Refer to Section 2.10 for switch settings. If switch fails
to actuate at correct gauge reading, adjust switch by
turning adjusting screw clockwise to increase setting or Table 8--4. Blower Wheel Identification
counterclockwise to decrease setting.
i. Repeat checkout procedure until switch actuates at DESCRIPTION ROTATION FAN COLOR
correct gauge reading. Road Side (engine Counter
Black
side) Blower Clockwise
j. After switch is adjusted, place a small amount of
paint or fingernail polish on the adjusting screw so Curb Side (com-
Clockwise Off White
that vibration will not change switch setting. pressor side) Blower

62-61753 8--20
Replacing Blower Assembly
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 d. Install the condenser fan assembly in reverse order of
1 Screws 5 Motor Mount
2 Cover plate 6 Screw driver
3 Blower housing 7 Screws
4 Evaporator fan
Figure 8--21. Evaporator Fan Bolts
a. Working from the outside of the trailer, remove the 4
screws (item 1 Figure 8--21). Leave cover plate (item
2) in place.
b. Working inside the trailer, remove access grill, back
panel and fan guard.
c. The evaporator blower assembly (item 4, wheel and
motor) is an integral part of the blower housing (item
3). Unscrew the 4 screws (item 7) and remove both
parts (blower assembly and housing) from the pod.
d. Remove blower assembly from housing.
e. Replace blower assembly parts as required.
f. Install blower assembly into blower housing. Install
blower assembly and housing back into the pod.
g. Working outside the trailer use a screwdriver (item 6)
to align the mounting holes in the motor mount (item
5) and cover plate.
h. Install screws (item 1). Start with two screws, remove
screwdriver and finish assembly with the last two
screws.
i. Check that fan does not touch ring of the blower
housing.
8--21
j. Complete the assembly in reverse order of removal.
8.7.3 Condenser Fan & Motor Assemblies
The condenser fans pull air through the condenser coil
and discharge over the engine. To replace fan and motor
assembly components:
a. Open the front doors
b. Disconnect wiring. Loosen securing bolts and allow
fan and motor assembly to drop onto guide rails.
c. Slide fan and motor assembly out of unit and replace
components as required.
removal.
8.7.4 Battery Charger(s)
Description
The battery charger (Item 2, Figure 2--2) is a solid state
device which converts the AC power, from the generator
or standby power source, to 12 Vdc.
Checking Battery Charger
NOTE
The battery must be in good condition before
doing the following test.
a. Run the unit with the battery charger connected as
usual.
NOTE
If there is no load connected at the VDC output,
the battery charger will not deliver voltage.
b. Measure current on the +12 VDC output of the bat-
tery charger. If current is between 3 and 21 Amps the
battery charger is functioning correctly.
c. If Amps = 0 check the battery charger input AC volt-
age. It must be between 350 and 670 Volts.
d. If there is no AC voltage, stop the unit and, if re-
quired, disconnect the standby plug. Check the high
voltage 3--position connector and the 12 VDC two--
position connections.
e. If connections are good, replace battery charger.
8.7.5 Generator
Description
Driven by the diesel engine, the generator delivers AC
power to the compressor, condenser fan motors,
evaporator fan motors and the battery charger.
When the unit is in heating or defrost mode, the genera-
tor also delivers AC power to the evaporator coil and
drain pan mounted heater rods.
62-61753
Preventive Maintenance & Operating Precautions Removal
Costly repairs and down time can usually be prevented
by operating electrical equipment under conditions
which are compatible with those for which the WARNING
equipment was designed. Follow the instructions
Be aware of HIGH VOLTAGE supplied by the
outlined below to ensure maximum efficiency of the generator as the unit may start
electrical equipment. automatically. Before servicing the unit, en-
Cooling sure the START/RUN--OFF switch is in the
OFF position. Also disconnect the power
plug and negative battery cable. NEVER
CAUTION dis--assemble the
MAGNETIC FIELD INSIDE!
generator: HIGH

Do not direct water or steam into the gener- 1. Disconnect the battery negative and then positive
ator openings. Do not allow any soap and terminals.
water solutions to enter the generator.

Keep all cooling parts clean. DO NOT EXCEED

TEMPERATURE RISE OF 80_C (176_F) ABOVE A
40_C (104_F) AMBIENT. This ensures that the NEMA
Class “F” insulation will not be damaged. DO NOT
EXCEED RATED LOAD. OPERATE GENERATOR AT
RATED SPEED. Failure to operate generators at rated
load or speed will cause overheating and possible
damage to windings due to over voltage or current.
Drying the Generator Windings

WARNING
High voltage (dielectric) testing must not be
performed on the machine without first ob-
serving NEMA rules. The insulation of this 2
generator winding may be safely checked
by using a megohm meter. A high reading 2. Disconnect the generator ground and ground strap
indicates good insulation. at the rear engine mounting channel.

WARNING
Generators of this type should not be
“flashed”. Operation with external voltage
source or momentary shorting of leads will
damage the generator and may cause inju-
ry.

Generators that have been in transit, recently steam

cleaned, or in storage for long periods may be subjected
to extreme temperature and moisture changes. This
3
can cause excessive condensation, and the generator
windings should be thoroughly dried out before bringing
the generator up to full nameplate voltage. If this
precaution is not taken, serious damage to the
generator can result.
The windings may be dried by placing generator in 3. Open the spiral wrap on the generator wires and cut
drying oven or hot room or dry with warm air blower the connections on the generator side.
directed through windings. 4. Remove the bolts from the two rear engine mounts.

62-61753 8--22
 7. Remove the tie--wraps holding connectors to the belt
5 guard and then remove belt guard.

5. Remove the jam nuts (5) and gasket from the ex-
haust connection.

8. Slide the generator removal bracket (Carrier

EXTENSION Transicold part number SKM--5670) into the rear en-
BRACKET gine support channel.

NOTE
For additional security, the generator removal
bracket may be modified to add a slot under the
rear mount for installation of an engine mount-
ing bolt. If this slot has been added, insert the
bolt as shown in step 9. If slot is not added, pro-
ceed to step 10.
6. Remove the upper engine mount. Note the mounting
nut is welded to an extension bracket for ease of re-
moval/installation. 9

7
VIEW WITH ENGINE REMOVED

9. Insert an engine mounting bolt in the rear mount and

trough the slot in the engine support to prevent
movement of the support.

8--23 62-61753
 11
11

13
11

11

10

13.Remove the center bolt and washer holding the fan

to the crankshaft.

10.Slide the rear of the engine out from the unit so that
the engine mounting is resting on the front mount
and the engine support.
14
11. Remove the four bolts holding the generator cover to
the rear of the engine.

SHIM

12

14.Remove three of the six rotor mounting bolts and in-
12.Remove the speed sensor and install the flywheel
locking tool (Carrier Transicold part number
07--60083--01) in its place.
CAUTION
The mica shim must be used during disas-
sembly of the generator from the engine.
Never attempt to remove the rotor from the
stator. Leave the shim in place until the gen-
erator is re--installed on the engine.
stall generator removal threaded rods (Carrier
Transicold part number 07--60122--00). Ensure the
rods are fully threaded into the flywheel.
Place the mica shim (P/N 54--00630--25) between
the rotor and the stator prior to loosening any other
bolts. Then, remove the remaining three rotor
mounting bolts and three remaining generator
mounting bolts.

62-61753 8--24
 a. Ensure the two dowel pins are installed in the bell
housing with the chamfer facing out (see
Figure 8--23).

11 O’CLOCK
DOWEL

0.5 in (12.7mm)

DOWEL
8 O’CLOCK 5 O’CLOCK

15 Figure 8--23. Bolt Hole Pattern For Bell Housing

and Crankshaft
b. Remove the flywheel and inspect it for any debris or
damage.
c. Install spacer (see Figure 8--22) onto the bell hous-
ing over the dowel pins.
d. Locate two screw holes on the face of the crankshaft
15.Install the generator lifting tool (Carrier Transicold which are located approximately 12.7mm (0.5 in)
part number 07--60085--00) into top two generator apart. All other screw holes are approximately 19mm
mounting holes. Rig hoist and remove generator as- (0.75 in) apart (See Figure 8--23).
sembly and spacer. If not immediately reinstalling a e. Assemble two guide rods (Carrier Transicold part
generator, remove the guide rods. number 07--60122--00) into the two holes in the
crankshaft located in the previous step. Assemble
Assembly Procedure
the third rod across from the first two rods.
f. Install the flywheel on the crankshaft using the guide
rods to align properly. Ensure the flywheel mates
9 11 with the crankshaft with no rocking or side to side
7 8 movement.
10
g. Ensure the generator is facing so that the leads exit
the stator winding are on the side away from the en-
3 gine. Install the lifting tool in the top two holes so that
1 2
the dowel pin holes will align when the assembly is
installed against the spacer. Lift the generator using
the lifting tool and bring it in place at the back of the
11 engine.
h. The mounting holes on the rotor have two holes off-
set to match the ones in the crankshaft and flywheel.
12 Locate them and turn the engine to line up the guide
rods in the crankshaft with the offset holes in the ro-
6 tor.
13 5
4 NOTE
The generator rotor will not turn in the stator.
1. Bolt, Stator/Fan Cover 8. Stator/Rotor i. Slide the rotor over the guide rods and mate the sta-
2. Washer Set, Assembly tor with the spacer. Ensure the dowel pins in the bell
Stator/Fan Cover 9. Spacer housing are fully engaged in the stator.
3. Fan Cover 10. Bell Housing
4. Fan Mount Bolt 11. Dowel Pin NOTE
5. Fan Mount Washer 12. Ground Screw The generator should slide freely on the guide
6. Fan 13. Grommet rods if the holes in the generator rotor are
7. Rotor Bolt matched correctly with the crank shaft holes.
Otherwise it will bind up and the stator will not
Figure 8--22. Generator Assy (P/N 54--00589--50) mate properly with the spacer.

8--25 62-61753
j. Install three rotor bolts and bring them snug against
the rotor.
NOTE
The bolts will be torqued later.
k. Remove the guide rods, assemble the remaining
three rotor bolts and and bring them snug against the
rotor.
NOTE
The bolts will be torqued later.
l. Install three stator bolts, each with two washers in
the following locations (See Figure 8--23) :
One in five o’clock location
One in eight o’clock location
One in eleven o’clock location
Bring the bolts snug against the stator.
NOTE
The remaining four stator mounting bolts will be
installed and will all be torqued after the fan
cover is installed.
m. Torque the rotor bolts to 79 to 97 Nm (59 to 72 ft--lb)
using an alternating pattern.
NOTE
Mark each rotor bolt after it is torqued to provide
a visual indication that all the bolts are torqued.
n. Remove the mica shim that is between the stator and
the rotor.
o. Install the fan onto the rotor using the fan mounting
bolt and washer
NOTE
The fan must be installed with blades away from
the engine.
p. Torque the fan bolt to 27to 32 Nm (20 to 24 ft--lb).
q. Feed the wires through the fan cover grommet.
r. Install the fan cover onto the stator and install the re-
maining mounting bolts and dual washer sets.
s. Torque the stator/cover mounting bolts to 42 to 52
Nm (31 to 38 ft--lb).
NOTE
Mark each stator bolt after it is torqued to to
provide a visual indication that all the bolts are
torqued
t. Complete reassembly by reversing steps 12 and 10
through 1 of the Removal Instructions. Torque the
62-61753
upper and lower engine mount bolts to 126 Nm (93
ft--lb).
8.7.6 Compressor Discharge Temperature Sensor
To replace the compressor discharge sensor (see
Figure 8--24) do the following:
a. Ensure the unit is disconnected from the power
source and that SROS is in OFF position.
b. Remove the existing sensor. Clean all silicone sealer
and dielectric compound from the sensor well. En-
sure well is clean and dry. Top of compressor, where
the sensor seals, must also be clean and dry.
SENSOR
SILICONE BEAD
SENSOR WELL
Figure 8--24. Compressor Discharge Temperature
Sensor
c. Using the syringe supplied with the replacement
sensor, squeeze all of the dielectric compound into
the sensor well.
d. Place a bead of the silicone sealer supplied with the
replacement sensor around the sensor sealing ring.
Insert sensor into the well with the leads parallel to the
suction fitting.
e. Reconnect sensor connector and run a Pretrip to test.
8.7.7 Sensor Checkout
An accurate ohmmeter must be used to check
resistance values shown in Table 8--5 & Table 8--6.
Due to variations and inaccuracies in ohmmeters,
thermometers or other test equipment, a reading within
2% of the chart value would indicate a good sensor. If a
sensor is bad, the resistance reading will usually be
much higher or lower than the resistance values given in
Table 8--5 & Table 8--6.
Two preferred methods of determining the actual test
temperature at the sensor, is an ice bath at 0_C (32_F)
or a calibrated temperature tester.
8--26
 Table 8--5. Sensor Resistance (AAT, RAT, SAT, ENCT, EVOT, CST, DTT)

°C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms

--40 --40 336,500 --7.8 18 49,060 24.4 76 10,250 56.7 134 2,809
--38.9 --38 312,600 --6.7 20 46,230 25.6 78 9,760 57.8 136 2,697
--37.8 --36 290,600 --5.6 22 43,580 26.7 80 9,299 58.9 138 2,590
--36.7 --34 270,300 --4.4 24 41,100 27.8 82 8,862 60.0 140 2,488
--35.6 --32 251,500 --3.3 26 38,780 28.9 84 8,449 61.1 142 2,390
--34.4 --30 234,200 --2.2 28 36,600 30.0 86 8,057 62.2 144 2,297
--33.3 --28 218,200 --1.1 30 34,560 31.1 88 7,686 63.3 146 2,208
--32.2 --26 203,400 0 32 32,650 32.2 90 7,334 64.4 148 2,124
--31.1 --24 189,700 1.1 34 30,850 33.3 92 7,000 65.6 150 2,042
--30 --22 177,000 2.2 36 29,170 34.4 94 6,684 68.3 155 1,855
--28.9 --20 165,200 3.3 38 27,590 35.6 96 6,384 71.1 160 1,687
--27.8 --18 154,300 4.4 40 26,100 36.7 98 6,099 73.9 165 1,537
--26.7 --16 144,200 5.5 42 24,700 37.8 100 5,828 76.7 170 1,402
--25.6 --14 134,800 6.6 44 23,390 38.9 102 5,571 79.4 175 1,281
--24.4 --12 126,100 7.7 46 22,160 40.0 104 5,327 82.2 180 1,171
--23.3 --10 118,100 8.9 48 20,990 41.1 106 5,095 85.0 185 1,072
--22.2 --8 110,500 10 50 19,900 42.2 108 4,874 87.8 190 983
--21.1 --6 103,600 11.1 52 18,870 43.3 110 4,665 90.6 195 902
--20 --4 97,070 12.2 54 17,900 44.4 112 4,465 93.3 200 829
--18.9 --2 91,030 13.3 56 16,980 45.5 114 4,275 96.1 205 762
--17.8 0 85,400 14.4 58 16,120 46.7 116 4,095 98.9 210 702
--16.7 2 80,160 15.5 60 15,310 47.8 118 3,923 101.7 215 647
--15.6 4 75,270 16.6 62 14,540 48.9 120 3,759 104.4 220 598
--14.4 6 70,720 17.7 64 13,820 50.0 122 3,603 107.2 225 553
--13.3 8 66,460 18.9 66 13,130 51.1 124 3,454 110.0 230 511
--12.2 10 62,500 20.0 68 12,490 52.2 126 3,313 112.8 235 473
--11.1 12 58,790 21.1 70 11,880 53.3 128 3,177 115.6 240 438
--10.0 14 55,330 22.2 72 11,310 54.4 130 3,049 118.3 245 406
--8.9 16 52,090 23.3 74 10,760 55.6 132 2,926 121.1 250 378

8--27 62-61753
 Table 8--6. Sensor Resistance (CDT)

°C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms °C °F Ohms

--40 --40 2,889,600 36 96.8 53,887 112 233.6 4,204 188 370.4 706
--38 --36.4 2,532,872 38 100.4 49,656 114 237.2 3,977 190 374.0 697
--36 --32.8 2,225,078 40 104.0 45,812 116 240.8 3,759
--34 --29.2 1,957,446 42 107.6 42,294 118 244.4 3,550
--32 --25.6 1,724,386 44 111.2 39,078 120 248.0 3,354
--30 --22.0 1,522,200 46 114.8 36,145 122 251.6 3,173
--28 --18.4 1,345,074 48 118.4 33,445 124 255.2 3,004
--26 --14.8 1,190,945 50 122.0 30,985 126 258.8 2,850
--24 --11.2 1,056,140 52 125.6 28,724 128 262.4 2,711
--22 --7.6 938,045 54 129.2 26,651 130 266.0 2,580
--20 --4.0 834,716 56 132.8 27,750 132 269.6 2,454
--18 --0.4 743,581 58 136.4 23,005 134 273.2 2,335
--16 3.2 663,593 60 140.0 21,396 136 276.8 2,223
--14 6.8 593,030 62 143.6 19,909 138 280.4 2,119
--12 10.4 530,714 64 147.2 18,550 140 284.0 2,021
--10 14.0 475,743 66 150.8 17,294 142 287.6 1,928
--8 17.6 426,904 68 154.4 16,133 144 291.2 1,839
--6 21.2 383,706 70 158.0 15,067 146 294.8 1,753
--4 24.8 345,315 72 161.6 14,078 148 298.4 1,670
--2 28.4 311,165 74 165.2 13,158 150 302.0 1,591
0 32.0 280,824 76 168.8 12,306 152 305.6 1,508
2 35.6 253,682 78 172.4 11,524 154 309.2 1,430
4 39.2 229,499 80 176.0 10,793 156 312.8 1,362
6 42.8 207,870 82 179.6 10,122 158 316.4 1,302
8 46.4 188,494 84 183.2 9,494 160 320.0 1,247
10 50.0 171,165 86 186.8 8,918 162 323.6 1,193
12 53.6 155,574 88 190.4 8,376 164 327.2 1,142
14 57.2 141,590 90 194.0 7,869 166 330.8 1,096
16 60.8 129,000 92 197.6 7,404 168 334.4 1,054
18 64.4 117,656 94 201.2 6,972 170 338.0 1,014
20 68.0 107,439 96 204.8 6,571 172 341.6 975
22 71.6 98,194 98 208.4 6,197 174 345.2 938
24 75.2 89,916 100 212.0 5,848 176 348.8 902
26 78.8 82,310 102 215.6 5,529 178 352.4 867
28 82.4 75,473 104 219.2 5,233 180 356.0 834
30 83.0 69,281 106 222.8 4,953 182 359.6 798
32 89.6 63,648 108 226.4 4,692 184 363.2 764
34 93.2 58,531 110 230.0 4,446 186 366.8 733

62-61753 8--28
 Table 8--7. Temperature Pressure Chart

Temperature Pressure Temperature Pressure

_C _F Bar PSIG _C _F Bar PSIG
--40 --40 0.3 4.5 0 32 5.0 72.5
--37 --35 0.5 7.1 1 34 5.2 75.6
--34 --30 0.7 9.9 2 36 5.4 78.8
--32 --25 0.9 12.9 3 38 5.7 82.1
--29 --20 1.1 16.3 4 40 5.9 85.5
--28 --18 1.2 17.7 6 42 6.1 89.0
--27 --16 1.3 19.2 7 44 6.4 92.5
--26 --14 1.4 20.7 8 46 6.6 96.2
--24 --12 1.5 22.3 9 48 6.9 99.9
--23 --10 1.7 23.9 10 50 7.2 103.7
--22 --8 1.8 25.6 13 55 8.0 115.4
--21 --6 1.88 27.3 16 60 8.7 126.1
--20 --4 2.0 29.1 18 65 9.5 137.4
--19 --2 2.1 30.9 21 70 10.3 149.4
--18 0 2.3 32.8 24 75 11.2 162.1
--17 2 2.4 34.8 27 80 12.1 175.5
--16 4 2.5 36.8 29 85 13.1 189.6
--14 6 2.7 38.9 32 90 14.1 204.5
--13 8 2.8 41.1 35 95 15.2 220.2
--12 10 3.0 43.3 38 100 16.3 236.8
--11 12 3.1 45.6 41 105 17.5 254.2
--10 14 3.3 48.0 43 110 18.8 272.4
--9 16 3.5 50.4 46 115 20.1 291.6
--8 18 3.7 52.9 49 120 21.5 311.8
--7 20 3.8 55.5 52 125 23.0 332.9
--6 22 4.0 58.1 54 130 24.5 355.0
--4 24 4.2 60.9 57 135 26.1 378.1
--3 26 4.4 63.7 60 140 27.7 402.3
--2 28 4.6 66.5 63 145 29.5 427.6
--1 30 4.8 69.5 66 150 31.3 454.0

8--29 62-61753
 SECTION 9
TROUBLESHOOTING

CAUTION
Under no circumstances should anyone attempt to repair the Logic or Display Boards. Should a
problem develop with these components, contact your nearest Carrier Transicold dealer for replace-
ment.

INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.1 DIESEL ENGINE
9.1.1 Engine Will Not Start
Battery insufficiently charged Check
Battery terminal post dirty or defective Check
Bad electrical connections at starter Check
Starter motor will not Starter motor malfunctions 9.1.4
crank or low cranking speed Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
Open starting circuit 9.1.5
Incorrect grade of lubricating oil 2.8
Worn generator bearings replace
No fuel in tank Check
Air in fuel system 8.4.2
Water in fuel system 8.4.5
Plugged fuel filter(s) 8.4.5
Starter motor cranks Plugged fuel lines to injector(s) Check
but engine fails to start
Fuel control operation erratic Engine Manual
Glow plug(s) defective 8.4.14
Fuel solenoid defective Engine Manual
Optional fuel pump (FP) malfunction 8.4.4
Starter cranks, engages, Engine lube oil too heavy 2.8
but dies after a few seconds Voltage drop in battery cable(s) Check

9--1 62-61753
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE

9.1.2 Engine Starts Then Stops

Fuel supply restricted Check
No fuel in tank Check
Leak in fuel system Check
Faulty fuel control operation Engine Manual
Fuel filter restricted 8.4.5
Injector nozzle(s) defective Engine Manual
Engine stops after Injection pump defective Engine Manual
several rotations Air cleaner or hose restricted 8.4.8
Safety device open 2.13
Fuel solenoid defective Engine Manual
Optional fuel pump (FP) malfunction 8.4.4
Open wiring to fuel solenoid Check
Mechanical lift fuel pump malfunction Engine Manual
Oil pressure switch defective Replace
9.1.3 Engine Will Not Shut Off
Loose ground connection Clean & Tight-
Engine will not shut off en
Improperly seated fuel solenoid Correct

9.1.4 Starter Motor Malfunction

Battery insufficiently charged Check
Battery cable connections loose or oxidized Check
Battery cables defective Replace
Starter motor will not Starter brushes shorted out Engine Manual
crank or turns slowly
Starter brushes hang up or have no contact Engine Manual
Starter solenoid damaged Engine Manual
Engine lube oil too heavy 2.8
Starter motor turns Pinion or ring gear obstructed or worn Clean both,
but pinion does not engage remove burrs,
or replace;
apply grease
Starter motor does not disengage Glow/Crank switch defective Replace
after switch has been released Starter motor solenoid defective Engine Manual
Pinion does not disengage Defective starter Engine Manual
after switch is released

9.1.5 Malfunction In The Engine Starting Circuit

Battery defective Check
No power to starter solenoid (SS)
Loose electrical connections Tighten
Battery defective Check
Loose electrical connections Tighten
Fuel solenoid Oil pressure safety switch (ENOPS) defective Replace
does not energize or does
not remain energized Run relay (RR) defective Replace
Engine coolant temp. (ENCT) defective Replace
Fuel solenoid defective Engine Manual

62-61753 9--2
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.1.6 Miscellaneous Engine Troubleshooting
Restriction in air cleaner 8.4.8
Air in fuel system 8.4.2
Crankcase breather restricted 8.4.13
Restricted fuel lines Engine Manual
Loss of power Defective fuel injection pump Engine Manuall
Defective injector(s) or incorrect type Engine Manual
Incorrect fuel injection pump timing Engine Manuall
Incorrect valve timing Engine Manual
Poor compression Engine Manual
Engine shockmounts defective Replace
Vibration
Poor compression Engine Manual
Restriction in air cleaner 8.4.8
Exhaust pipe restriction Removel
Restriction in water jacket Engine Manual
Restriction in radiator 8.4.10
Overheating
Coolant level too low 8.4.10
Loose water pump belt replace
Defective thermostat Engine Manual
Defective water pump Engine Manual
Excessive crankcase pressure Plugged crankcase breather line 8.4.13

9--3 62-61753
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.2 BATTERY CHARGER
Input fuse blows when charger is Short in 12 volt wiring causing Locate and re-
turned on overload of charger move short
Input fuse blows repeatedly, even Internal short Replace
when not connected
Bad cell in battery Test battery for
defect accord-
Charger does not taper back after ing to battery
charging for a few minutes manufacturer’s
instructions
Defective charger Replace
Open input fuse Replace.
Charger is not receiving AC input Using a voltme-
ter, confirm
charger is re-
ceiving correct
(nominal) 380V
Charger does not charge AC. If not check
input connec-
tions.
Charger output is not connected to 12 volt battery Check output
wiring connec-
tions to battery.
Defective charger Replace
Battery not connected to charger. It is Check charging
Low output voltage measured normal to measure 12 volts or less across leads from
across charger output charger output with no battery connected charger to bat-
tery
Reverse polarity connection to Internal DC fuse blown and possible Replace
battery has caused charger to damage to current carrying components
stop charging

62-61753 9--4
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.3 GENERATOR
Circuit breaker tripped Check
No voltage Open or short in stator windings Check
Short circuited Repair
Low engine speed Correct
Excessive load Check
Low voltage
High resistance connections -- connections Clean and
warm or hot Tighten
Fluctuating speed Correct
Fluctuating voltage Irregular speed of engine Engine Manual
Loose terminal or load connections Tighten
High voltage Excessive engine speed Correct
Generator overloaded Check
Clogged ventilation openings Clean
Overheating
Insufficient circulation Check Fan
Unbalanced load Balance
Mechanical Noise Loose laminations 8.7.5
Generator frame produces shock Check ground
when touched Static charge to frame

9--5 62-61753
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.4 REFRIGERATION
9.4.1 Unit Will Not Cool
Compressor contactor defective Check
Compressor malfunction Compressor defective 8.6.1

A defrost cycle did not terminate 9.4.6

Refrigeration system
Abnormal pressure 9.4.7
9.4.2 Unit Runs But Has Insufficient Cooling
Compressor Compressor defective 8.6.1
Abnormal pressure 9.4.7
Unloader valve malfunction 8.6.9
Expansion valve malfunction 9.4.11
Refrigeration system
No or restricted evaporator airflow 9.4.10
Suction Modulation Valve malfunction 8.6.7
Economizer system malfunction 9.4.13
9.4.3 Unit Operates Long Or Continuously In Cooling
Hot Load Allow time to
Trailer pull down
Defective box insulation or air leak Correct
Abnormal pressure 9.4.7
Refrigeration system
Temperature controller malfunction 9.4.9
Compressor Defective 8.6.1
9.4.4 Unit Will Not Heat Or Has Insufficient Heating
Evaporator fan internal motor protector open 8.7.2
Heat relay defective Check
Heater(s) defective 8.7.1
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Unit will not heat or has insuffi- Evaporator fan motor(s) defective or rotating backwards 8.7.2
cient heat Evaporator fan motor contactor defective Replace
Controller malfunction 9.4.9
Defective wiring Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Low voltage 9.3

62-61753 9--6
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
REFRIGERATION (Continued)
9.4.5 Unit Will Not Terminate Heating
Controller improperly set Reset
Controller malfunction 9.4.9
Unit fails to stop heating
Heater termination thermostat remains closed along with
the heat relay Repair

9.4.6 Defrost Cycle Malfunction

DTT is above 40_F (4.4_C) Cool Box Down
Will not initiate defrost Loose terminal connections Tighten
automatically Air sensing tubes defective or disconnected Check
Defrost air switch (DAS) defective or out of calibration 8.6.13
Microprocessor defective Replace
Loose terminal connections Tighten
Will not initiate defrost manually
DTT2 is above 40_F (4.4_C) Cool Box Down
Unit has been running less than 15 seconds Try again
Heater contactor or coil defective Replace
Initiates but does not defrost
Heater(s) burned out 8.7.1
Defrost air switch (DAS) defective or out of calibration 8.6.13
Frequent defrost
Wet load Normal

9--7 62-61753
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.4.7 Abnormal Pressure
Condenser coil dirty 8.6.3
Condenser fan rotating backwards Check Wiring
Condenser fan inoperative Check
High discharge pressure
Refrigerant overcharge or noncondensibles 8.5.4/8.5.5
Discharge service valve partially closed Open
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.6.7
Low discharge pressure Compressor worn or damaged 8.6.1
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter-drier partially plugged 8.6.5
Low refrigerant charge 8.5.4
Expansion valve defective 9.4.11
Low suction pressure No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 9.4.10
Excessive frost on evaporator coil 9.4.6
Evaporator fan(s) rotating backwards 8.7.2
Suction modulation valve malfunction 8.6.7
Liquid line service valve partially closed Open
Compressor worn or damaged 8.6.1
High suction pressure
Expansion valve defective 9.4.11
Suction and discharge
pressures tend to equalize Compressor worn or damaged 8.6.1
when unit is operating
9.4.8 Abnormal Noise
Loose mounting bolts Tighten
Compressor Worn bearings 8.6
Liquid slugging 9.4.11
Loose or striking shroud Check
Condenser or evaporator fan Bearings defective 8.7.2
Bent shaft 8.7.2
Water pump belt Cracked or worn replace
9.4.9 Control System Malfunction
Sensor defective 8.7.7
Relay(s) defective Check
Will not control
Microprocessor controller malfunction Check

62-61753 9--8
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.4.10 No Evaporator Air Flow Or Restricted Air Flow
Check return air bulkhead and air chute. Ensure return air Clean, repair or
is not restricted and chute is in good condition replace.
No or partial evaporator Check coil for even air flow with no “dead” spots. Clean. 8.6.2
air flow Frost on coil. To check defrost, run unit in cooling and place 3.9
in manual defrost.
Defrost air switch (DAS) defective or out of calibration 8.6.13
Evaporator blower loose or defective 8.7.2
Evaporator fan
Evaporator blower rotating backwards 8.7.2
9.4.11 Electronic Expansion Valve Malfunction
Incorrect software and/or controller Configuration Check
Excessive frost on evaporator coil. Manually defrost. 3.9
Suction service valve partially closed Open
Filter drier partially plugged 8.6.5
Low refrigerant charge 8.5.4
No evaporator air flow or restricted air flow 8.6.2
Low suction pressure
Evaporator fans rotating backwards 8.7.2
Loose or insufficiently clamped suction temperature Check
sensor
Failed suction pressure transducer 8.6.12
Failed unloader valve 8.6.9
Electronic expansion valve malfunction 8.6.8
improperly seated power head Ensure power
head is locked
in place
High suction pressure with low
superheat Failed suction pressure transducer 8.6.12
Foreign material in valve 8.6.8
Electronic expansion valve malfunction 8.6.8
Failed suction pressure transducer 8.6.12
Liquid slugging in compressor
Electronic expansion valve malfunction 8.6.8
9.4.12 Solenoid Valve Malfunction
No power to valve Check
Improper wiring or loose connections Check
Coil defective 8.6.9
Valve improperly assembled 8.6.9
Solenoid valve does not function
properly Coil or coil sleeve improperly assembled 8.6.9
Movement of plunger restricted due to: 8.6.9
a. Corroded or worn parts
b. Foreign material lodged in valve
c. Bent or dented enclosing tub
Foreign material lodged under seat Clean/8.6.9
Solenoid valve closes but
refrigerant continues to flow Defective seat Replace/8.6.9

9--9 62-61753
 INDICATION/ REFERENCE
POSSIBLE CAUSES SECTION
TROUBLE
9.4.13 Economizer System Malfunction
Solenoid valve does not function Check valve 9.4.12
properly
Thermostatic expansion valve Service valve 8.6.10
does not function properly
Economizer heat exchanger does Service economizer heat exchanger 8.6.4
not function properly

62-61753 9--10
 SECTION 10
WIRING
10.1 HARNESS PLUG WIRING

1MP -- NATURAL Terminal Component

3 OC--E (SN--1)
4 OC--H (SN--2)
1 24 5 (16) (30) CDP--C
6 (17) EVOP--C
7 (18) ENCT--A
9 (20) CDT--A
10 (19) CST--A
11 (22) AAT--A
12 (23) RAT--A
12 35 13 (35) SAT--B
14 OC--F,G,H
15 (29) CSP--A/SP--34
16 (5) (30) CDP--A
17 (6) EVOP--A
18 (7) ENCT--B
19 (10) CST--B/SP--32
20 (9) CDT--B
21 (34) DTT--B
22 (11) AAT--B
23 (12) RAT--B
29 (15) CSP--C
30 (5) (16) CDP--B/SP--37
32 EVOT--A
33 OC--J (SN--3)
34 (21) DTT--A
35 (13) SAT
Unused terminals: 1, 2, 8, 24, 25, 26,
28 & 31

10--1 62-61753
 2 MP -- Black 3 MP -- Grey

1 24 1 24

12 35 12 35

Terminal Component Terminal Component

2 HC9 3 (15) (27) SATCOM --C
3 OC2--B (RS--1)
5 (17) (29) SLP (C)
4 FLS--B
6 DAS--A 9 LIV
7 (18) (31) ENRPM--C 12 USV
8 (19) (20) (32) CSMV--D 15 (3) (27) SATCOM --B
11 (12) (22) (23) (35) EVXV--B 17 (5) (29) SLP --B
12 (11) (22) (23) (35) EVXV--E 23 ESV
13 OC2--A (RS--2)
27 (3) (15) SATCOM --A
15 ENCLS--C
16 OC2--B (DS) 29 (5) (17) SLP--A
17 ENOPS--A
18 (7) (31) ENRPM--B
19 (8) (20) (32) CSMV--C
20 (8) (19) (32) CSMV--A
22 (11) (12) (23) (35) EVXV--D
23 (11) (12) (22) (35) EVXV--A
26 HC19
28 OC2--B (ENOLS)
29 HP1--B/SP15
31 (7) (18) ENRPM--A
32 (8) (19) (20) CSMV--B
35 (11) (12) (22) (23) EVXV--C
Unused terminals: 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10,
Unused terminals: 1,5, 9, 10, 14, 21, 24, 25,
27, 30, 33 & 34 11, 13, 14, 16, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 24,
25, 26, 28, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34 & 35

62-61753 10--2
 4 MP 5 MP 6 MP

1 8
1 6 1 4

9 16 5 8
7 12

Terminal Component Terminal Component Terminal Component

1 (5) CCONR--2/HC--11 1 MPQC--9/SPK2 1 DISP/A1 -- BLK
2 (6) CDCON--A2 2 SP20/DES--1 2 DISP/B2 -- WHT
IPCDM1
3 (15) EVCON-- 4 PRM--OUT+ 3 DISP/C3 -- RED
A2/IPEVH1
4 (13) (14) HTCON1R--1 5 (6) GCS--2 4 DISP/D4 -- GRN
HTCON2--A1
SP--14
5 (1) CCONR--2 6 (5) GCS--3 5 DISP/E5 -- BRN
6 (2) CDCON--A1 7 PSCONR--2 6 DISP/F7 -- BLU
7 GENCONR--2 8 BUZZER/SPK2 7 DISP/G6 -- ORG
8 CT2/OGF 9 GPR 8 DISP/H8 -- YEL
9 CT2/CT3/CT4/ 10 SSR
OGF
10 CT3/OGF
13 (4) (14) HTCON1R--2
14 (4) (13) HTCON2--A1
15 (3) EVCON--A1
Unused terminals: 11 & 12. Unused terminals: 3, 11 & 12 Unused terminals: None

10--3 62-61753
 HC Plug

19 8 9
18 7 2 10
6 11
17 1 3
16 5 4 12
15 13
14

Terminal Component
1 OGF--OV/SP--34
2 MPQC--3/SCS--A
3 MPQC--1/BTY(+)
4 MPQC--4/SP--30
6 OC--A/GROUND
7 RCR--2/OC--B
8 SSR--87/SS
9 2MP--2/LS--1
11 SP--33/4MP--1/CCONR--1
12 F5--B/SSC/BTY(+)
14 GRD1/MPQC--2
15 GRD/HC--15
16 BTYC--A/SP--1
17 RS--2/OC--J/OC--K
18 MPQC--9/SP--35
19 2MP--26/GENCONR--1/PSCONR--1
Unused terminals: 5, 10 & 13

62-61753 10--4
10.2 DISPLAY HARNESS CONNECTIONS

Test Point Pin Color Description

TP14 Pin 1 Black +12 Vdc for Display backlighting and indicator LED s
TP13 Pin 2 White Ground for Backlighting and indicator LEDs
TP13 Pin 3 Red Ground for Backlighting and indicator LEDs
TP12 Pin 4 Green +5 Vdc for Display processor and LCD
TP11 Pin 5 Brown Display ground
TP10 Pin 6 Orange TX the serial communications from the control to the display
TP9 Pin 7 Blue RX the serial communications from the display to the control
TP8 Pin 8 Yellow Display ground

VOLTAGE TESTS:
Negative Test Lead Positive Test Lead Voltage Reading
TP13 TP14 12
TP13 TP12 5
TP13 TP11 0
TP13 TP8 0
TP11 TP14 12
TP11 TP8 0
TP8 TP14 12

10.3 WIRING SCHEMATIC

The wiring schematic is provided on the following page.

10--5 62-61753
 INDEX
A D
Air Cleaner, 8--6
Air System, Engine, 2--6
Alarm, Out of Range, 2--12
Alarms, Driver/Operator, 7--3
Alarms, Electrical, 7--42
Alarms, Maintenance, 7--84
Alarms, Microprocessor, 7--88
Alarms, Pretrip, 7--70
Alarms, Sensor, 7--59
Alarms, Shutdown, 7--4
Alarms, Start--Up/Engine, 7--22
Alarms, View Active, 3--15
Alarms, View Inactive, 3--16
Alarms, Warning/Status, 7--33
B Filter Drier, 2--7, 8--13
Battery, 1--1
Battery Charger, 2--6, 8--21
Belt, 8--7
C
Coil, Condenser, 2--6, 8--12
Coil, Evaporator, 2--7, 8--11
Compressor, 2--6, 8--10
Configuration, Start--Stop, 4--3
Configurations, 5--8
Continuous Run Operation, 3--10
Coolant, Engine, 1--1
Crankcase Breather, 8--7
Index--1
Data Download, 5--4
Data Recording, 3--28
Data, Component Current Draw, 2--15
Data, Component Resistance, 2--15
Data, Compressor, 2--13
Data, Electrical, 2--14
Data, Engine, 2--13
Data, Refrigeration System, 2--14
Decals, Safety, 1--5
Display, 2--10
E
Economizer, 2--7, 8--12
Engine, 2--6
Evacuation, 8--9
F
Fan, Condenser, 2--6, 8--21
Fan, Evaporator, 2--7, 8--20
Filter, Fuel, 8--4, 8--5
Filter, Lube Oil, 8--5
Fuel System, 8--4
G
Generator, 2--6, 8--21
Glow Plugs, 8--8
H
Heaters, 8--20
High Speed, 4--2
Hourmeters, View, 3--21
I
Indicator Lights, 2--10
IntelliSet, 2--13, 3--29
IntelliSet, Changing, 3--30, 3--31
62--61753
 K Module, Overload Ground Fault, 2--12
Module, Phase Reversal, 2--12
Key, ALARM LIST, 2--11
Key, ARROW, 2--11
Key, EQUAL (Enter), 2--11
N
Key, MANUAL DEFROST, 2--11 Noncondensibles, 8--10
Key, SELECT, 2--11
Key, START--STOP/CONTINUOUS, 2--11 O
Keypad, 2--11
Operation, Continuous, 4--4
Operation, Start--Stop, 3--8, 4--3
L Overrides, 4--10

Language, Selection, 3--26

Languages, 2--8 P
Light Bar, 2--12
Parameters, Functional, 3--22
Lock/Unlock the Remote Control Panel, 3--34
Parameters, Re--Start, 4--4
Parameters, Start--Stop , 3--8
M Parameters, Stop, 4--3
Pretrip, 3--4
Manual Defrost, 3--13
Pretrip Inspection, 8--3
MessageCenter, 2--10, 6--1
Priming Fuel System, 8--4
Microprocessor Replacement, 5--6
ProductShield, 2--13, 4--8
Mode, Bypass, 2--16
Pulldown, 4--5
Mode, Component Test, 5--1
Mode, Configuration, 5--1
Mode, Cool, 4--5 R
Mode, Default, 4--10 Radiator, 8--7
Mode, Defrost, 2--17, 4--5 Receiver, 2--7
Mode, Economized, 2--17 Refrigerant, 1--1
Mode, Heat, 2--17, 4--5 Refrigerant Circuit -- Cooling, 2--16
Mode, Liquid Injection, 4--10 Refrigerant, Charge, 8--9
Mode, Null, 2--17 Refrigerant, Leak Checking, 8--8
Mode, Service, 5--3 Refrigerant, Removing Charge, 8--8
Mode, Standard, 2--16 Remote Control Panel, 2--13, 3--32
Model Chart , 2--1 Restart Voltage, 3--9
Module, Control, 2--8 Restart, Charging Amps, 3--9

62--61753 Index--2
 S Switch, ENGINE/STANDBY, 2--11
Switch, Evaporator High Temperature, 2--7
Safety Devices, 2--16
Switch, High Pressure, 8--18
Safety Precautions, 1--1
Switch, High Pressure, 2--6
Scheduled Maintenance, 8--1
Switch, LANGUAGE, 2--11
Self Test, 3--3
Switch, Remote, 2--12
Sensor Checkout, 8--26
Switch, START--RUN/OFF, 2--11
Sensor, Ambient Air Temperature, 2--6
Sensor, Compressor Discharge Temperature, 2--6,
8--26 T
Sensor, Compressor Suction Temperature, 2--6
Technician Interface, 5--1
Sensor, Defrost Termination Temperature, 2--7
Temperature Control, 4--4
Sensor, Engine Coolant Temperature, 2--6
Temperature Range Lock 1 & 2, 4--7
Sensor, Engine Speed, 2--6, 8--7
Transducer, Compressor Discharge Pressure, 2--6
Sensor, Evaporator Outlet Temperature, 2--7
Transducer, Compressor Suction Pressure, 2--6
Sensor, Fuel Level, 8--5
Transducer, Evaporator Outlet Pressure, 2--7
Sensor, Remote Temperature, 2--12
Transducers, 8--19
Sensor, Return Air Temperature, 2--7
Trip Start, 3--14
Sensor, Supply Air Temperature, 2--7
TROUBLESHOOTING, 9--1
Set Point, Changing, 3--7, 3--33
Set Point, Preset, 3--34
Set Point, Removing Preset , 3--35 U
Sight Glass, 8--13
Unit Data, 3--17
Sleep Mode, 3--11
Software Installation, 5--5
Speed Adjustment, 8--6 V
Start--Stop, Automatic, 2--8 Valve, Compressor Suction Modulation, 2--7, 8--13
Start--Up, Engine, 4--1 Valve, Economizer Solenoid, 2--7
Start--Up, Standby, 4--1 Valve, Economizer Thermostat Expansion, 2--7, 8--18
Start--Up, System, 4--1 Valve, Electronic Expansion, 8--15
Starting Unit -- Remote Control Panel, 3--33 Valve, Evaporator Expansion, 2--7
Starting Unit --Engine Operation, 3--1 Valve, Liquid Injection, 2--6, 8--17
Starting Unit --Standby Operation, 3--2 Valve, Unloader, 2--6, 8--17
Stopping Unit, 3--27
Supply Air Limit Control, 4--6
Switch Board, 2--11
W
Switch, Defrost Air, 8--19 Wiring, Display Harness Connections, 10--5
Switch, Door, 2--12 Wiring, Harness Plugs, 10--1
Switch, Engine Oil Pressure, 2--6 Wiring, Schematic, 10--5

Index--3 62--61753
 Carrier Transicold Europe,
I’Européen Batiment D -- 4, rue Joseph Monier
92500 Rueil Malmaison -- FRANCE

Carrier Transicold Division

P.O. Box 4805
Syracuse, N.Y. 13221 U.S A

www.carrier.transicold.com

A member of the United Technologies Corporation family. Stock symbol UTX

©2010 Carrier Corporation D Imprimé en France 11-10